Only this pageAll pages
Powered by GitBook
Couldn't generate the PDF for 172 pages, generation stopped at 100.
Extend with 50 more pages.
1 of 100

Monolith

Start Here

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Using Monolith

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Relay Request Portal

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Deployment & Security

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Welcome to Monolith

Start here to access Monolith, get your environment ready, and find the product areas and resources most relevant to your workflow.

Welcome to the Monolith documentation site.

Monolith is a case, evidence, and analysis management platform built for digital forensic workflows. Use these docs to get started, learn how Monolith fits into your process, and reference specific features as your team works in the platform.

New to Monolith?

If you are accessing Monolith for the first time, start with:

  • Accessing Monolith: Find the correct cloud region and learn how to access Monolith through the web, desktop, or mobile applications.

  • Initial Setup: Review the recommended configuration steps for a new Monolith environment.

  • : Learn how Monolith authentication and two-factor authentication work.

  • : Learn how to sign in when your organization uses Single Sign-On.

  • : Install and connect the Monolith desktop application.

Monolith brings the major parts of the forensic workflow together in one system.

Common areas include:

  • Case and Inquiry management

  • Evidence intake, tracking, and storage

  • Chain of custody

  • Acquisitions and forensic work

Use the section to explore these product areas in more detail.

extends common Monolith workflows to your phone or tablet.

Use the mobile app to work with cases and evidence, capture evidence information and photos, perform chain of custody actions, collect signatures, and take notes while away from your workstation.

See to get started.

Relay is Monolith's structured request portal.

Relay allows investigators, attorneys, employees, partner organizations, and other requestors to submit forensic requests without requiring access to the primary Monolith application.

Requests submitted through Relay flow into Inquiries in Monolith for review and triage before becoming active casework.

See to learn how Relay fits into Monolith.

For technical deployment and security information, see .

Topics include:

  • Cloud security

  • On-premises deployments

  • Monolith endpoints and network access

  • Other technical deployment guidance

Monolith provides APIs for organizations that need to integrate case, evidence, acquisition, storage, task, client, contact, Inquiry, and other supported data with external systems.

See for authentication and endpoint documentation.

Webhook documentation will also be added to provide guidance for event-driven integrations.

Use these resources alongside the documentation based on how you prefer to learn:

  • : Product, solution, and platform information.

  • : Product overview and mobile workflow highlights.

  • : Learn more about structured forensic request intake.

  • : Monolith Mondays, Workshop Wednesdays, and how-to videos.

Evidence Management

Manage evidence items, storage items, physical locations, and audit workflows across Monolith.

The Evidence Management section brings together the tools used to track evidence, storage, physical locations, and inventory verification throughout Monolith.

Use these areas to maintain an accurate record of what your organization has, where items are located, and how they move through your workflow.

Evidence Items

Evidence Items provides an organization-wide view of evidence entered into Monolith.

Use it to find and review evidence across cases, work with evidence details, and access related evidence workflows.

See Evidence Items for additional guidance.

Storage Items

Storage Items tracks the physical or digital media used to preserve forensic data.

Storage items can be managed independently or associated with cases and evidence depending on your workflow.

See Storage Items for setup and usage guidance.

Item Locations models the physical locations used by your organization for evidence and storage movement.

Locations are organized by Office and can represent users, evidence rooms, shelves, lockers, cages, work areas, and other places where items may be located.

See Item Locations to learn how Offices, Location Groups, and individual locations work together.

Audits helps your organization verify that evidence and storage items are physically located where Monolith expects them to be.

Audits can be used as part of routine inventory checks and evidence accountability workflows.

See Audits for additional guidance.

Email Notifications

Manage your personal Monolith email notification preferences.

Monolith email notifications help users stay informed about assignments and important updates related to their work.

Email notification preferences are managed from Monolith Settings, but these settings apply to the currently logged-in user. Updating these options changes which email notifications you receive. It does not change notification preferences for other users in your organization.

Access Email Notifications

To manage your email notification preferences:

  1. Open Settings from the left navigation.

  2. Select Notifications.

  3. Review the available email notification options.

  4. Toggle each notification on or off based on your preference.

Monolith currently supports email notifications for the following events:

  • Notify me when I am assigned to a case

  • Notify me when I am assigned to a task

  • Notify me when software is about to expire

When a notification is enabled, Monolith may send an email to your account email address when the related event occurs.

Email notification preferences are user-specific.

Each user should review their own notification settings after their account is created. For example, one user may want to receive emails when assigned to a case, while another user may prefer to only receive task assignment notifications.

SSO Login

Learn how to sign in to Monolith using your organization's Single Sign-On provider and understand how SSO applies to Monolith and Relay.

Single sign-on, or SSO, allows users to log in to Monolith using their organization’s identity provider.

If your organization has configured SSO, you may not need to use a separate Monolith password. Instead, Monolith will redirect you to your organization’s login page after you enter your email address.

SSO can be configured for both Monolith and Relay. Because they are separate applications, SSO configuration for Monolith and Relay is handled separately.

To log in with SSO:

  1. Open Monolith using the correct web, desktop, or mobile application.

Monolith UI Features

Learn how to use common Monolith interface tools for tables, filtering, and searching across the platform.

Monolith includes common interface tools that work consistently across the platform. Learning these features can make it easier to find information, customize record views, and work efficiently with larger amounts of data.

These tools are used throughout areas such as Cases, Evidence Items, Inquiries, Clients, Contacts, Tasks, and other record-based views.

Tables display collections of records throughout Monolith.

Use table controls to:

  • Sort records by column

Global Search

Search across Monolith to quickly find cases, evidence, notes, tasks, acquisitions, storage items, and case files.

Global Search helps you quickly find records across Monolith without first navigating to a specific section.

Search results can include:

  • Cases

  • Evidence Items

  • Notes

Dashboard

Use the Monolith Dashboard to catch up on recent activity, review high-level information, and manage Tasks across your work.

The Dashboard provides a starting point for returning to recent work and identifying items that may need your attention.

Use the Dashboard to review recent activity, access personalized or administrative summary information, and manage Tasks across Monolith.

The Overview page contains the My Dashboard and Admin Dashboard views.

My Dashboard acts as a catch-up board, helping users quickly return to recently accessed Cases and Evidence Items, review recent activity, see assigned QA Reviews, monitor Tasks due soon, and identify new Inquiries.

Users with appropriate access can also use the Admin Dashboard for a high-level snapshot of Case activity, Evidence volume, Acquisitions, time tracking, Clients, and other organization-wide metrics.

See for more information about Dashboard widgets and customization.

The Tasks page provides a centralized view of Tasks across Monolith.

Case Reports

Generate Microsoft Word case reports using Monolith’s standard report builder or custom report templates.

Monolith supports two primary ways to create case reports: and .

Both options help teams turn structured Monolith data into a Microsoft Word document that can be reviewed, edited, finalized, and shared according to your organization's reporting process.

Monolith Case Reports are built into the product and allow users to generate reports by selecting the sections they want to include.

This is the most common reporting workflow for users who want a point-and-click way to create a case report without building or maintaining a custom template. Users can choose the relevant report sections, generate the report, and export it to Microsoft Word for final review, formatting, or QC edits.

Use Monolith Case Reports when you want to quickly generate a report from available case data such as case details, evidence, acquisitions, notes, files, contacts, quality assurance, and related activity.

Custom Report Templates allow organizations to create reusable Microsoft Word report templates that match their preferred reporting style, structure, formatting, and language.

These templates use Monolith report variables and template logic to populate Word documents with data from Monolith. Custom templates are useful when your organization has a specific report format, agency standard, branding requirement, or internal review process that needs to be reflected in the final report output.

Viewing and Accessing Audits

Find existing Audits in Monolith, review their status, and open an Audit to begin or continue verification work.

Navigate to Evidence Management > Audits to view existing Audits in your Monolith environment.

Audits are displayed in a standard Monolith table so you can review available records and open the Audit you want to work with.

The Audits table can display information such as:

  • Audit Name

  • Status

Using a scanner

Use barcode or QR code scanners with Monolith labels to quickly locate and verify items during an Audit.

Monolith supports barcode and QR code scanning to help users quickly locate records and verify physical items during an Audit.

Scanning can reduce manual searching when working through larger evidence or storage inventories.

Custom Monolith labels can include a barcode or QR code that identifies the associated item.

When the printed code is scanned, Monolith uses the identifier to locate the corresponding record without requiring the user to manually search for the item.

For information about configuring labels and the supported variables used for scanning, see .

Scanners are especially useful when working through a physical inventory.

During an Audit:

People

Manage the clients and contacts connected to your organization, requests, cases, evidence, and forensic work.

Monolith uses and to help your team keep track of the people and organizations connected to your work.

Although both store information about people or organizations, they serve different purposes within Monolith.

Clients generally represent the person or organization requesting work from your team.

A client may be associated with a directly or originate from a request submitted through . Client records help preserve information about who requested the work and provide a consistent record that can be associated with multiple cases over time.

Use Clients to:

  • Maintain information about requestors or customer organizations

Organization

Manage your Monolith team and office structure across your organization.

The Organization section in Monolith contains tools for managing your internal team and office structure.

Use these areas to define who works in Monolith and how your organization is structured across physical offices or locations.

Use Team Management to manage the people who have access to your Monolith environment.

Team settings can affect user access, assignments, casework, and other workflows throughout Monolith.

See Team Management for user account and access management.

Use Offices to represent the physical offices, laboratories, or organizational locations used by your team.

Offices help provide organizational context for users and can also be relevant to evidence locations and chain of custody workflows.

See Offices for setup and usage guidance.

Organization Info

Customize your Monolith Account

In this section you can add additional details to your organization's profile including name, address details, contact information, and website.

Here you are also able to change the default Monolith logo to the logo of your organization.

AI in Monolith

Review the AI-powered features currently available in Monolith and the supported AI providers used to deliver them.

AI-powered features are added to Monolith over time as part of normal product development.

Our goal is to keep AI-assisted workflows optional where possible so users can control when information is provided to AI systems for processing.

Monolith currently supports AI processing through the following providers:

  • OpenAI

  • Anthropic

  • Initial Setup

  • Team Management

  • Offices

Team Management

Offices

Related Documentation

Tasks, notes, files, and quality assurance
  • Clients and contacts

  • Lab resources

  • Case reporting and analytics

  • Administrative settings and configuration

  • Explore Monolith

    Take Monolith Into the Field

    Receiving Requests From Outside Your Team?

    Deployment, Security, and IT

    Integrate With Monolith

    More Monolith Resources

    Login & 2FA
    SSO Login
    Monolith Desktop Setup
    Using Monolith
    Monolith Mobile
    Monolith Mobile
    Relay Overview
    Deployment & Security
    Monolith API
    Monolith Forensics Website
    Monolith Mobile
    Relay Request Portal
    Monolith YouTube

    Audits

    Item Locations

    Audits

    Related Documentation

    Offices
    Team Management
    Storage Items
    Item Locations

    Available Email Notifications

    User-Specific Setting

    These settings control email notifications for your user account only. They do not enable or disable email notifications for other Monolith users.

    Show or hide available fields
  • Reorder and resize columns

  • Adjust how information is displayed

  • Work with the metadata most relevant to your workflow

  • See Tables for additional guidance.

    Query Filter narrows a table to records that match specific field-based conditions.

    Filters can be used to focus on the information you need without changing the underlying records.

    For example, you might filter Cases by Status, Evidence Items by Type, or Inquiries using Custom Field values.

    See Query Filter for additional guidance.

    Global Search helps locate records across Monolith without first navigating to a specific section.

    Use Global Search when you know what you are looking for but may not know exactly where the record is located.

    See Global Search for additional guidance.

    • Tables

    • Query Filter

    • Global Search

    Common UI Features

    Tables

    Query Filter

    Global Search

    Explore UI Features

    Custom Report Templates are powerful, but they may require additional setup because they use Monolith’s report variables and template syntax.

    Reporting Option
    Best For

    Monolith Case Reports

    Quickly generating a report by selecting sections from the Monolith UI

    Custom Report Templates

    Producing reports that match a specific Microsoft Word document format or organization style

    For most standard reporting workflows, start with Monolith Case Reports.

    Use Custom Report Templates when your organization needs a specific Word document layout, custom wording, advanced formatting, or more control over how report data is displayed.

    Reports exported from Monolith can be opened in Microsoft Word for final review.

    This allows users to:

    • Review report content before final delivery

    • Make QC edits

    • Adjust formatting if needed

    • Add final comments or supplemental language

    • Save or distribute the finalized report according to the organization’s process

    To learn more about the standard point-and-click report builder, see Monolith Case Reports.

    To learn more about custom Word-based templates and report variables, see Custom Report Templates.

    Monolith Case Reports

    Custom Report Templates

    Monolith Case Reports
    Custom Report Templates
    Case

    Which Reporting Option Should I Use?

    Report Review and Finalization

    Next Steps

    AWS Bedrock

    Current AI-assisted features include:

    Evidence Scanning can scan textual information from devices, documents, labels, or screens and use the detected information to help populate the Evidence creation form.

    Using Evidence Scanning is optional.

    See Monolith Mobile for additional information.

    Evidence Smart Paste reads textual information copied by the user, interprets the available Evidence details, and uses them to help populate the Evidence creation form.

    Using Smart Paste is optional.

    See Evidence Items for additional information about creating and managing Evidence in Monolith.

    As additional AI-assisted capabilities become available in Monolith, this page will be updated to describe their use.

    AI Subprocessors in Monolith

    Current AI Features

    Monolith Mobile

    Monolith

    Additional AI Features

    Enter your account email address.
  • Select Log In.

  • If SSO is enabled for your organization, Monolith will redirect you to your organization’s identity provider.

  • Complete the login process required by your organization.

  • After authentication is complete, you will be redirected back to Monolith.

  • SSO Login

    Organizations using Relay may also configure SSO for Relay access.

    Relay and Monolith use separate authentication configurations. Enabling SSO for Monolith does not automatically enable SSO for Relay.

    Relay SSO allows approved Relay users to authenticate through the organization's identity provider rather than using a separate Relay password.

    SSO configuration requires coordination between your organization's IT team and Monolith Support.

    To configure SSO for Monolith or Relay, contact support@monolithforensics.com. Monolith Support can provide the required service provider information and coordinate configuration and testing with your IT team.

    Monolith and Relay SSO should be configured and tested separately when your organization uses both applications.

    If you are unable to log in with SSO, confirm that:

    • You are using the correct Monolith URL for your organization's cloud region or environment

    • Your Monolith user account has been created and is active

    • Your email address is associated with your organization's SSO configuration

    • Your email address in Monolith matches the identity information provided by your organization's identity provider

    • Your organization's identity provider is allowing access to Monolith

    If the issue continues, contact your Monolith administrator or Monolith Support.

    • Accessing Monolith

    • Login & 2FA

    • Relay Overview

    Logging In With SSO

    Relay SSO

    Setting Up SSO

    Troubleshooting

    Related Documentation

    Tasks

  • Acquisitions

  • Storage Items

  • Case Files

  • To open Global Search, press Control + F on your keyboard.

    You can also select the magnifying glass icon near the bottom of the Monolith sidebar.

    Begin typing your search term and matching results will appear as you type.

    Select a result to open the associated record.

    If more results are available than fit in the search window, scroll within the results to continue reviewing matches.

    You can also open global search by clicking the magnifying glass icon in the lower left corner of the sidebar menu.

    As you type, matching results appear in the search box. Click the arrow icon on the search results to open the item.

    If a search returns more results than fit in the window, scroll down within the search box to see the rest.

    • Monolith UI Features

    • Tables

    • Query Filter

    Open Global Search

    Video Walkthrough

    Related Documentation

    Use this area to review and manage work across Cases rather than opening individual Cases one at a time.

    See Tasks for more information about creating, assigning, organizing, and tracking Tasks.

    • Overview

    • Tasks

    • Cases

    • Evidence Items

    Overview

    Tasks

    Overview

    Related Documentation

    Item Type

  • Assignee

  • Start Date

  • Due Date

  • Other available Audit metadata

  • Use the table controls to sort, search, filter, or adjust the visible columns as needed.

    See Tables for information about working with standard Monolith table controls.

    To open an existing Audit:

    1. Navigate to Evidence Management > Audits.

    2. Find the Audit you want to review.

    3. Select the Audit Name from the table.

    The Audit opens to its detailed view where you can review the included items, track verification progress, and continue the Audit workflow.

    View an audit by click the audit name within the table

    Access to Audits depends on the permissions available to your Monolith user account.

    If you do not see the Audits section or cannot access an Audit you expect to use, contact your Monolith administrator.

    • Audits

    • Creating Audits

    • Audit Features & Layout

    • Auditing Items

    View Existing Audits

    Open an Audit

    Audit Access

    Related Documentation

    Open the Audit you want to perform.
  • Work from the applicable Audit item view.

  • Scan the barcode or QR code attached to the physical item.

  • Monolith locates the corresponding record included in the Audit.

  • Review the item and complete the appropriate verification action.

  • This can make it easier to reconcile physical items with the records stored in Monolith, particularly when an Audit contains a large number of items.

    Audit items can be verified manually or through the supported scanning workflow.

    When a scanner is used, Monolith records the Audit method as Scanned.

    When an item is reviewed and its status is updated directly in Monolith without scanning, the Audit method is recorded as Manual.

    See Auditing Items for more information about passing, failing, and documenting Audit results.

    Most standard USB barcode or QR code scanners behave like keyboard input and do not require special configuration within Monolith.

    Before beginning a large Audit, test the scanner with a Monolith label to confirm that the expected item can be located successfully.

    • Audits

    • Creating Audits

    • Audit Features & Layout

    • Auditing Items

    Using Scanners With Monolith Labels

    Using a Scanner During an Audit

    Use QR Codes and Barcodes for Scanning

    Manual and Scanned Audits

    Scanner Setup

    Related Documentation

    Associate a client with one or more cases

  • Review cases connected to a client

  • Maintain contact and organization details for repeat requestors

  • See Clients for more information.

    Contacts represent other people associated with your forensic work.

    A contact can be connected to a case, evidence item, acquisition, or other relevant case context, allowing your team to preserve the relationship between a person and the work being performed.

    Contacts may include:

    • Suspects

    • Victims

    • Witnesses

    • Custodians

    • Attorneys

    • Opposing counsel

    • Colleagues

    • Investigators

    • Examiners

    • Other individuals relevant to the case

    Use Contacts whenever preserving information about a person and their relationship to the case may be useful later.

    See Contacts for more information.

    • Clients

    • Contacts

    • Cases

    • Evidence Items

    Clients

    Clients
    Contacts
    case
    Relay

    Contacts

    Related Documentation

    Case Management

    Manage active cases, review incoming inquiries, and move forensic work from request intake through case completion.

    The Case Management section contains the primary tools used to organize forensic work in Monolith.

    Cases bring together the people, evidence, acquisitions, files, notes, tasks, quality assurance, reporting, and other information associated with a matter or investigation.

    Use Inquiries to review incoming requests before they become active casework.

    Cases

    A Case is the central record used to organize forensic work in Monolith.

    Cases can contain and connect information such as:

    • Evidence Items

    • Acquisitions

    • Storage Items

    • Clients and Contacts

    • Tasks

    • Notes

    • Files

    • Quality Assurance

    • Reports

    • Activity history

    Cases also maintain their own identifying information, assignments, status, progress, dates, and other metadata used to manage and report on work across your organization.

    See to learn how cases are created, managed, and used throughout Monolith.

    Monolith can generate Microsoft Word reports using information stored throughout a Case.

    Reports can include case information, evidence, acquisitions, chain of custody, analysis, notes, tasks, contacts, and other supported case data.

    See for information about Monolith's standard report builder and custom report templates.

    Inquiries provide a staging and triage area for work that has been requested but has not yet become an active Case.

    Inquiries are commonly created from requests submitted through Relay, but they can also support other intake workflows.

    Your team can review the submitted information, update the Inquiry status, communicate with the requestor through Relay when applicable, and decide when the work should become a Case.

    An Inquiry can be used to:

    • Create a new Case

    • Merge the request into an existing Case

    • Carry supported Evidence, Contacts, files, and custom field information into the Case

    • Preserve the connection between the original request and the resulting casework

    See for additional guidance.

    For Relay-specific workflows, see .

    Lab Management

    Manage forensic software and lab equipment used by your organization, including ownership, licensing, expiration, and operational details.

    The Lab Management section helps your organization keep track of the software and equipment used to perform forensic work.

    Use these records to maintain operational information about the tools your lab depends on and keep important details available to the rest of your Monolith workflow.

    Forensic Software

    Use Forensic Software to maintain information about the software products used by your team.

    Software records can help your organization keep track of details such as:

    • Software name

    • Version information

    • Licensing or subscription information

    • Expiration dates

    • Other relevant software details

    Forensic Software can also be referenced when documenting Acquisitions, allowing users to record which tool and version were used during forensic collection.

    See Forensic Software for additional guidance.

    Use Equipment to maintain records for physical lab equipment used by your organization.

    Equipment records can help centralize information about the tools and devices your team relies on during forensic work.

    Examples might include:

    • Forensic workstations

    • Write blockers

    • Imaging hardware

    • Mobile acquisition equipment

    See Equipment for additional guidance.

    Keeping software and equipment information in Monolith provides a shared reference for your team and helps preserve operational context around the tools used during forensic work.

    This can be useful for:

    • Tracking software versions and licensing

    • Monitoring software expiration dates

    • Maintaining equipment information

    • Supporting repeatable forensic workflows

    Analytics

    Review organization-wide metrics and operational reporting across Cases, Evidence, Storage, QA, Acquisitions, and Time Entries.

    The Analytics section provides organization-wide reporting across information recorded in Monolith.

    Use Analytics when you want to review trends, workload, activity, or operational metrics across multiple Cases and records rather than reporting on a single Case.

    Reports

    The Reports page allows users to create Metrics Reports from supported areas of Monolith.

    Current report categories include:

    • Cases - Overview

    • Evidence - Overview

    • Storage - Overview

    • QA Entries - Overview

    • Acquisitions - Overview

    • Time Entries - Overview

    • Forensic Partner Reporting - FPR

    Each report category focuses on a different part of the Monolith workflow and provides its own reporting options and metrics.

    See for information about creating Metrics Reports and choosing the appropriate report category.

    Analytics Reports and Case Reports serve different purposes.

    Analytics Reports are designed for organization-wide metrics and operational reporting across larger sets of Monolith data.

    Case Reports are generated from an individual Case and are intended to produce a Microsoft Word document containing selected Case information.

    Use Analytics when you want to understand activity across your organization.

    Use Case Reports when you need a report for a specific Case.

    Analytics is one of several ways to work with Monolith data.

    Depending on the information you need, you can also:

    • Filter and export data from Monolith tables

    • Generate Case-specific Microsoft Word reports

    • Use the Monolith API for custom integrations or reporting workflows

    See for information about filtering, customizing, and exporting table data.

    See for programmatic access to supported Monolith resources.

    Relay Overview

    Understand how Relay provides a structured request portal for submitting forensic requests and moving them directly into Monolith for triage and casework.

    Relay is Monolith's request portal for collecting structured forensic requests from people outside of your primary Monolith user base.

    Instead of receiving requests through email, phone calls, spreadsheets, web forms, ticketing systems, or other disconnected channels, Relay gives requestors a consistent place to submit the information your team needs before forensic work begins.

    Requests submitted through Relay flow directly into Case Management > Inquiries in Monolith, where your team can review the submitted information, update the inquiry status, and ultimately create a new case or merge the inquiry into an existing case.

    Request-specific messaging remains in Relay. Monolith users who need to communicate with requestors through Relay should also have an appropriate Relay account.

    Why Use Relay?

    Forensic teams often receive requests from many more people than the small group of users performing the actual forensic work.

    A Monolith environment may have only a handful of licensed Monolith users while supporting hundreds of requestors through Relay.

    Relay helps your team:

    • Standardize how forensic requests are submitted

    • Collect important case and evidence information before intake

    • Keep request information connected to the resulting Monolith case

    • Create a new case or merge additional requests into an existing case

    • Reduce back-and-forth communication caused by incomplete requests

    • Give requestors visibility into request and case progress

    • Provide request-specific communication through Relay comments and @mentions

    • Share files securely through

    • Avoid maintaining a separate intake form, ticketing system, or request website

    • Support large populations of requestors without requiring each person to have a Monolith license

    Relay users do not consume Monolith user licenses, and an organization can support as many Relay users as needed.

    A typical Relay workflow looks like this:

    For many teams, this workflow can move quickly from request submission to Case creation or merge. Inquiry Statuses, Relay messaging, and additional review steps are available when a more structured triage process is useful. Inquiry Status updates can also be reflected to the requestor in Relay, providing visibility when a request is accepted, declined, awaiting additional information, or otherwise moving through the intake process.

    Choose the guide that best matches how you use Relay:

    • - Learn how to submit requests, add evidence and contacts, track progress, communicate with the forensic team, and access shared files.

    • - Learn how forensic teams review incoming Inquiries, manage request status, and create or merge cases.

    • - Configure your Relay tenant, manage user access, provide request instructions, and control custom fields.

    Release Notes

    Review current and historical Monolith release notes, including new features, improvements, and fixes by version.

    Monolith Release Notes provide a history of product updates across Monolith.

    Use Release Notes to review changes introduced in the current version or look back at updates from previous releases.

    Review Release Notes

    Release Notes are organized by Monolith version.

    Select a version from the version menu to review the changes included with that release.

    Release information may include:

    • New features

    • Product improvements

    • Workflow changes

    • Bug fixes

    • Other notable updates

    The most recent release is available by default, while previous versions remain available for historical reference.

    Use the version selector at the top of the Release Notes page to move between current and historical releases.

    This can be useful when:

    • Reviewing when a feature or behavior changed

    • Catching up after an update

    • Comparing changes between versions

    • Troubleshooting a workflow that changed after an upgrade

    About

    View the installed Monolith version, Monolith Forensics contact information, and software license information.

    The About page provides general information about the Monolith application and Monolith Forensics.

    Use this page to review the version of Monolith currently running in your environment, find Monolith Forensics contact information, and review software licensing information.

    Monolith Version

    The current Monolith application version is displayed near the top of the About page.

    This can be useful when:

    • Confirming which version of Monolith your environment is running

    • Reviewing Release Notes for a particular version

    • Troubleshooting an issue with Monolith Support

    • Comparing behavior before and after an update

    See to review changes included in current and previous Monolith versions.

    The About page also includes Monolith Forensics company and support information.

    For product questions, technical assistance, or other support needs, contact:

    support@monolithforensics.com

    See for additional information about getting help with Monolith.

    The About page includes the Monolith Software License Agreement applicable to the software.

    For the full agreement in the Monolith documentation, see .

    Deployment

    Review the files included with a Monolith on-premises deployment package and understand the role of each configuration component.

    On-Premises Package

    Once you have purchased Monolith and are ready to deploy, you will be provided with a Monolith On-premises deployment package. This package contains configuration files necessary to run the deployment.

    Package Contents

    The package will contain the following items:

    • .env

      • This environment file contains variables that are provided to your Monolith deployment at run time. This is where your licensing information is sotred, along with other deployment settings.

    • docker-compose.yml

      • This is a Docker deployment configuration file. This file defines how the various Monolith containers are configured and deployed.

      • This provides a predefined configuration so you do not need to build the Monolith Docker deployement from scratch.

    • init

      • This folder contains additional configuration files required by the deployment.

    Cloud Security

    Review Monolith cloud security, authentication options, single sign-on, and related deployment and network information.

    Monolith is designed to support organizations that need to protect sensitive case, evidence, and forensic information while maintaining practical access for their teams.

    The Cloud Security section provides an overview of the security and authentication options available for Monolith-hosted environments.

    Security Overview

    The Security Overview provides additional information about the controls and practices used to protect Monolith cloud environments and customer data.

    Use this page when reviewing Monolith from an information security, compliance, procurement, or IT perspective.

    See Security Overview for additional information.

    Authentication and Access

    Monolith supports several authentication controls for accessing cloud environments.

    Depending on your organization's configuration, users may authenticate using:

    • Monolith account credentials

    • Two-factor authentication

    • Single sign-on through your organization's identity provider

    See for information about standard Monolith authentication.

    Organizations can configure Single Sign-On (SSO) so users authenticate through their existing identity provider.

    SSO can help organizations align Monolith access with existing identity, account management, and authentication policies.

    Monolith and Relay can both support SSO, but their configurations are managed separately.

    See for additional information.

    Organizations with firewall, allowlisting, or other network requirements may need information about the Monolith services their users access.

    See for current endpoint and network reference information.

    This section focuses on Monolith-hosted cloud environments.

    Organizations that deploy Monolith within their own infrastructure should see for deployment-specific guidance.

    Docker Installation

    Review supported Docker installation options for Windows, macOS, and Linux systems used with Monolith on-premises deployments.

    This page provides Docker installation guidance for systems that may be used with a Monolith on-premises deployment.

    Windows

    To install Docker on Windows, install Docker Desktop for Windows.

    Follow the official Docker installation instructions:

    Install Docker Desktop on Windows

    WSL

    Docker Desktop for Windows can use Windows Subsystem for Linux 2 (WSL 2) as its container backend.

    Depending on the Windows system and Docker configuration, Docker Desktop may use WSL 2 or another supported backend such as Hyper-V.

    If your deployment uses WSL 2, follow Microsoft's current installation guidance to enable and configure WSL before deploying Monolith.

    macOS

    To install Docker on macOS, install Docker Desktop for Mac.

    Docker provides installers for both Apple silicon and Intel-based Macs.

    Follow the official Docker installation instructions:

    For Linux-based Monolith hosts, follow Docker's installation guidance for your supported Linux distribution.

    For Ubuntu Server, see:

    Signature Tablets

    Set up a supported Topaz signature tablet for capturing signatures during Monolith Chain of Custody workflows.

    Monolith supports Topaz signature tablets for capturing electronic signatures during supported workflows such as Chain of Custody.

    A signature tablet can be useful when Evidence or Storage Items are physically transferred and your organization wants the person involved in the custody action to sign directly at the workstation.

    Supported Signature Tablet

    The currently tested and supported model is:

    • Topaz T-S460-HSB-R Signature Pad

    Other Topaz signature pads may work with Monolith but have not been tested and are not currently part of the supported hardware list.

    Windows Requirement

    Topaz signature tablet integration is currently supported on Windows systems.

    This hardware integration is not currently supported on macOS.

    Install Topaz SigWeb

    The computer connected to the signature tablet must have Topaz SigWeb installed.

    SigWeb allows Monolith to communicate with the Topaz signature device and capture the signature from the pad.

    Download and install SigWeb from the Topaz website:

    After installation, connect the signature tablet to the Windows computer and confirm that the device is available before beginning a Monolith signature workflow.

    When a supported signature field is available during a Monolith workflow:

    1. Connect the Topaz signature tablet to the Windows computer.

    2. Begin the applicable signature or Chain of Custody action in Monolith.

    3. Select the option to capture a signature.

    4. Sign using the Topaz tablet.

    The captured signature is stored with the applicable Monolith record as part of the completed workflow.

    A Topaz signature tablet is not required to capture every signature in Monolith.

    Depending on the device and workflow, signatures may also be captured using supported touch-enabled devices or other available Monolith signature options.

    Relay Settings

    Access and configure your organization's Relay tenant, including tenant details, users, request instructions, and Custom Field options.

    The Relay Settings area in Monolith contains the administrative controls used to configure your organization's Relay request portal.

    For complete guidance on setting up and administering Relay, see Relay Administration.

    Relay Settings

    Relay Settings is organized into four areas:

    • Basic Details — manage your Relay tenant name, logo, URL, and tenant email.

    • User Management — invite users, approve registrations, and manage Relay administrative access.

    • Instructions — provide guidance requestors see when beginning a new Relay request.

    • Custom Field Options — control which supported Inquiry and Evidence Custom Fields are available to Relay requestors.

    Basic Details contains the identifying information for your Relay tenant, including the URL used by requestors to access Relay.

    See for information about configuring tenant details and request instructions.

    Use User Management to control access to your Relay tenant.

    Relay users are managed separately from licensed Monolith users and can be invited directly or approved after registering through your organization's Relay URL.

    See for complete guidance.

    Custom Field Options controls which supported Inquiry and Evidence Custom Fields appear to requestors in Relay.

    Inquiry Custom Fields can also be mapped to corresponding Case Custom Fields when creating a new Case from an Inquiry.

    See for configuration and mapping guidance.

    Requests submitted through Relay appear in Monolith as Inquiries, where they can be reviewed, triaged, converted into new Cases, or merged into existing Cases.

    See for the Monolith-side request workflow.

    Useful Commands

    Reference common Docker and Docker Compose commands for starting, stopping, monitoring, and troubleshooting a Monolith on-premises deployment.

    Starting and Stopping Monolith Server

    // Deploy and Run Monolith Containers
    // Must be run in same directory as docker-compose.yml
    docker compose up -d
    
    // Remove Monolith containers
    // Must be run in same directory as docker-compose.yml
    docker compose down

    These commands can be used together to fully stop and restart the Monolith containers.

    Restarting Monolith in this way does not cause any data loss and should be used when you need to update your licensing from a license token.

    Various Docker Commands

    // Show resource usage of docker containers
    docker stats
    
    // Show all containers
    docker container ls -a
    
    // Show downloaded container images
    docker image ls -a
    
    // Download a container image
    docker pull [image-name]
    
    // Restart container
    docker container restart [container-name]

    Docker CLI Reference

    Additional Docker commands are available in the official Docker documentation:

    Docker CLI Reference

    Docker Compose CLI Reference

    Additional Docker Compose commands are available in the official Docker documentation:

    Docker Compose CLI Reference

    Related Documentation

    • On-Premises Deployments

    On-Premises Deployments

    Understand how Monolith can be deployed within your organization's own infrastructure and what to consider when planning an on-premises implementation.

    Monolith can be deployed on-premises for organizations that prefer to host the application within their own infrastructure rather than use a Monolith-hosted cloud environment.

    The Monolith application is containerized and designed to be straightforward to deploy. The specific implementation depends on how Monolith needs to connect with your organization's existing infrastructure, network, storage, database, backup, security, and access requirements.

    On-premises implementations are typically coordinated with an organization's IT or infrastructure representative who understands the environment where Monolith will run.

    Monolith can work with your technical team throughout the deployment process to understand those requirements and help integrate Monolith into the environment. Organizations with the appropriate technical experience may also use the documentation in this section to manage much of the deployment process directly.

    Planning an On-Premises Deployment

    Before deployment, it is helpful to understand:

    • Where Monolith will be hosted

    • How users will access the environment

    • How networking and DNS are configured

    • Whether a custom domain and TLS certificate will be used

    • Where Monolith data and uploaded files will be stored

    • How database and file backups will be managed

    • Whether Monolith needs to connect to internal file shares or other systems

    • How application updates will be applied

    These requirements vary between organizations, so the exact deployment architecture may differ from one Monolith environment to another.

    The pages in this section provide technical guidance for deploying and maintaining an on-premises Monolith environment.

    For assistance planning or implementing an on-premises deployment, contact .

    Login & 2FA

    Learn how to log in to Monolith, set up two-factor authentication, and reset your 2FA device if needed.

    Monolith users can log in with their account email address and password. Cloud users are also required to use two-factor authentication unless Single Sign-On (SSO) has been configured for their organization.

    To log in to Monolith:

    1. Open Monolith using the correct web, desktop, or mobile application.

    2. Enter your account email address.

    Location Groups

    Create location groups and individual locations to model the physical areas where evidence and storage items are kept.

    teA Location Group represents a physical storage or working area in your lab, such as an evidence room, evidence locker, secure storage area, or shelving section.

    Each group contains individual Locations that identify where an item is physically stored.

    For example:

    Setting up Location Groups and Locations allows Monolith to reflect your real-world storage environment and track where evidence and storage items are located.

    1. In the left-hand navigation, open Evidence Management > Item Locations.

    Creating Audits

    Create an Audit for Evidence or Storage Items and use filters to define which records should be included.

    Navigate to Evidence Management > Audits and select New Audit to begin creating an Audit.

    The Create Audit form includes:

    1. Audit Name: Enter a short, descriptive name for the Audit.

    2. Assignee: Select the Monolith user responsible for performing or administering the Audit.

    Audit Features & Layout

    Understand the Audit workspace, including overview details, item status tabs, progress counts, and audit logs.

    The Audit workspace brings together the items being reviewed, current verification progress, Audit details, and historical Audit activity.

    Use this page to understand the major areas available after opening an Audit.

    An Audit contains two primary navigation tabs:

    • Audit Items: Contains the Audit details and the items included in the verification process.

    • Audit Logs: Displays recorded activity related to items being reviewed during the Audit.

    Integrations

    Configure supported Monolith integrations for external reporting, collaboration, and Microsoft 365 or Google Workspace workflows.

    Monolith supports integrations that connect specific workflows with external systems and services.

    Available integrations may require additional configuration or administrative access to the corresponding external service.

    The Forensic Partner Reports integration supports organizations that report forensic Case and Evidence metrics to the United States Secret Service.

    The integration can help map Monolith Case Types and Evidence Types to the corresponding categories used for Forensic Partner Reporting and provides an Excel report containing the applicable metrics.

    The generated report can be used to review and transfer reporting information according to your organization's USSS reporting process.

    When enabled, the integration may also create supporting Custom Fields used to capture information required for the report.

    The Mattermost integration allows supported Monolith notifications to be sent to a Mattermost channel.

    How to Deploy

    Deploy a standard Monolith on-premises environment using Docker Compose and the configuration files included with your deployment package.

    Deploying Monolith with the default configuration uses the Docker Compose files included with your on-premises package.

    1. Install Docker. See for instructions.

    2. Choose a location to store your Monolith on-premises package files.

    3. Open a command terminal.

    Monolith Containers (Docker)

    Understand the Docker containers and supporting components used to run a Monolith on-premises deployment.

    Docker is a platform that uses OS-level virtualization to deliver software in packages called "containers". Docker is used to deploy, manage, and run containers within a variety of environments.

    Monolith is deployed in on-premises environments using containers and Docker is recommended as the container management system to run and manage Monolith.

    Monolith runs in a server-client configuration where users access and manage data via the Monolith desktop client or web application. A Monolith API server runs on a centralized host and handles HTTP requests from the desktop clients and web application. The API server communicates with a database to create, update, delete, and read data from the database.

    The image above illustrates the basic setup of containers within an on-premises deployment. The containerized nature of Monolith allows for flexible and scalable on-premises deployment options.

    This is a web server container that handles incoming requests from clients and proxies traffic to one of three containers: Monolith Web App, Monolith API, or the Relay App. This container can be configured to include custom domain TLS certificates.

    Inquiries
    Item Labels
    Relay Overview

    Relay Overview

    Case Reports

    Inquiries

    Related Documentation

    Cases
    Case Reports
    Inquiries
    Managing Relay Requests in Monolith
    Cases
    Case Reports
    Inquiries
    Evidence Management
    Specialized lab devices
  • Other shared equipment

  • Preserving historical information about the tools used by the lab

    Equipment

    Why Track Lab Resources?

    Related Documentation

    Forensic Software
    Equipment

    Monolith API

    Analytics vs. Case Reports

    Other Reporting Options

    Related Documentation

    Reports
    Tables
    Monolith API
    Reports
    Case Reports
    Tables
    Query Filter

    Reviewing Monolith improvements over time

    Find a Previous Release

    Related Documentation

    About
    System

    Monolith Forensics

    Software License Agreement

    Related Documentation

    Release Notes
    Support
    End User License Agreement
    Release Notes
    Support
    End User License Agreement
    System

    Monolith Data

  • Backups

  • Updates

  • Related Documentation

    On-Premises Deployments
    Requirements
    Monolith Containers (Docker)
    Managing Licensing

    On-Premises Deployments

    Single Sign-On

    Network and Endpoint Information

    Cloud and On-Premises Deployment

    Related Documentation

    Login & 2FA
    Single Sign On (SSO)
    Monolith Endpoints
    On-Premises Deployments
    Security Overview
    Single Sign On (SSO)
    Login & 2FA
    Monolith Endpoints

    Linux

    Related Documentation

    Install Docker Desktop on Mac
    Install Docker Engine on Ubuntu
    On-Premises Deployments
    Requirements
    Monolith Containers (Docker)
    Deployment

    Review and complete the Monolith action.

    Using the Signature Tablet in Monolith

    Other Signature Options

    Related Documentation

    Download Topaz SigWeb
    Hardware Integrations
    Evidence Items

    Using Relay

  • Managing Relay Requests in Monolith

  • Basic Details

    User Management

    Custom Field Options

    Managing Relay Requests

    Related Documentation

    Relay Administration
    User Management
    Custom Field Options
    Managing Relay Requests in Monolith
    Relay Administration
    Relay Overview
    User Management
    Custom Field Options
    Monolith Containers (Docker)
    How to Deploy
    Managing Licensing
    Updates

    Backups

  • Updates

  • Custom Domains and TLS

  • Connecting to File Shares

  • Using External MySQL Database

  • Deployment Documentation

    Requirements
    Monolith Containers (Docker)
    Deployment
    Monolith Data
    support@monolithforensics.com
    Using a Scanner
    Tables

    How Relay Fits Into Monolith

    Relay and Monolith are separate applications. Inquiry review, status management, and case conversion occur in Monolith, while request-specific comments and @mentions are handled within Relay. Monolith users who need to participate in Relay messaging should also have a Relay account with the appropriate permissions.

    Next Steps

    Case Drives
    Using Relay
    Managing Relay Requests in Monolith
    Relay Administration
    Requestor
        ↓
    Submit Request in Relay
        ↓
    Inquiry Created in Monolith
        ↓
    Review and Triage in Monolith
        ↓
    Update Inquiry Status
        ↓
    Communicate in Relay, if needed
        ↓
    Physical Evidence or Required Information Received
        ↓
    Create New Case
           or
    Merge Into Existing Case
        ↓
    Normal Monolith Casework
        ↓
    Case and Evidence Progress Visible in Relay
    Enter your password.
  • Select Log In.

  • Monolith Login

    If your organization uses SSO, you may be redirected to your organization’s identity provider instead of logging in with a Monolith password.

    For more information, see SSO Login.

    Two-factor authentication, or 2FA, adds an additional security step when logging in to Monolith.

    Monolith uses time-based one-time passwords, also known as TOTP. To complete 2FA setup, you will need an authenticator app that can generate six-digit verification codes.

    Common authenticator apps include:

    • Google Authenticator

    • Microsoft Authenticator

    The first time you log in to Monolith, you may be prompted to set up 2FA.

    To set up 2FA:

    1. Open your preferred authenticator app.

    2. Scan the QR code shown on the Monolith 2FA setup screen.

    3. Confirm that the authenticator app adds your Monolith account.

    4. Enter the six-digit code generated by the authenticator app.

    5. Complete the login process.

    2FA Setup

    After setup is complete, Monolith will ask for a new six-digit code during future logins.

    After 2FA has been set up, Monolith will prompt you for a verification code after you enter your email address and password.

    To complete login:

    1. Open your authenticator app.

    2. Find the code for your Monolith account.

    3. Enter the current six-digit code into Monolith.

    4. Select Verify or continue the login process.

    2FA Screen

    If you lose access to your authenticator app, replace your device, or need to set up 2FA again, a Monolith Super Admin can reset MFA for your account from Organization > Team Management.

    After your 2FA device is reset, Monolith will prompt you to connect a new authenticator app the next time you log in.

    If you do not have access to a Super Admin, contact your organization's Monolith administrator or Monolith Support for assistance.

    Two-factor authentication is an important security measure and is strongly recommended.

    For cloud customers, 2FA is enabled by default. If your organization has a specific need to change this behavior, contact support@monolithforensics.com.

    For on-premises customers, 2FA settings may be managed from the user profile page.

    • Accessing Monolith

    • SSO Login

    • Team Management

    Login

    If you are not sure which Monolith URL or application to use, see .

    Two-Factor Authentication

    Set Up 2FA

    Authenticator codes refresh automatically. If a code is about to expire, wait for the next code before entering it into Monolith.

    Log In With 2FA

    Reset 2FA

    Disable 2FA

    Disabling 2FA reduces account security. Monolith recommends keeping 2FA enabled unless your organization has an approved alternative authentication control in place.

    Related Documentation

    Select the appropriate Office at the top of the page.
  • Click Create Group.

  • Enter a name for the group.

  • Press Enter to create it.

  • Examples of Location Groups include:

    • Evidence Room

    • Evidence Cage

    • Evidence Intake

    • Secure Storage

    • Laboratory

    • Locker Area

    • Shelving Area

    Locations represent the individual places within a Location Group.

    For example, an Evidence Room group might contain individual shelves, lockers, bins, or other storage positions.

    To create a Location:

    1. Expand the Location Group.

    2. Click Create Location.

    3. Enter a name for the Location.

    4. Repeat for each additional Location you want to create.

    Each location you create appears as a tile inside the group.

    Your Location Groups and Locations should reflect how your organization physically handles evidence and storage items.

    For example:

    Or:

    Create enough detail that users can reliably determine where an item should be located without making the structure unnecessarily difficult to maintain.

    Once Location Groups and Locations are configured, they become available when assigning or moving evidence and storage items in Monolith.

    Monolith uses these locations to maintain an item's Current Location and Location Path as it moves through intake and chain of custody workflows.

    See Item Locations for information about:

    • Assigning a location during evidence intake

    • Assigning a location to an existing evidence item

    • Assigning locations to storage items

    • Team locations

    • Current Location and Location Path

    • Location changes during chain of custody

    • Item Locations

    • Offices

    • Team Management

    • Storage Items

    Evidence Room
    ├── Shelf A
    ├── Shelf B
    └── Temporary Holding

    Create a Location Group

    Evidence Cage
    ├── Locker 01
    ├── Locker 02
    └── Oversized Evidence
    Evidence Room
    ├── Shelf A
    ├── Shelf B
    ├── Shelf C
    └── Temporary Holding

    Groups are created within the selected Office. If your organization has multiple Offices, confirm that you are working in the correct one before creating the group.

    Add Locations to a Group

    Build a Useful Location Structure

    Using Your Locations

    Related Documentation

    Start Date: Enter the anticipated start date.

  • Due Date: Enter the expected completion date.

  • Item Type: Select whether the Audit will contain Evidence Items or Storage Items. Only one Item Type can be selected for an Audit.

  • Description: Add context about the purpose or scope of the Audit.

  • Cancel: Close the form without creating the Audit.

  • Create Audit: Create the Audit using the selected settings and filters.

  • Most Audits only need to include a subset of the Evidence or Storage Items tracked in Monolith.

    For example, your organization may want to audit:

    • Items created during a particular year or quarter

    • A specific Evidence Type

    • Items associated with a particular location

    • Storage Items matching certain criteria

    • Another subset of records relevant to the inventory being performed

    After selecting an Item Type, Monolith displays the Audit Creation Filter.

    The Audit Creation Filter works similarly to the Query Filter used throughout Monolith.

    The available fields depend on the Item Type selected:

    • Evidence Audits use fields available for Evidence Items.

    • Storage Audits use fields available for Storage Items.

    Add one or more filter conditions to define which records should be included in the Audit.

    For example, an Evidence Audit might include items that:

    • Have an Evidence Type of Smartphone

    • Were created during a specific year

    The resulting Audit will contain only the Evidence Items matching those conditions.

    See Query Filter for additional guidance on building field-based filters.

    Audit Creation Filter - Empty

    Before creating the Audit, review the filter conditions and confirm that the expected scope is correct.

    After configuring the Audit and any applicable filters, select Create Audit.

    Monolith creates the Audit and adds it to the Audits table.

    The Audit record shows the number of items included based on the selected Item Type and filter conditions.

    From there, the Audit can be opened and used to begin verifying the included items.

    Audit Creation Filter - 2 Filters
    Audit Table
    • Audits

    • Viewing and Accessing Audits

    • Audit Features & Layout

    • Auditing Items

    Create a new audit

    Create Audit Menu

    Define Which Items to Audit

    Using the Audit Creation Filter

    If no filter is applied, all records for the selected Item Type will be included in the Audit.

    Create the Audit

    Related Documentation

    Most Audit work takes place under Audit Items.

    Within Audit Items, Monolith organizes records into several views:

    • Audit Overview: Displays information about the Audit itself.

    • All: Shows all items included in the Audit.

    • Pending: Shows items that have not yet been verified.

    • Passed: Shows items that have been successfully verified.

    • Failed: Shows items that did not pass verification.

    The counts displayed with each view provide a quick indication of Audit progress.

    As items are reviewed, they move from Pending into the appropriate Passed or Failed result.

    The Audit Overview provides high-level information about the Audit.

    Information may include:

    • Status

    • Item Type

    • Total Items

    • Pending Items

    • Passed Items

    • Failed Items

    • Assignee

    • Created By

    • Created On

    • Start Date

    • Due Date

    • Filters used to define the Audit

    • Description

    The original filter criteria are particularly useful when reviewing an Audit later because they show how the set of included Evidence or Storage Items was selected.

    An Audit can remain Open while verification work is still being performed.

    Once the Audit process is finished, use Complete Audit to complete the Audit.

    Review the Pending, Passed, and Failed items before completing the Audit so the final results accurately reflect the work performed.

    The Audit Logs tab provides historical activity related to the Audit process.

    Use these logs when you need additional context about item verification activity or want to review actions recorded during the Audit.

    After reviewing the Audit layout, use the Pending, Passed, and Failed views to work through the included items.

    See Auditing Items for the item verification workflow.

    If your organization uses barcode or QR code labels, see Using a Scanner for information about scanning items during an Audit.

    • Audits

    • Creating Audits

    • Viewing and Accessing Audits

    • Auditing Items

    Navigation Tabs

    Main Audit Details

    Audit Status Views

    Audit Overview

    Audit Status

    Audit Logs

    Continue the Audit

    Related Documentation

    This can help teams surface Monolith activity within an existing Mattermost collaboration environment.

    Configuration requires access to the Mattermost environment where notifications will be delivered.

    The Microsoft 365 Admin integration connects supported Microsoft 365 directory workflows with Monolith.

    Depending on the workflow, Microsoft 365 directory information can be used to help populate or import records such as users and people information rather than entering each record manually.

    This can be particularly useful for organizations that already maintain employee, requestor, or contact information in Microsoft 365.

    See Team Management, Clients, and Contacts for more information about how these records are used in Monolith.

    The Google Workspace Admin integration provides similar directory-based workflows for organizations using Google Workspace.

    Supported directory information can be used to help populate Monolith records such as users and people information, reducing duplicate data entry when that information is already maintained in Google Workspace.

    See Team Management, Clients, and Contacts for more information.

    Integrations are intended to extend specific Monolith workflows rather than being required for normal use of the platform.

    Organizations may choose to configure integrations when they already use the corresponding external service or when the integration reduces duplicate data entry, improves collaboration, or supports an existing reporting requirement.

    • Team Management

    • Clients

    • Contacts

    • Cases

    Forensic Partner Reports

    Mattermost

    Forensic Partner Reports

    Microsoft 365 Admin

    Google Workspace Admin

    Choosing an Integration

    Related Documentation

    Navigate to the directory containing your Monolith on-premises package files.

    • This directory contains the .env and docker-compose.yml files.

  • Run the following command to download and start the Monolith containers defined in docker-compose.yml:

    docker compose up -d
  • Docker will download the required Monolith container images. This may take a few minutes during the initial deployment.

  • Once the images are downloaded, Docker will start the Monolith containers and initialize the environment.

  • Once the containers are running, access Monolith in a web browser using the IP address or configured domain of the host system:

    https://{host_server_ip}
  • To stop and remove the running Monolith containers, run:

    Monolith Deployment and Removal
    • On-Premises Deployments

    • Requirements

    • Docker Installation

    • Monolith Containers (Docker)

    Default Deployment

    Docker Installation
    docker compose down

    If Monolith is deployed inside a virtual machine, make sure the host environment supports the virtualization requirements needed to run Docker.

    Example

    Related Documentation

    This is the Monolith web application that can be accessed via a web browser. To access this application, you just need to navigate to the host system IP address or assigned domain name in a web browser - Ex: https://192.168.1.12

    This container hosts an API server that can send authenticated requests for data to and from the Monolith and Relay web applications. This container connects directly to the MySQL server to store data and a file system to store files uploaded to Monolith.

    The Relay app container runs the Relay application. Relay is a web-based request system that allows non-Monolith users to submit requests for forensic services.

    This container runs a MySQL database that stores data accessed and managed by users of Monolith and Relay. The MySQL database does not have to be a container inside Docker. You can use an external hosted MySQL database if you wish.

    This is not a container. It represents your chosen file system component to store files that are uploaded to Monolith and Relay. This can be the file system on the host system, AWS S3 object storage, or a network file share.

    Watchtower is an optional container that manages automatic updates for the other containers. Watchtower checks for container updates every 30 seconds. When an update is available, Watchtower downloads the new container images and replaces the current containers with new containers built from the updated container images.

    • On-Premises Deployments

    • Requirements

    • Deployment

    • Monolith Data

    Docker

    How Monolith Works

    Monolith Containers

    NGINX proxy

    Monolith App

    Monolith On-Premises Infrastructure

    Monolith API

    Relay App

    MySQL DB

    File System

    Watchtower

    Related Documentation

    Monolith Mobile

    Access cases and evidence, capture evidence information and photos, manage chain of custody, and document your work from a phone or tablet.

    Monolith Mobile brings common case and evidence workflows to your phone or tablet, allowing you to work with Monolith away from your workstation.

    The app is available for iOS, iPadOS, and Android and connects directly to your Monolith environment.

    Download Monolith Mobile

    Monolith Mobile is available from:

    • Apple App Store for iPhone and iPad

    • Google Play for Android phones and tablets

    An active Monolith account is required to use the application.

    For a visual overview of the mobile application, see the .

    Open Monolith Mobile and sign in using your Monolith account.

    Select the appropriate Monolith region or environment when prompted.

    Organizations using Single Sign-On can also use their configured SSO authentication workflow.

    See and for additional access information.

    Use Monolith Mobile to review cases and evidence while away from your workstation.

    You can:

    • View cases

    • View evidence items

    • Search for cases and evidence

    • Review case and evidence details

    This can be useful during evidence intake, field work, court, laboratory movement, or other situations where a desktop workstation is not convenient.

    New evidence items can be created from Monolith Mobile.

    This is particularly useful when evidence is physically in front of you during intake or collection.

    Use your device camera to scan:

    • A physical item

    • A device label

    • An About This Device screen

    • An existing image from your photo library

    Monolith can use information from the image to assist with populating evidence details.

    Review the information before saving the evidence item.

    Use your phone or tablet to photograph evidence and upload the images directly to the appropriate evidence item.

    Photos added through Monolith Mobile synchronize with the evidence item and case in your Monolith environment.

    This can reduce the need to photograph evidence separately and transfer the images later.

    Monolith Mobile supports chain of custody workflows from your mobile device.

    Use the app when evidence is being received, moved, released, checked out, or transferred through other supported custody actions.

    Chain of custody activity completed through the mobile app synchronizes with Monolith.

    Monolith Mobile includes a digital signature workflow for chain of custody.

    A signature can be collected directly on the phone or tablet while an evidence transfer is taking place.

    This can be especially useful during evidence intake or release when the person involved in the custody transfer is physically present.

    Monolith Mobile allows you to work with case and evidence notes away from your workstation.

    You can:

    • Create case notes

    • Create evidence notes

    • Review existing notes

    • Edit existing notes

    Changes synchronize with your Monolith environment.

    Monolith Mobile adapts to the device being used.

    Phones are well suited for mobile workflows such as:

    • Evidence intake

    • Evidence photography

    • Scanning

    • Chain of custody

    Tablets provide additional screen space and a larger Monolith experience for users who want to work more extensively from a mobile device.

    Monolith Mobile can be especially useful for:

    • Receiving evidence at an intake counter

    • Photographing evidence as it arrives

    • Creating evidence items in the field

    • Scanning device information instead of manually entering it

    For screenshots and a visual overview of Monolith Mobile, visit the .

    Query Filter

    Build field-based filters to narrow Monolith tables using dates, text, selections, and AND/OR logic.

    The Query Filter is used throughout Monolith to narrow tables using field-based conditions.

    Filters use conditional logic to return only the records that match the criteria you define. Available fields and filter options depend on the type of records being viewed.

    Example:

    This filter uses AND logic, which means a record must match all three conditions to appear in the results.

    • Open Date is sometime after January 1, 2023

    • The Case Lead is Matt Danner

    • The Case Type is Consultation

    This filter combines those three conditions into an "exclusive" filter, which means that a record must match all three conditions. This can also be referred to as an "AND" statement:

    "Show me all cases WHERE the open date is after January 1, 2023 AND the case lead is Matt Danner AND the case type is Consultation."

    Available filter fields depend on the type of records being viewed. For example, Cases have different filter options from Evidence Items.

    The operators available for each condition also depend on the field type.

    Common filter types include:

    • Date filters

    • Text filters

    • Multi-select filters

    To add a filter, click on the "Add Filter" button above the table. This opens a searchable list of the fields you can filter on. Start typing to narrow the list to a specific field, or scroll to browse the available options.

    Once you select a field, the filter displays an operator between the field and its value. This operator sets the parameters for the condition and changes based on the type of field selected.

    The available operators are:

    • Date filters: is after, is before, is between

    • Text filters: contains, does not contain, is, is not

    • Multi-select filters: is any of, is none of

    You can add multiple conditions to narrow the data further.

    Filters in Monolith are persistent. If you navigate away from a table and return later, Monolith remembers the filters you previously applied.

    Filters also carry through to table exports, so exported data reflects the active filters.

    If a table appears to be missing records you expect to see, check whether a previous filter is still applied.

    To remove an individual filter, click the X on that condition.

    Removing all conditions returns the table to its unfiltered view.

    The Evidence Items table supports both AND and OR logic.

    The default is AND. Use the filter logic control to switch between the two options.

    The two options return different results:

    • "AND" returns records that match every condition. A filter for case name and evidence type returns only the evidence items that match both.

    • "OR" returns records that match any condition. A filter across two case names returns the evidence items from both cases in a single view.

    Here is an example of an "OR" filter on the evidence table:

    The above filter has two conditions:

    • The Case Name is Smith Fraud Case

    • The Case Name is Smith Agency

    Because the filter uses "OR" logic, a record only needs to match one of the conditions to appear in the results:

    "Show me all evidence items WHERE the case name is Smith Fraud Case OR the case name is Smith Agency."

    Storage Items

    Track physical and digital storage used to preserve forensic data, associate storage with cases, and manage each item throughout its lifecycle.

    What are storage items?

    Storage items represent the physical devices or storage systems used to preserve forensic data that has been collected, processed, or provided to your organization.

    Monolith tracks storage items separately from evidence items so teams can document where forensic data is stored, associate storage with cases, and manage the item throughout its lifecycle.

    Examples of Storage Items

    Storage items may include:

    • External Hard Drives

    • USB Drives

    • Network-attached storage devices

    • FTP Servers

    • Cloud storage systems

    • Other physical or digital storage used for forensic data

    • Forensic images

    • Mobile device extractions

    • Case data

    • Working files

    Evidence and storage items serve different purposes in Monolith.

    Evidence items represent the original source of forensic evidence or data. Examples may include smartphones, computers, email accounts, cloud accounts, removable media, or other original sources.

    Storage items represent the device or system where collected or processed forensic data is stored. Examples may include an external hard drive containing a forensic image or a network storage system containing data from multiple cases.

    A useful distinction is:

    • Evidence is the original source or item being examined.

    • Storage is where collected or processed data is preserved.

    Monolith supports two categories of storage items:

    • General

    • Assigned

    General storage items represent shared or permanent storage systems that may contain data from multiple cases.

    A common example is a network-attached storage system used to preserve forensic images and case data for the lab.

    General storage items:

    • Cannot be assigned to a specific case

    • May contain data from multiple cases

    • Do not use case-specific chain of custody tracking

    • Typically remain in a fixed location

    Assigned storage items represent storage associated with a specific case.

    These items are often smaller or portable devices that contain data for one case, such as an external hard drive prepared for a forensic examination or client delivery.

    Assigned storage items:

    • Must be assigned to a case before they can be used within that case

    • Can contain data for only one assigned case at a time

    • Support chain of custody while assigned to a case

    • Can be removed from a case and reused when appropriate

    There are two ways to associate a storage item with a case:

    • Create a new storage item

    • Assign an existing storage item

    To create and assign a storage item from a case:

    1. Open the case.

    2. Select the Storage Items tab.

    3. Create a new storage item.

    4. Enter the storage item details.

    The new storage item is created and assigned to the current case.

    To assign an existing storage item:

    1. Open the case.

    2. Select the Storage Items tab.

    3. Choose the option to assign an existing item.

    4. Select the storage item.

    An existing item may also be assigned through the available Actions menu.

    Storage items may move through several stages during their use.

    Depending on your organization’s workflow, an assigned storage item may be:

    • Created for a case

    • Assigned to an existing case

    • Used to store one or more acquisitions

    • Moved between physical locations

    • Use clear storage numbers and descriptions.

    • Record make, model, serial number, capacity, and location when available.

    • Use General storage for shared systems that contain data from multiple cases.

    • Use Assigned storage for devices dedicated to a specific case.

    Initial Setup

    Review recommended setup steps before using Monolith for active casework.

    Your organization should review and configure the core settings that support users, cases, evidence, storage, reporting, and quality assurance.

    Some settings may already be configured during implementation or trial setup. Use this page as a setup checklist to confirm that Monolith is ready for your team’s workflow.

    Recommended Setup Checklist

    1. Review organization information

    Confirm your organization details before users begin working in Monolith.

    See: Organization Info

    This information may be used throughout Monolith, including reports, labels, and other organization-specific areas.

    2. Add user accounts

    Create user accounts for team members who need access to Monolith.

    See: Team Management

    Confirm that each user has the appropriate access for their role before they begin working with cases, evidence, reports, or administrative settings.

    3. Configure item number formats

    Set the formatting for case numbers, evidence numbers, and storage numbers.

    See:

    Number formats help standardize how records are created and referenced across Monolith.

    Review and customize the options your team will use when creating and managing cases.

    Recommended settings include:

    These options help your team classify cases consistently and track case progress over time.

    Review and customize the options your team will use when adding and managing evidence.

    Recommended settings include:

    These options help standardize evidence intake and tracking across your organization.

    Review the categories your team will use for time tracking.

    See:

    These settings help organize time entries and provide more consistent reporting.

    Review and customize the options your team will use for quality assurance workflows.

    Recommended settings include:

    These settings help your team standardize review processes and track QA issues consistently.

    Create and upload labels for evidence, storage items, or people.

    See:

    Monolith supports DYMO label templates and variables that can pull information from Monolith records.

    Create the physical locations where evidence may be stored.

    See:

    Locations should reflect how your organization tracks evidence in the real world, such as evidence rooms, shelves, bins, lockers, or other storage areas.

    If your organization already uses storage items that should be tracked in Monolith, add them before beginning the related storage workflows.

    See:

    This helps your team manage physical or digital storage items and associate them with cases and related workflows as needed.

    Enter the forensic software tools used by your lab or organization.

    See:

    This information can support acquisition tracking, reporting, and lab management workflows.

    Before beginning active casework, create a test case and evidence item using the settings your team configured.

    Confirm that:

    • Case and evidence numbering works as expected

    • Case and evidence options are available

    • Locations and labels behave as expected, if configured

    • Users have the access they need

    Once your team is comfortable with the test workflow, you can begin using Monolith for active casework.

    Depending on your organization's workflow, you may also want to configure:

    These options can be added during implementation or introduced later as your team's Monolith workflow develops.

    Equipment

    Track forensic lab equipment, asset numbers, vendors, models, serial numbers, purchase information, costs, and locations.

    The Equipment section provides a central inventory of the physical equipment used by your organization.

    Use Equipment records to maintain information about forensic workstations, imaging hardware, write blockers, acquisition devices, and other lab resources your team needs to track.

    View Equipment

    Navigate to Lab Management > Equipment to view the equipment records maintained by your organization.

    Forensic Equipment table

    The table can display information such as:

    • Asset Number

    • Vendor

    • Name

    • Model

    • Category

    • Serial Number

    • Purchase Date

    • Cost

    • Location

    • Other available equipment metadata

    Use the table controls to search, filter, sort, show or hide columns, and organize the view around the information most useful to your team.

    See for additional guidance on working with Monolith tables.

    Select New Equipment to create an Equipment record.

    Available information may include:

    • Asset Number

    • Vendor

    • Name

    • Model

    Capture the information that is useful to your organization's asset management process.

    Consistent asset numbers, equipment names, vendors, and serial numbers can make individual devices easier to identify later.

    The Location field can be used to record where a piece of equipment is generally located or assigned.

    For example:

    • Lab

    • Intake Room

    • Mobile Lab

    • Examiner workspace

    Equipment Location is descriptive inventory information. It is separate from the and Chain of Custody workflows used to track the movement of Evidence Items and Storage Items.

    The Equipment table can be exported to Microsoft Excel using the Export control.

    Exports follow the same table behavior used elsewhere in Monolith. The visible columns and active filters determine the information included in the exported file.

    If expected information is missing from an export, confirm that the appropriate columns are visible and that no unintended filters are applied.

    All matching records are included in the export, not only the page currently visible on screen.

    See for more information about table exports.

    Select an existing Equipment record to review or update its information.

    Update the record when its assignment, location, cost, description, or other tracked information changes.

    Keeping Equipment records current provides your team with a more useful shared inventory of lab resources.

    Users with the appropriate permissions can delete Equipment records that should no longer be maintained in Monolith.

    Review the record before deleting it to confirm that the correct Equipment Item has been selected.

    • Use Asset Numbers when your organization already has an established asset identification system.

    • Record serial numbers when available to distinguish similar equipment.

    • Keep Vendor, Name, Model, and Category values consistent.

    • Update Location when equipment is permanently reassigned or moved to another working area.

    System

    Review organization and subscription information, download Monolith Desktop, and configure date, time, and currency display formats.

    The System settings page contains general information and display settings for your Monolith environment.

    Navigate to Settings > System to review account information, access Monolith Desktop installers, and configure date, time, and currency formats.

    Account Information

    The Account Information section provides a high-level view of your Monolith environment.

    Organization Profile

    The Organization Profile displays information about your organization.

    Organization details are managed separately under Settings > Organization Info.

    See Organization Info for information about updating your organization's name, address, contact information, and other profile details.

    Subscription Information

    The Subscription Information section provides information about your Monolith account and subscription.

    Available information may include:

    • Registered account information

    • Licensed users

    • Subscription expiration

    • Cloud storage usage

    This section can be useful when reviewing your current Monolith environment or confirming account-level information with your administrator or Monolith Support.

    Organizations using Relay may see their Relay URL listed in the System settings.

    Relay is Monolith's request portal for collecting structured forensic requests from people outside the primary Monolith user base.

    For Relay setup, administration, and request workflows, see and .

    If your account has access to more than one Monolith workspace, available workspaces may also appear in this section.

    Select a workspace to switch to that Monolith environment.

    Monolith Desktop is available for Windows and macOS.

    Use the installer section to download the appropriate version for your computer.

    Available downloads may include:

    • Windows

    • macOS for Apple Silicon

    • macOS for Intel

    For installation instructions, cloud region or partner environment selection, and on-premises connection guidance, see .

    You can also find current desktop download information on .

    Use the Date and Time Format settings to control how dates and times are displayed throughout Monolith.

    Available settings include:

    • Date Format

    • Time Format

    Select the formats that match your organization's preferred display convention.

    These settings affect how supported dates and times appear throughout the Monolith interface.

    Use Currency Format to select the currency displayed in supported areas of Monolith.

    Choose the currency that best matches your organization's location or reporting requirements.

    Editor Templates

    Create and manage reusable note templates for consistent case, evidence, and lab documentation.

    Editor Templates are reusable note templates for Monolith’s note-taking system.

    Teams can use editor templates to standardize how notes are written for common workflows, collection procedures, examinations, reviews, or other repeatable processes. Templates can be kept private for your own use or shared with other Monolith users in your organization.

    When to Use Editor Templates

    Use editor templates when your team regularly documents the same type of information in notes.

    Common examples include:

    • Evidence intake notes

    • Device collection notes

    • Phone examination notes

    • Computer examination notes

    • Processing request notes

    • Review or quality assurance notes

    • Internal lab process notes

    • Customer-specific documentation formats

    Editor templates are especially helpful when a process requires information that is not already captured in Monolith’s standard case, evidence, acquisition, storage, or reporting fields.

    To manage editor templates:

    1. Open Settings from the left navigation.

    2. Select Editor Templates.

    3. Review the existing templates or create a new one.

    The Editor Templates page shows available templates, when they were created, whether they are shared, and actions to edit or delete each template.

    To create a new editor template:

    1. Open Settings.

    2. Select Editor Templates.

    3. Click New Template.

    4. Choose whether to enable Share With Others.

    The template content editor supports common formatting options such as headings, bold text, italic text, underlined text, strikethrough text, bulleted lists, numbered lists, and text alignment.

    Editor templates can be private or shared.

    If Share With Others is enabled, other Monolith users in your organization can use the template when creating notes.

    If Share With Others is not enabled, the template is only available to the user who created it.

    Editor templates can also be created from notes already written inside a case.

    If you create a note that would be useful to reuse later, save that note content as a template from within the note editor. After it has been saved as a template, you can return to Settings > Editor Templates to manage, edit, share, or delete it.

    This is useful when a strong note format develops naturally during casework and should be reused for future cases.

    To edit an existing template:

    1. Open Settings.

    2. Select Editor Templates.

    3. Find the template you want to update.

    4. Click Edit.

    Changes to a template affect future use of that template. Existing notes that were previously created from the template are not automatically changed.

    To delete a template:

    1. Open Settings.

    2. Select Editor Templates.

    3. Find the template you want to remove.

    4. Click Delete.

    Deleting an editor template removes it from the list of available templates. It does not delete notes that were already created using that template.

    Editor templates are used for Monolith notes.

    They are different from document templates, report templates, or other template types that may be used elsewhere in Monolith. Use editor templates when you want to standardize note content. Use document or report templates when you are configuring generated documents or report outputs.

    • Use clear template names that describe the workflow or note type.

    • Keep templates structured but flexible enough for real casework.

    • Use headings to separate major sections.

    • Add prompts or placeholders for information users should remember to document.

    Audits

    Verify evidence and storage items against their expected Monolith locations using physical inventory and audit workflows.

    Audits help your organization verify that physical Evidence Items and Storage Items are where Monolith expects them to be.

    Use an Audit to compare items under your control with their Monolith records, confirm their current locations, identify items that still need to be verified, and maintain a historical record of inventory checks.

    Audits are especially useful for routine evidence inventories, storage reviews, and other accountability processes where your team needs to confirm that the physical item matches the information recorded in Monolith.

    How Audits Work

    An Audit defines the group of Evidence Items or Storage Items your team wants to verify.

    A typical workflow is:

    Create Audit
        ↓
    Identify Items to Verify
        ↓
    Locate Physical Items
        ↓
    Verify Each Item
        ↓
    Review Audit Results
        ↓
    Complete the Audit

    Items can be reviewed and verified directly within Monolith. Organizations using Monolith labels can also use a compatible barcode or QR code scanner to quickly locate and verify items during the Audit process.

    Audits and Item Locations

    Audits work alongside the location information maintained for Evidence Items and Storage Items.

    As your team uses Chain of Custody and Item Locations to track where items move, Audits provide a way to periodically confirm that the physical items remain consistent with those records.

    For example, an Audit can help verify items expected to be located in:

    • An evidence room

    • A storage shelf

    • A locker or evidence cage

    • A user or examiner location

    See for information about configuring the physical locations used by your organization.

    If your organization uses Monolith Evidence or Storage labels, barcode and QR code scanning can make physical inventory checks faster.

    During an Audit, scanning an item's Monolith label can quickly locate the corresponding record so the item can be reviewed and verified.

    See for the Audit scanning workflow.

    For information about creating labels and the supported QR code and barcode values, see .

    • : Define the items that should be included in an Audit.

    • : Find existing Audits and review their status.

    • : Understand the information and controls available within an Audit.

    • :

    Case Types

    Create and manage Case Types used to categorize Cases and Inquiries throughout Monolith.

    Case Types provide a consistent way to categorize the different kinds of work your organization handles in Monolith.

    Each organization can define Case Types that reflect its own workflows. For example, a law enforcement lab may use Case Types based on crime or examination categories, while a corporate, consulting, or legal team may use categories such as internal investigation, data breach, litigation, or other matter types.

    Consistent Case Types make it easier to organize, filter, report on, and understand work across Monolith.

    View Case Types

    The Case Types settings page displays the Case Types currently configured for your organization.

    Each Case Type also shows the number of Cases currently associated with it.

    Use this list to review the categories available to users when creating Cases and Inquiries.

    Case Types

    Create a Case Type

    To create a new Case Type:

    1. Select Create Case Type.

    2. Enter the name of the new Case Type.

    3. Select Create Case Type to save it.

    The new Case Type becomes available when creating or updating supported records throughout Monolith.

    Choose names that are clear, recognizable, and meaningful to the people who will use them.

    A Case Type can be selected when creating a new Case and provides a structured way to categorize the work being performed.

    For example, Case Types might represent:

    • Criminal investigation types

    • Mobile device examinations

    • Incident response matters

    • Internal investigations

    Keeping this list focused and consistent makes Case filtering and organization-wide reporting more useful.

    See for additional information about Case creation and Case metadata.

    Inquiry Types are also based on the Case Types configured in Monolith.

    This allows request intake and active Case records to use a consistent categorization model as work moves from an Inquiry into a Case.

    See for additional information about request intake and Case creation.

    Case Types can be deleted when they are no longer needed.

    If Cases are currently associated with the Case Type being deleted, those Cases must be reassigned to another existing Case Type before deletion can be completed.

    • Create Case Types that reflect meaningful categories of work performed by your organization.

    • Keep naming consistent so users do not have to choose between duplicate or nearly identical categories.

    • Avoid creating overly specific Case Types when a broader category will provide better long-term reporting.

    • Review Case Types periodically as your organization's services and workflows change.

    Tables

    Learn how to sort, filter, customize, search, and export data from tables throughout Monolith.

    Tables throughout Monolith include tools for finding, organizing, customizing, and exporting data.

    Although the records displayed may differ between areas such as Cases, Evidence Items, Inquiries, Clients, and Contacts, the core table controls work consistently across the platform.

    Video Walkthrough

    Features

    Sorting

    To sort rows within a Monolith table, click the column header. Monolith will then sort the data based on that column.

    Clicking once sorts the column in ascending order. Clicking a second time sorts it in descending order. Clicking a third time clears the sorting for that column.

    Filtering

    Use Query Filter to narrow a table to records that match specific field-based conditions.

    See Query Filter for detailed filtering guidance.

    Column Resizing

    Resize a column by hovering over the edge of its header, then clicking and dragging it to the desired width.

    Reorder columns by clicking and dragging a column header to the desired position in the table.

    Use the Column Selector to choose which fields appear in a table.

    The Column Selector is typically available in the controls near the top right of the table and uses an icon representing three vertical columns.

    • Checked columns are visible.

    • Unchecked columns are hidden.

    Use this feature to create a table view focused on the information most relevant to your workflow.

    Many Monolith tables include a search box for quickly finding records within that table.

    Enter a search value in the search box and press Enter to return matching records.

    For searching across different areas of Monolith rather than within a single table, see .

    Most Monolith tables can be exported to a Microsoft Excel document using the Export button in the table controls.

    Table exports follow a "what you see is what you get" approach. The exported data reflects the current table configuration, including:

    • Applied filters

    • Visible columns

    • Current table results

    If a column is hidden, it will not appear in the export. If expected information is missing from an export, confirm that the relevant column is visible before exporting again.

    The export includes matching records across all pages of the table, not only the page currently visible on screen.

    QA Issue Types

    Create and manage Quality Assurance Issue Types used to categorize problems identified during QA Reviews.

    QA Issue Types provide a consistent way to categorize problems identified during Quality Assurance Reviews in Monolith.

    Organizations can define Issue Types that reflect the kinds of exceptions, deficiencies, or review findings they want to track.

    Examples might include:

    • Compliance

    • Data Acquisition

    • Documentation

    • Tool Validation

    • Process Deviation

    • Reporting

    • Policy or SOP Violation

    • Other organization-specific quality issues

    The QA Issue Types settings page displays the Issue Types currently configured for your organization.

    Each Issue Type also shows the number of QA entries currently associated with it.

    Use this list to review the classifications available when documenting issues found during a QA Review.

    To create a new QA Issue Type:

    1. Select Create Type.

    2. Enter the name of the new Issue Type.

    3. Select Create Issue Type to save it.

    The new Issue Type becomes available for supported Quality Assurance workflows throughout Monolith.

    Choose names that clearly describe the type of problem being documented.

    QA Issue Types help standardize how review findings are categorized.

    For example, a reviewer may identify an issue related to:

    • Evidence handling

    • Acquisition methodology

    • Missing documentation

    • Report content

    Using consistent Issue Types makes it easier for teams to distinguish between different kinds of QA findings rather than relying only on free-text descriptions.

    QA Issue Types are used as part of the Case-level Quality Assurance workflow.

    During a QA Review, reviewers can document issues identified while checking work against the appropriate QA Checklist.

    This allows the review record to preserve both:

    • The checklist or review process being performed

    • The type of issue identified during that review

    See for information about creating reusable Quality Assurance review checklists.

    QA Issue Types can be deleted when they are no longer needed.

    Before deleting an Issue Type, review whether it is still being used by existing QA records and whether the classification should remain available for future reviews.

    • Create Issue Types that represent meaningful categories of QA findings.

    • Keep names clear and consistent across the organization.

    • Avoid creating duplicate or overlapping Issue Types.

    • Use categories broad enough to remain useful across multiple review workflows.

    Document Templates

    Manage reusable Microsoft Word templates used to generate Custom Case Reports in Monolith.

    Document Templates stores the Microsoft Word templates available for use with Custom Report Templates.

    Templates saved here can be reused when generating reports from different Cases, allowing your team to maintain consistent report formats without uploading the same .docx file each time.

    View Document Templates

    Navigate to Settings > Document Templates to view the templates available in your Monolith environment.

    The table can display information such as:

    • Template Name

    • Description

    • Created By

    • Created On

    • Shared status

    Use the available table controls to search for templates or adjust the visible columns.

    Select Add Template to upload a new Microsoft Word report template.

    Document Templates use the .docx file format and can contain Monolith report variables, loops, tables, conditional logic, and other supported template syntax.

    After a template is added, it can be selected when generating a Custom Report from a Case.

    See Custom Report Templates for information about building and using report templates.

    Custom Report Templates can also be uploaded while generating a report from a Case.

    Once saved, those templates are available from Settings > Document Templates for future management and reuse.

    This allows users to build and test templates as part of the reporting workflow without needing to upload the same template again for every Case.

    Use the Shared setting to control whether a template is available to other users in your Monolith environment.

    A shared template can be selected by other team members when creating Custom Reports.

    Templates that are not shared remain available only to the user who created them.

    Sharing commonly used templates can help standardize reporting across the organization.

    Use Document Templates to maintain the reusable report formats used by your team.

    This is especially useful when:

    • Updating an existing report template

    • Testing changes to template syntax

    • Maintaining organization-specific report formats

    • Providing standardized templates to other users

    When updating a template, test the generated report before using the revised version for final reporting.

    Document Templates are Microsoft Word .docx files used to generate Custom Case Reports.

    are reusable content blocks used within Monolith's Notes editor.

    Use Document Templates when you need a reusable report format. Use Editor Templates when you want to standardize recurring Notes or documentation entered directly into Monolith.

    Hardware Integrations

    Connect supported printers, scanners, and signature devices to Monolith for labeling, audits, and Chain of Custody workflows.

    Monolith supports several hardware integrations that can help connect digital case and evidence records with the physical work happening in your lab.

    Use the Hardware Integrations documentation to set up supported label printers, barcode and QR code scanners, and signature devices used throughout Monolith workflows.

    DYMO Label Printers

    Monolith can work with supported DYMO Label Printers to print labels for Evidence Items, Storage Items, and other supported records.

    Labels can include Monolith data such as identifying information, text, QR codes, and barcodes.

    A common workflow is:

    Create or update an item
        ↓
    Generate a Monolith label
        ↓
    Print with DYMO
        ↓
    Attach the label to the physical item
        ↓
    Scan the item later when needed

    See DYMO Label Printers for installation and troubleshooting guidance.

    See Printer Recommendations for information about supported printer options.

    Barcode and QR Code Scanners

    USB barcode and QR code scanners can be used with Monolith labels to quickly locate records without manually searching for an Evidence Number or other identifier.

    Scanning is especially useful during , where physical items can be scanned as your team works through an inventory.

    Most standard USB scanners behave like keyboard input and do not require specialized Monolith configuration.

    See for hardware guidance.

    For the Audit workflow, see .

    For information about configuring QR codes and barcodes on Monolith labels, see .

    Monolith supports signature capture during workflows such as Chain of Custody.

    Depending on the device and workflow, signatures may be captured using supported signature hardware or directly from touch-enabled devices.

    See for information about supported signature hardware and setup.

    The hardware you need depends on the workflows your organization wants to support.

    Workflow
    Hardware

    You do not need every hardware integration to use Monolith. Add the devices that support the way your organization handles physical evidence, labeling, inventory, and custody.

    Admin Log

    Review administrative and user activity recorded across Monolith.

    The Admin Log provides users with appropriate administrative access a centralized view of activity recorded across Monolith.

    It can be useful when reviewing user activity, investigating when a change occurred, or tracing activity associated with a particular Case or user.

    Review Admin Log Entries

    Each Admin Log entry can include information such as:

    • Timestamp

    • User

    • Whether the entry is categorized as an Admin Log event

    • Case Number

    • Case Name

    • Activity or log details

    The information available depends on the activity being recorded.

    The Admin Log uses a standard Monolith table and includes tools for narrowing the activity you want to review.

    Select Add Filter to filter Admin Log entries by supported fields such as:

    • Timestamp

    • User

    • Admin Log

    • Case information

    Filters can help isolate activity for a particular user, date range, Case, or type of log entry.

    See for more information about filtering Monolith tables.

    Use the Search Logs field to quickly search the Admin Log for matching activity.

    This can be useful when looking for a particular Case, user, record, or activity description.

    The Admin Log supports standard Monolith table functionality such as:

    • Sorting

    • Selecting visible columns

    • Resizing and rearranging columns

    • Searching

    See for more information about working with Monolith tables.

    The Admin Log can help administrators review questions such as:

    • Who performed a recorded action?

    • When did an activity occur?

    • What recent activity is associated with a Case?

    • What activity has been recorded for a particular user?

    Because log entries preserve contextual information about recorded activity, the Admin Log can also be useful when troubleshooting or reviewing historical actions in Monolith.

    Template Examples

    Download example Microsoft Word templates to see how Monolith report variables, loops, tables, photos, and Chain of Custody data can be used in Custom Report Templates.

    Template Examples provide downloadable Microsoft Word .docx files that demonstrate how Monolith report variables and template syntax can be used in real report layouts.

    Use these examples as a starting point when building or troubleshooting your own Custom Report Templates.

    You can open a template to review how variables, loops, tables, images, and other report logic are structured, then adapt the approach to match your organization's reporting requirements.

    Standard Monolith Report

    The Standard Monolith Report is an example of a complete templated report generated by Monolith.

    This example demonstrates several common Custom Report Template techniques, including:

    • Report variables

    • Case information

    • Evidence data

    • Evidence loops

    • Microsoft Word tables

    • Evidence photos

    • Other supported report content

    Download the template and review it alongside the documentation to see how Monolith data is placed throughout the Word document.

    The Chain of Custody With Signatures example demonstrates how to output Chain of Custody records for an Evidence Item, including signature images.

    This example is useful when building a report that needs to display custody history in a structured Word document format.

    Use it as a reference for:

    • Evidence loops

    • Nested Chain of Custody records

    • Custody metadata

    • Signature images

    See for the supported Chain of Custody variables and syntax.

    When working with an example template:

    1. Download the .docx file.

    2. Open it in Microsoft Word.

    3. Review the Monolith variables and template syntax used throughout the document.

    4. Compare the syntax with the corresponding entries in .

    Starting from a working example can make it easier to understand how Monolith data and Microsoft Word formatting work together.

    Once you have created a reusable report template, save it in so it can be selected again for future Cases.

    Templates can also be marked as Shared so other Monolith users can select and reuse them when generating reports.

    See for additional guidance.

    Requirements

    Review the Docker, hardware, email, and optional storage requirements for deploying Monolith on-premises.

    Before deploying Monolith on-premises, review the infrastructure and supporting services required for your environment.

    The exact deployment may vary depending on how your organization plans to host Monolith, provide user access, store files, and integrate with internal systems.

    Docker

    Docker or Docker Desktop is required for a standard Monolith on-premises deployment.

    Install Docker on the system that will host the Monolith containers before beginning the deployment process.

    Follow the existing Docker installation link for installation guidance.

    Hardware

    The following minimum hardware is required to run the Monolith application backend within Docker:

    • Operating System: Ubuntu Server 20, 22, or 24

    • Memory: 4 GB RAM

    • CPU: 2 cores

    • Storage: At least 100 GB

    More than 500 GB of storage is recommended for environments that expect to retain a larger amount of Monolith data or uploaded files locally.

    Storage requirements may increase substantially depending on how your organization plans to use Monolith and where uploaded files will be stored.

    To use Monolith email functionality, your organization must provide access to an SMTP service.

    Required SMTP information includes:

    • SMTP host

    • SMTP port

    • SMTP user

    • SMTP password

    These values are supplied to the Monolith application container at runtime.

    SMTP configuration supports features that send email from Monolith, such as account, notification, and other supported email workflows.

    Organizations that want to store Monolith files in Amazon S3 can configure S3 as part of the on-premises deployment.

    Required information includes:

    • AWS Access Key

    • AWS Secret Key

    • AWS Region

    • AWS Endpoint

    S3 integration is optional and depends on how your organization plans to store Monolith files.

    Organizations may instead use other supported storage configurations documented in the on-premises deployment section.

    Before continuing, confirm that your technical team has determined:

    • Where the Monolith containers will run

    • How much storage should be allocated

    • Whether Monolith email functionality will be enabled

    • Where uploaded Monolith files will be stored

    After confirming these requirements, continue to for information about the application components used in the deployment.

    QA Checklist Items

    Create and manage reusable Quality Assurance checklists used when performing QA Reviews in Monolith.

    Quality Assurance Checklists allow your organization to create repeatable review processes for work performed in Monolith.

    A checklist can represent the items another user should verify during a QA Review, helping teams apply a consistent review process across Cases and Evidence workflows.

    Organizations can create different checklists for different types of review, such as:

    • Case review

    • Evidence review

    • Collection review

    • Report peer review

    • Case closure review

    • Organization-specific SOP or compliance checks

    The QA Checklist Items settings page displays the Quality Assurance checklists configured for your organization.

    From this page, you can:

    • Create a new QA Checklist

    • Enable or disable a checklist

    • Preview an existing checklist

    • Edit checklist content

    Enabled checklists can be used as part of supported QA Review workflows in Monolith.

    Select Add QA Checklist to create a new checklist.

    Give the checklist a clear name that identifies the type of review it is intended to support.

    For example:

    • Evidence Intake Review

    • Collection Review

    • Report Peer Review

    • Case Closure QA

    Once created, open the checklist to add its review groups and individual checklist items.

    A QA Checklist can contain one or more Checklist Groups.

    Groups allow related review items to be organized into logical sections.

    For example, a checklist might include groups such as:

    • Screening

    • Evidence Handling

    • Acquisition

    • Analysis

    Select Add Checklist Group to create another section within the checklist.

    Each Checklist Group can contain individual review items that describe what the reviewer should verify.

    Checklist Items can be used for requirements such as:

    • Confirming required photographs were captured

    • Reviewing Evidence metadata

    • Verifying Chain of Custody information

    • Checking acquisition details

    Use Add Item within a Checklist Group to create additional review requirements.

    Checklist Items can also be edited or deleted as your review process changes.

    Select View to preview the structure and contents of a QA Checklist.

    Use Edit when you need to update the checklist, add or remove groups, or change individual review items.

    This makes it possible to maintain reusable review processes without recreating the checklist each time a QA Review is performed.

    Use the Enabled control to determine whether a checklist should remain available for active QA workflows.

    Disabling a checklist can be useful when a review process is no longer being used but you do not want to immediately delete the checklist configuration.

    QA Checklists are used when performing Quality Assurance Reviews within a Case.

    A QA Review can be assigned to another Monolith user so that a second person can review selected aspects of the work using the appropriate checklist.

    This can help organizations standardize peer review, internal quality control, and other review processes.

    See for more information about the Case-level Quality Assurance workflow.

    • Create separate checklists for meaningfully different review processes.

    • Use Checklist Groups to organize related review requirements.

    • Keep individual Checklist Items clear and actionable.

    • Avoid combining unrelated review processes into one very large checklist.

    A screenshot showing where to find the magnifying glass icon to start a global search within Monolith

    Overview

    Use My Dashboard to quickly return to recent work and Admin Dashboard to review high-level activity and workload metrics across Monolith.

    The Dashboard Overview provides a starting point for catching up on recent work and reviewing activity across Monolith.

    Two dashboard views are available depending on your access:

    • My Dashboard focuses on information relevant to the currently logged-in user.

    • Admin Dashboard provides higher-level information about activity across the organization.

    My Dashboard acts as a catch-up board for your work in Monolith.

    Case Progress

    Configure the Case Progress pipeline used to show where Cases are within your organization's workflow.

    Case Progress represents where a Case currently sits within your organization's workflow.

    Each organization can configure a sequence of Progress stages that reflects how work typically moves from intake through completion.

    For example, a Case Progress pipeline might include:

    • Pending

    • Processing

    Forensic Software

    Track forensic software, licenses, versions, costs, expiration dates, and other software used by your lab.

    The Forensic Software section provides a central inventory of the software products and licenses used by your organization.

    Maintaining these records can help your team track software versions, licensing information, expiration dates, costs, and other operational details. Forensic Software records can also be selected when documenting Acquisitions, preserving which tool and version were used during forensic collection.

    Navigate to Lab Management > Forensic Software to view the software records maintained by your organization.

    The table can display information such as:

    • Vendor

    Evidence Progress

    Configure the Evidence Progress pipeline used to show where individual Evidence Items are within your organization's workflow.

    Evidence Progress represents where an individual Evidence Item currently sits within your organization's workflow.

    Each organization can configure a sequence of Progress stages that reflects how Evidence typically moves from intake through acquisition, analysis, completion, or other stages relevant to the work your team performs.

    For example, an Evidence Progress pipeline might include:

    • Pending Authority

    • Pending

    Item Number Formats

    Configure automatic numbering formats for Cases, Evidence Items, and Storage Items in Monolith.

    In this section, Monolith allows you to customize your Case number, Evidence number, and Storage number format.

    Item Number Formats control how Monolith automatically generates identifiers for , , and .

    Consistent numbering makes records easier to identify, search, report on, label, and reference throughout your organization.

    Each numbering format can combine static text, date values, and an automatically incrementing Iterator.

    Number formats can be built using the following components:

    • Text — add a fixed prefix, suffix, separator, or other text

    Team Management

    Add and manage Monolith users, roles, office assignments, account access, and authentication resets for your organization.

    Create and manage the individual people who have access to your Monolith environment.

    Team Management allows administrators to add users, assign roles and offices, review account status, and manage access for existing team members.

    1. In the left-hand navigation, open the Organization tab and click Team Management.

    2. Click New User in the top left.

    Security Overview

    Review Monolith cloud security architecture, tenant isolation, encryption, backups, vulnerability management, endpoint protection, penetration testing, and logging.

    All customers are assigned a Monolith Tenant. A Tenant is a logical unit that separates each customer's data into its own environment.

    In Monolith, each customer has their own database and logical file storage area. This means that data entered into Monolith is not commingled with data from other customers.

    The same concept applies to files uploaded into Monolith. Files are stored within logical storage boundaries associated with the customer Tenant.

    Data Export

    This Tenant architecture also makes it straightforward to provide customers with a copy of their Monolith data.

    To request a data export, contact .

    All data stored in Monolith is encrypted at rest using AES-256 encryption. This includes data stored in databases, server infrastructure, and file object storage.

    Data transmitted to, from, or within supported Monolith cloud services is encrypted using HTTPS and TLS encryption standards/protocols.

    Task Templates

    Create reusable task templates with subtasks for repeatable lab workflows.

    Task templates help teams create repeatable task lists for common workflows in Monolith.

    A task template can include a task structure, subtasks, and other task details that your team wants to reuse. This is useful for standardized lab processes, onboarding checklists, collection workflows, analysis steps, review tasks, or any other process that should be completed consistently.

    Use task templates when your team regularly follows the same set of steps.

    Common examples include:

    • iPhone collection process

    • Android collection process

    Evidence Types

    Create and manage Evidence Types used to categorize devices, accounts, data sources, and other Evidence Items throughout Monolith.

    Evidence Types provide a consistent way to categorize the different kinds of Evidence Items your organization handles in Monolith.

    An Evidence Item may represent a physical device, cloud account, email account, storage media, or another source of data. Evidence Types help organize those records into meaningful categories.

    Consistent Evidence Types make it easier to filter, report on, and understand the volume and makeup of Evidence across your organization.

    The Evidence Types settings page displays the Evidence Types currently configured for your organization.

    Each Evidence Type also shows the number of Evidence Items currently associated with it.

    Use this list to review the categories available when creating or updating Evidence Items.

    To create a new Evidence Type:

    Case Statuses

    Create and manage Case Statuses used to identify whether Cases are active, closed, or in another operational state.

    Case Statuses identify the current state of a Case.

    Monolith includes the system-required Active and Closed statuses, while organizations can create additional statuses that reflect their own operational workflows.

    For example, additional Case Statuses might include:

    • Backlog

    • Standby

    Time Entry Categories

    Create and manage categories used to classify time recorded against Tasks and Cases in Monolith.

    Time Entry Categories provide a consistent way to classify the type of work being recorded in Monolith.

    Organizations that use Monolith's time-tracking features can create categories that reflect the activities their team performs, making recorded time easier to review and report on.

    Examples might include:

    • Client Meeting

    • Collection & Preservation

    API

    Create and manage API keys and webhooks used to integrate Monolith with external systems and workflows.

    The API settings page provides administrative tools for connecting Monolith with external systems and custom workflows.

    From this page, administrators can:

    • Create and manage API keys

    • Create and manage Webhooks

    • Subscribe Webhooks to supported Monolith resource events

    Single Sign On (SSO)

    Understand how Monolith uses SAML 2.0 Single Sign-On, what information is exchanged with your identity provider, and how to coordinate SSO setup.

    Single Sign-On, or SSO, allows users to authenticate to Monolith using their organization's existing identity provider instead of Monolith's standard email, password, and two-factor authentication workflow.

    For example, an organization using Microsoft Entra ID may configure users to authenticate with their existing organizational credentials before being redirected back into Monolith.

    SSO can help organizations align Monolith access with existing identity management, authentication, and account security policies.

    Monolith SSO uses the SAML 2.0 standard to exchange authentication information between Monolith and your organization's identity provider.

    SAML allows the identity provider to authenticate the user and send Monolith the information needed to identify the corresponding Monolith account.

    Two common terms used during SSO configuration are Identity Provider and Service Provider.

    The Identity Provider

    Monolith Desktop Setup

    Learn how to install Monolith Desktop and connect it to the correct Monolith cloud region or on-premises server.

    Monolith Desktop allows users to access Monolith from a dedicated desktop application instead of a web browser.

    The application is available for Windows and macOS. After installation, connect Monolith Desktop to the correct cloud region or environment before logging in.

    Download and install the version of Monolith Desktop that matches your operating system and device type.

    The latest desktop installers are available on the page.

    Monolith Desktop can also be downloaded from within the Monolith web application:

    1. Log in to Monolith.

    docker-compose.yml

    Docker configuration and deployment file

    This file is used to define the deployment options for the various Docker containers that make up the Monolith on-premises deployment.

    Unless you require an advanced deployment, you will not need to modify this file.

    This file is used with the following commands to build, re-build, and remove the containers that run Monolith.

    Scanner Recommendations

    Review recommended USB and wireless barcode scanners for locating Monolith records and verifying items during Audits.

    Monolith works with standard USB and wireless barcode scanners that behave like keyboard input.

    Scanners can be used with Monolith barcodes and QR codes to quickly locate records without manually searching for an Evidence Number or other identifier.

    They are especially useful during physical inventory and Audit workflows.

    The is a recommended option for use with Monolith.

    It supports:

    • Barcode scanning

    Enter a Template Name.

  • Add the template content.

  • Click Save.

  • Make the necessary changes.

  • Click Save.

  • Confirm the deletion if prompted.

    Share templates that should be used consistently across the team.

  • Review shared templates periodically to make sure they still match your team’s process.

  • Access Editor Templates

    Create an Editor Template

    Shared Templates

    Shared templates are useful for team-wide processes where notes should follow a consistent format across users.

    Create a Template From an Existing Note

    Edit an Editor Template

    Delete an Editor Template

    Editor Templates vs. Document Templates

    Best Practices

    Using a Scanner
    Evidence Items
    Custom Fields
    Backups
    Custom Domains and TLS
    Connecting to File Shares
    Using External MySQL Database
    Updates
    Filter for records assigned to you
  • Open individual records to review additional information

  • Digital signatures
  • Quick case and evidence review

  • Notes

  • Collecting chain of custody signatures

  • Moving evidence between locations

  • Reviewing case or evidence information away from a workstation

  • Taking case or evidence notes while working

  • Sign In

    Access Cases and Evidence

    Add Evidence Items

    Scan Evidence Information

    Capture Evidence Photos

    Manage Chain of Custody

    Collect Digital Signatures

    Work With Notes

    Phones and Tablets

    Monolith Mobile focuses on workflows that benefit from being available away from a workstation. Some functionality available in the full Monolith web and desktop applications may not be available from a phone.

    Common Mobile Workflows

    Learn More

    Related Documentation

    Monolith Mobile product page
    Accessing Monolith
    SSO Login
    Monolith Mobile product page
    Accessing Monolith
    Login & 2FA
    SSO Login
    Item Labels

    Your basic workflow matches how your team plans to use Monolith

    Relay

  • Single Sign-On

  • Integrations

  • Monolith API

  • 4. Configure case options

    5. Configure evidence options

    6. Configure time entry options

    7. Configure quality assurance options

    8. Configure item labels

    9. Create evidence locations

    10. Add existing storage items, if applicable

    11. Add forensic software

    12. Test your configuration

    Optional Setup

    Item Number Formats
    Case Types
    Case Statuses
    Case Progress
    Evidence Types
    Evidence Progress
    Time Entry Categories
    QA Checklist Items
    QA Issue Types
    Item Labels
    Item Locations
    Storage Items
    Forensic Software
    Custom Fields
    Editor Templates
    Document Templates
    Task Templates
    Another configured Item Location
    Verify physical Evidence and Storage Items against their Monolith records.
  • Using a Scanner: Use barcode or QR code scanning to speed up item verification.

  • Using Labels and Scanners

    Explore Audit Features

    Related Documentation

    Item Locations
    Using a Scanner
    Item Labels
    Creating Audits
    Viewing and Accessing Audits
    Audit Features & Layout
    Auditing Items
    Evidence Items
    Storage Items
    Item Locations
    Item Labels

    Reusing the same report format across multiple Cases

    Editor Templates

  • Case Reports

  • Add a Document Template

    Templates Created From a Case

    Shared Templates

    Manage Existing Templates

    Document Templates vs. Editor Templates

    Related Documentation

    Editor Templates
    Custom Report Templates
    Monolith Case Reports
    Template Variables
    Template Examples

    Whether AWS S3 or another supported storage option will be used

  • How users will connect to the Monolith environment

  • Connecting to File Shares

  • Using External MySQL Database

  • SMTP for Email

    Amazon AWS S3 Integration

    Before Deployment

    Related Documentation

    Monolith Containers (Docker)
    On-Premises Deployments
    Monolith Containers (Docker)
    Deployment
    Monolith Data
    Delete a checklist
    SOP Checklist
    Reporting
  • Documentation

  • Final Review

  • Reviewing report content

  • Confirming required documentation is present

  • Verifying organization-specific procedures were followed

  • Review checklists periodically as SOPs and internal procedures change.

  • Disable outdated checklists when they should no longer be used for new reviews.

  • Use consistent checklist names so users can quickly identify the appropriate review process.

  • QA Checklists

    Create a QA Checklist

    Checklist Groups

    Checklist Items

    Preview and Edit Checklists

    Enable or Disable a Checklist

    QA Checklists and QA Reviews

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Cases
    Cases
    Tasks
    QA Issue Types
    Email Notifications

    Forensic reports

    Are commonly used for long-term or shared data storage

    May be reassigned, recycled, or destroyed according to your organization’s process

    Save the item.

    Confirm the assignment.

    Removed from a case
  • Reassigned for future use

  • Destroyed when it should no longer remain in service

  • Review linked acquisitions before removing, reassigning, or destroying an item.

  • Maintain chain of custody for assigned storage when required.

  • Follow your organization’s retention and media destruction policies.

  • Examples of stored data include:

    Evidence Items vs. Storage Items

    Storage Item Categories

    General Storage Items

    Assigned Storage Items

    Review the item’s acquisitions, chain of custody, and case association before removing or reassigning an assigned storage item. Removing an item from a case may affect its linked records and custody history.

    Create or Assign a Storage Item

    Create a New Storage Item

    Assign an Existing Storage Item

    Storage Item Lifecycle

    Best Practices

    Assigning Storage Items
    Tool validation
  • Internal procedure

  • Compliance requirements

  • Review Issue Types periodically as quality procedures and organizational requirements change.

  • Coordinate QA Issue Types with your QA Checklists so reviewers have consistent ways to classify findings.

  • View QA Issue Types

    Create a QA Issue Type

    Using QA Issue Types

    QA Issue Types and QA Reviews

    Delete a QA Issue Type

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    QA Checklist Items
    QA Checklist Items
    Cases
    Tasks
    View QA issue types
    Create a QA Issue Type
    Delete QA Issue type
    Other available log fields
    Filtering
  • Exporting supported table data

  • What changes or access events occurred during a particular period?

    The Admin Log provides broad application activity history, but it should not be interpreted as a record of every possible action performed in Monolith.

    Find Activity

    Filter

    Search

    Table Controls

    Common Uses

    Related Documentation

    Query Filter
    Tables
    Tables
    Query Filter
    Cases
    Team Management
    Admin log
    Repeating custody information within a report

    Modify a copy of the template for your organization's report format.

  • Upload the revised template to Monolith.

  • Generate a test report and review the output.

  • Continue refining the template as needed.

  • Case Reports

    Chain of Custody With Signatures

    Using the Example Templates

    Managing Your Templates

    Related Documentation

    Template Variables
    Template Variables
    Template Variables
    Settings > Document Templates
    Document Templates
    Custom Report Templates
    Template Variables
    Document Templates
    Monolith Case Reports
    Standard Monolith Report.docx
    102KB
    Open
    COC with Signatures.docx
    14KB
    Open
    Accessing Monolith
    Using a Scanner
    Query Filter
    Managing Licensing
    Monolith Data
    Backups
    Custom Domains and TLS
    Category
  • Serial Number

  • Purchase Date

  • Cost

  • Location

  • Description

  • Equipment storage area

    Use the Description field for additional information that does not fit cleanly into the structured fields.

  • Use table filters and exports when reviewing your organization's equipment inventory.

  • Add Equipment

    Equipment Location

    Export Equipment

    Edit an Equipment Record

    Delete an Equipment Record

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Tables
    Item Locations
    Tables
    Lab Management
    Forensic Software
    Tables
    Item Locations
    Create Equipment
    Export to excel
    Edit and Delete Equipment
    Relay URL
  • Available workspaces

  • Relay Administration

    Relay URL

    Workspaces

    Monolith Desktop Installers

    Date and Time Format

    Currency Format

    Related Documentation

    Relay Overview
    Relay Administration
    Monolith Desktop Setup
    Accessing Monolith
    Organization Info
    Accessing Monolith
    Monolith Desktop Setup
    Relay Overview
    Data breaches
  • eDiscovery or litigation matters

  • Consulting engagements

  • Other organization-specific workflows

  • Consider how Case Types will be used when filtering, exporting, and reporting on Cases across Monolith.

    Case Types and Cases

    Case Types and Inquiries

    Delete a Case Type

    Review the Cases associated with a Case Type before deleting it. Existing Cases must be reassigned to another Case Type so their categorization is preserved.

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Cases
    Inquiries
    Cases
    Inquiries
    Query Filter
    Create Case Type
    Deleting Case Types

    Capture signatures during custody workflows

    Supported signature device

    Item Labels

  • Audits

  • Using a Scanner

  • Print Evidence or Storage labels

    DYMO Label Printer

    Scan Monolith barcodes or QR codes

    USB barcode / QR code scanner

    Speed up physical Audit verification

    Signature Devices

    Choosing Hardware

    Related Documentation

    Audits
    Scanner Recommendations
    Using a Scanner
    Item Labels
    Signature Tablets
    DYMO Label Printers
    Printer Recommendations
    Scanner Recommendations
    Signature Tablets

    Barcode / QR code scanner

    // Deploy Monolith
    docker compose up -d
    
    // Remove All Monolith Containers
    docker compose down

    File Example

    Note: Indentation matters in this file - if the indentation is not set properly, you may see errors when trying to deploy Monolith.

    How this file works

    docker-compose.yml
    services:
      monolith-api:
        container_name: monolith-api
        image: monolithforensics/monolith-api:latest
        restart: always
        volumes:
          - ./data/logs:/usr/src/app/data/logs
          - ./data/Monolith:/usr/src/app/data/Monolith
          - ./data/Monolith-forms:/usr/src/app/data/Monolith-forms
        ports:
          - "3001:3001"
        env_file:
          - .env
        mem_limit: 512m
    
      monolith-forms:
        container_name: monolith-forms
        image: monolithforensics/monolith-forms:on-prem
        restart: always
        volumes:
          - ./data/logs:/usr/src/app/data/logs
        ports:
          - "3003:3003"
        mem_limit: 150m
    
      monolith:
        container_name: monolith
        image: monolithforensics/monolith:on-prem
        restart: always
        volumes:
          - ./data/logs:/usr/src/app/data/logs
        ports:
          - "3005:3005"
        mem_limit: 150m
    
      mysql:
        container_name: mysql2
        image: mysql:8.0.16
        command: --default-authentication-plugin=mysql_native_password --sql_mode=""
        security_opt:
          - seccomp:unconfined
        restart: always
        ports:
         - "3307:3306"
        environment:
          MYSQL_ROOT_PASSWORD: ${MONOLITH_DB_PASSWORD}
          MYSQL_USER: ${MONOLITH_DB_USER}
          MYSQL_PASSWORD: ${MONOLITH_DB_PASSWORD}
          MYSQL_DATABASE: ${MONOLITH_DB_NAME}
        volumes:
          - ./data/mysql:/var/lib/mysql
          - ./init:/docker-entrypoint-initdb.d
        mem_limit: 512m
    
      nginx:
        container_name: nginx
        image: monolithforensics/nginx:latest
        restart: always
        ports:
          - "80:80"
          - "443:443"
        volumes:
         - ./data/logs/nginx:/var/log/nginx/
        # - /etc/nginx:/etc/nginx
        # - /etc/letsencrypt:/etc/letsencrypt/
    
      watchtower:
        container_name: watchtower
        image: containrrr/watchtower:latest
        restart: always
        environment:
         - WATCHTOWER_CLEANUP=true
        command: --interval 30
        volumes:
         - /var/run/docker.sock:/var/run/docker.sock
        mem_limit: 512m
    It brings together recent Cases, Evidence Items, activity, QA Reviews, upcoming Tasks, and new Inquiries so you can quickly return to records you were recently working with or identify items that may need your attention.

    The information displayed reflects records the current user has permission to access.

    Select Customize to choose which widgets are displayed.

    Available widgets include:

    • Tasks Due Soon

    • My Recent Activity

    • My Recent Cases

    • My Recent Evidence

    • My QA Reviews

    • New Inquiries

    Widgets can be rearranged by dragging them to a different position on the Dashboard.

    They can also be resized by dragging the lower-right corner of the widget. This allows widgets to be displayed as smaller squares, wider rectangles, or larger panels depending on the information you want to emphasize.

    Dashboard layout preferences are generally stored in the browser. A different browser or device may therefore have a different layout, and clearing browser data may reset the arrangement.

    Displays the most recent Cases accessed by the current user.

    Select a Case to return directly to that record.

    Displays the most recent Evidence Items accessed by the current user.

    Select an Evidence Item to return directly to the item.

    Displays recent Monolith activity performed by the current user.

    This can help you retrace recent work and return to records you were previously reviewing.

    Displays incomplete Quality Assurance Reviews currently assigned to the user.

    This provides a quick way to identify reviews that still require attention.

    Displays Tasks with upcoming due dates so the user can quickly identify work that may need attention.

    Displays Inquiries currently in the New status.

    New Inquiries are displayed from oldest to newest, helping teams identify requests that have been waiting for review.

    Select an Inquiry to open the request and begin the triage workflow.

    The Admin Dashboard provides users with appropriate administrative access a higher-level view of activity across the Monolith environment.

    Unlike My Dashboard, which is centered on an individual user's recent work, the Admin Dashboard is intended as a quick organizational snapshot.

    It can be useful for reviewing general workload, case activity, evidence volume, data collection, and time tracking without building a separate report.

    For deeper reporting or more specific metrics, organizations can also use Analytics, filtered table exports, or the Monolith API.

    Overview Page

    Select Customize to choose which Admin Dashboard widgets are displayed.

    Admin Dashboard widgets can also be rearranged and resized to create a layout that emphasizes the information most useful to the administrator.

    Available widgets include:

    • Case Lead Assignments

    • Cases Grouped by User and Status

    • Cases & Evidence (Last 12 Months)

    • Data Collected (This Month)

    • Evidence Summary (This Month)

    • Case Summary (This Month)

    • Time Tracked (This Month)

    • Top Clients (Last 6 Months)

    • Time Tracked Per User

    Shows the distribution of non-closed Cases across assigned Case Leads.

    This provides a quick view of how active Case responsibility is distributed across the team.

    Provides an organization-level view of Cases grouped by assigned user and Case Status.

    This can help administrators quickly compare workload and Case state across users.

    Shows activity over the previous 12 months for:

    • Cases

    • Evidence Items

    • Acquisitions

    This provides a visual view of how the volume of work recorded in Monolith has changed over time.

    Summarizes the amount of forensic data recorded through Acquisitions during the current month.

    This can provide a quick indication of recent collection volume.

    Summarizes Evidence activity for the current month.

    Information can include:

    • Total Evidence Items

    • Items currently in custody

    • Untracked items

    • Total recorded capacity

    An Untracked item is an Evidence Item that does not currently have a Chain of Custody record establishing custody or location tracking.

    Provides a current-month summary of Cases, including totals for Active and Closed Cases.

    Summarizes time recorded in Monolith during the current month.

    Depending on the available time-entry information, this can include recorded hours and supported billed or unbilled totals.

    Provides a high-level view of frequently represented Clients over the previous six months.

    Summarizes monthly time recorded by individual Monolith users.

    The dashboard compares recorded time with the available monthly capacity shown for each user, providing an at-a-glance view of team utilization.

    Time is recorded through supported Monolith time-entry workflows associated with work such as Tasks.

    The Dashboard is designed for quick visibility rather than detailed reporting.

    Use My Dashboard when you want to catch up on your own work.

    Use Admin Dashboard when you want a quick view of organization-level activity.

    For deeper analysis, specific metrics, or reporting across larger data sets, use Monolith's Analytics tools, API, or the filtering and export capabilities available throughout Monolith tables.

    • Cases

    • Inquiries

    • Evidence Items

    • Tables

    My Dashboard

    Video Walkthrough

    Customize My Dashboard

    My Recent Cases

    My Recent Evidence

    My Recent Activity

    My QA Reviews

    Tasks Due Soon

    New Inquiries

    Admin Dashboard

    Video Walkthrough

    Customize the Admin Dashboard

    Case Lead Assignments

    Cases Grouped by User and Status

    Cases & Evidence

    Data Collected

    Evidence Summary

    Case Summary

    Time Tracked

    Top Clients

    Time Tracked Per User

    Dashboard vs. Analytics

    Related Documentation

    Preservation
  • Collection

  • Analysis

  • Reporting

  • Case Completed

  • The configured stages appear across the Case as a visual pipeline, making it easy to see where the Case currently sits in the overall process.

    Case Progress is designed to represent your organization's operational workflow.

    As work advances, users can update the Case to the appropriate Progress stage. The Case Progress bar provides a quick visual representation of that position.

    Different organizations may configure very different pipelines depending on the type of work they perform.

    A digital forensics lab may organize Progress around collection, examination, analysis, and reporting, while a corporate or legal team may use stages that reflect investigation, preservation, review, or other internal processes.

    See Cases for more information about managing Case information and workflow.

    Case Progress and Case Status are separate concepts.

    Case Progress answers:

    Where is this Case within our workflow?

    Case Status answers:

    What is the overall state of this Case?

    For example, a Case may have:

    • Status: Active

    • Progress: Analysis

    The Case can remain Active while moving through multiple Progress stages.

    See Case Statuses for information about configuring Case Status options.

    Case Progress is also separate from the My Progress and Total Progress metrics shown on a Case.

    The Case Progress pipeline is manually configured and identifies the current workflow stage.

    My Progress and Total Progress are calculated from work recorded within the Case, including supported completion information from:

    • Tasks

    • Evidence Items

    • Quality Assurance Reviews

    These metrics provide different information and should not be treated as the same measurement.

    The Case Progress settings page displays the stages currently configured for your organization.

    Each Progress Item also shows the number of Cases currently associated with that stage.

    The order shown in Settings determines the order in which the stages appear in the Case Progress pipeline.

    Case Progress Bar

    Case Progress Items can be rearranged to match the order of your organization's workflow.

    To change the order:

    1. Locate the Progress Item you want to move.

    2. Drag the item to the desired position in the list.

    3. Repeat as needed until the stages reflect your workflow.

    The order from top to bottom in Settings is reflected from left to right in the Case Progress bar.

    This makes it possible to design a workflow that follows the natural sequence of work performed by your team.

    Reorder case progress items

    To add a new Progress stage:

    1. Select Create Case Progress.

    2. Enter the name of the new Progress Item.

    3. Select Create Case Progress to save it.

    New Progress Items are added to the configured workflow and can then be repositioned using drag and drop.

    Create Progress Item

    Choose Progress names that clearly describe meaningful stages of work.

    Progress Items can be deleted when they are no longer needed.

    Progress Items

    If Cases are currently associated with the Progress Item being deleted, those Cases must be reassigned to another existing Progress stage before deletion can be completed.

    • Configure Case Progress around the major stages of work performed by your organization.

    • Keep the pipeline simple enough that users can quickly understand where a Case sits.

    • Use Progress stages for workflow position rather than creating additional Case Statuses for every step in the process.

    • Arrange Progress Items in the order work normally occurs.

    • Use names that are meaningful to the teams working Cases.

    • Review the pipeline periodically as your organization's processes change.

    • Avoid creating unnecessary stages that make the Progress bar difficult to interpret.

    • Cases

    • Case Statuses

    • Evidence Progress

    • Tasks

    Case Progress as a Workflow Pipeline

    Case Progress vs. Case Status

    Case Progress vs. Completion Metrics

    View Case Progress Items

    Reorder Case Progress Items

    Create a Case Progress Item

    Delete a Case Progress Item

    Review the Cases associated with a Progress Item before deleting it. Existing Cases must be reassigned so their current workflow position remains represented.

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Software

  • License Name

  • Edition

  • Purchase Date

  • Expiration Date

  • Time until expiration

  • Cost

  • Software Maintenance or Support cost

  • Location

  • Other available software metadata

  • Use the table controls to search, filter, sort, show or hide columns, and organize the view around the information most useful to your team.

    See Tables for additional guidance on working with Monolith tables.

    Select New Software to create a software record.

    Add Software Item

    Available information may include:

    • Software

    • Vendor

    • License Name

    • Edition

    • Purchase Date

    • Expiration Date

    • Cost

    • Software Maintenance or Support cost

    • License Key

    • Dongle Serial Number

    • Location

    • Description

    Capture the information that is useful to your organization's licensing and software management process.

    Software and Vendor fields can be selected from existing values or entered as needed.

    Forensic Software records can be referenced when documenting an Acquisition.

    When creating an Acquisition, users can select the forensic software used and record the applicable software version.

    This creates useful historical context around how forensic data was collected and allows the software information to be incorporated into supported reporting workflows.

    Keeping the Forensic Software inventory current also makes software selection more consistent when users document Acquisitions.

    Expiration dates can help your team identify software licenses or subscriptions that may require renewal.

    The Forensic Software table can provide an at-a-glance view of upcoming or past expiration dates so administrators can review licensing needs across the organization.

    Users can also configure supported software expiration notifications under Email Notifications.

    The Forensic Software table can be exported to Microsoft Excel using the Export control.

    Download Forensic Software list

    Exports follow the same table behavior used elsewhere in Monolith. The visible columns and active filters determine the information included in the exported file.

    If expected information is missing from an export, confirm that the appropriate columns are visible and that no unintended filters are applied.

    All matching records are included in the export, not only the page currently visible on screen.

    See Tables for more information about table exports.

    Select an existing software record to review or update its information.

    Update the record when licensing, version, expiration, cost, location, or other tracked information changes.

    Keeping existing records current helps preserve an accurate shared software inventory for the organization.

    Users with the appropriate permissions can delete software records that should no longer be maintained in Monolith.

    Review the record before deleting it, particularly when the software may have been referenced as part of previous forensic work.

    Edit and Delete Software Items
    • Maintain one clear record for each software license or installation your organization needs to track.

    • Record expiration dates when software requires renewal.

    • Keep software and vendor naming consistent.

    • Record software versions during Acquisitions when that information is relevant to the forensic record.

    • Update licensing and cost information as subscriptions or maintenance agreements change.

    • Use the table and export tools when reviewing software inventory or upcoming renewals.

    • Lab Management

    • Equipment

    • Email Notifications

    • Tables

    View Forensic Software

    Add Forensic Software

    Software and Acquisitions

    Track Software Expiration

    Export Forensic Software

    Edit a Software Record

    Delete a Software Record

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Intake

  • Acquisition

  • In Progress

  • Analysis

  • Complete

  • The configured stages appear across each Evidence Item as a visual pipeline, making it easy to understand where that item currently sits in the process.

    Evidence Progress is designed to represent the operational lifecycle of an individual Evidence Item.

    A Case may contain many Evidence Items, and each item can be at a different Progress stage at the same time.

    For example, within the same Case:

    • One mobile device may still be awaiting intake.

    • Another device may be undergoing acquisition.

    • An email account may already be in analysis.

    • A completed Evidence Item may have reached the final stage of the pipeline.

    This allows teams to track work at the Evidence level rather than relying only on the overall Case workflow.

    See Evidence Items for more information about managing Evidence records throughout Monolith.

    Evidence Progress and Case Progress are separate pipelines.

    Evidence Progress answers:

    Where is this Evidence Item within our workflow?

    Case Progress answers:

    Where is the overall Case within our workflow?

    A Case may be in an Analysis stage while individual Evidence Items within that Case remain at different stages of intake, acquisition, processing, or completion.

    Keeping these pipelines separate gives teams more accurate visibility into work occurring across multiple Evidence Items within a Case.

    See Case Progress for information about configuring the Case-level workflow.

    Evidence Progress is also separate from Evidence Status.

    Evidence Progress is the configurable workflow pipeline created by your organization.

    Evidence Status represents the system-level state of the Evidence Item and uses Monolith's defined status options.

    Use Evidence Progress to describe the operational stage of the work rather than creating additional concepts to represent every step in the Evidence lifecycle.

    The Evidence Progress settings page displays the Progress stages currently configured for your organization.

    Each Progress Item also shows the number of Evidence Items currently associated with that stage.

    The order shown in Settings determines the order in which the stages appear in the Evidence Progress pipeline.

    Evidence Progress Items can be rearranged to match the sequence of your organization's workflow.

    To change the order:

    1. Locate the Progress Item you want to move.

    2. Drag the item to the desired position in the list.

    3. Repeat as needed until the stages reflect your workflow.

    Reorder Evidence Progress

    The order from top to bottom in Settings is reflected from left to right on the Evidence Progress bar.

    Evidence Progress

    To add a new Progress stage:

    1. Select Create Evidence Progress.

    2. Enter the name of the new Progress Item.

    3. Select Create Evidence Progress to save it.

    New Progress Items can then be repositioned within the workflow using drag and drop.

    Choose names that clearly represent meaningful stages of work performed on Evidence Items.

    Create Evidence Progress

    Progress Items can be deleted when they are no longer needed.

    If Evidence Items are currently associated with the Progress Item being deleted, those Evidence Items must be reassigned to another existing Progress stage before deletion can be completed.

    Delete Evidence Progress
    • Configure Evidence Progress around the major stages your team uses to process Evidence.

    • Keep the pipeline simple enough that users can quickly understand where an item sits.

    • Use stages that are meaningful across the Evidence Types your organization commonly handles.

    • Arrange Progress Items in the order work normally occurs.

    • Remember that each Evidence Item progresses independently from the overall Case.

    • Keep Progress names distinct from system-level Evidence Statuses.

    • Review the pipeline periodically as your organization's processes change.

    • Avoid unnecessary stages that make the Evidence Progress bar difficult to interpret.

    • Evidence Items

    • Evidence Types

    • Case Progress

    • Cases

    Evidence Progress as a Workflow Pipeline

    Evidence Progress vs. Case Progress

    Evidence Progress vs. Evidence Status

    View Evidence Progress Items

    Reorder Evidence Progress Items

    Create an Evidence Progress Item

    Delete an Evidence Progress Item

    Review the Evidence Items associated with a Progress Item before deleting it. Existing Evidence Items must be reassigned so their current workflow position remains represented.

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Iterator — automatically increments as new records are created

  • Year — include the year in the generated number

  • Month — include the month

  • Day — include the day

  • The Iterator is required for automatically generated numbers and provides the sequential portion of the identifier.

    Use the preview shown in Monolith to confirm how the resulting number will appear before applying the format.

    The Case Number Format determines the number automatically assigned when a new Case is created and the Case Number field is left blank.

    A format might include:

    • An organization-specific prefix

    • The current year

    • A sequential Iterator

    • Separators such as hyphens or underscores

    For example:

    Case number format selection

    Choose a format that provides a clear and consistent Case identifier for your organization's workflow.

    See Cases for more information about creating and managing Cases.

    The Evidence Number Format determines the identifier automatically assigned to new Evidence Items when the Evidence Number field is left blank.

    For example:

    Evidence number format selection

    Monolith recommends establishing a consistent Evidence numbering convention and allowing the Iterator to generate unique Evidence Numbers whenever possible.

    Globally unique Evidence Numbers make the organization-wide Evidence Items view easier to use because each identifier points clearly to one Evidence Item without also requiring the Case Number for context.

    Some organizations use Case-specific Evidence numbering or other established conventions. Monolith allows teams to choose the numbering approach that best matches their operating procedures.

    See Evidence Items for more information about Evidence creation and management.

    The Storage Number Format determines the identifier automatically assigned when a new Storage Item is created and the Storage Number field is left blank.

    For example:

    Storage number format selection

    A consistent Storage numbering format helps distinguish Storage Items and makes them easier to locate and reference across Cases and Acquisitions.

    See Storage Items for more information about managing storage in Monolith.

    After configuring a format:

    1. Review the generated example.

    2. Confirm that the Text, date components, and Iterator appear in the desired order.

    3. Select Apply to save the format.

    Use Reset to discard unsaved changes.

    Use Default to return the format to the Monolith default configuration.

    • Establish numbering conventions before beginning active casework when possible.

    • Use an Iterator so automatically generated identifiers remain sequential.

    • Keep prefixes short and recognizable.

    • Use consistent separators and date formats.

    • Consider how identifiers will appear on labels, exports, reports, and global Monolith tables.

    • For Evidence Items, prefer unique identifiers across the Monolith environment when your organization's procedures allow it.

    • Avoid changing established numbering conventions unnecessarily after your organization has begun creating large numbers of records.

    • Initial Setup

    • Cases

    • Evidence Items

    • Storage Items

    Available Format Components

    Cases
    Evidence Items
    Storage Items
    MF-2026-00123
    EVI-00203
    STG-34225

    Case Number Format

    Evidence Number Format

    Storage Number Format

    Apply a Number Format

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Enter the user's First Name and Last Name.

  • Enter the user's Email.

  • Set a Password, or leave the field blank to auto-generate one. If you type a password, you can use the eye icon to show or hide what you have entered.

  • Select the Office this person belongs to.

  • Select a Role (see below).

  • Set the Observer Status (see below).

  • Click Create User.

  • Monolith confirms once the user has been created.

    When you open the Role dropdown, Monolith displays a short explanation of the access associated with each role.

    The available roles may vary if your organization uses custom user roles. Standard Monolith roles include:

    • Super Admin: Includes administrative privileges, the ability to delete cases and evidence, manage users, and manage settings. Provides complete access to Monolith.

    • Admin: Provides access to all cases and evidence and the ability to edit chain of custody records.

    • User: Provides basic access to Monolith.

    If custom roles are configured, additional options may appear. Review the description displayed in the Role dropdown before assigning access.

    Observer Status controls whether a user can make changes in Monolith.

    Available options include:

    • Write Access: The user can make edits and add new information based on the permissions available to their role.

    • Read Only: The user can log in and view information but cannot make edits or add new information.

    Use Read Only when a user needs visibility into Monolith without the ability to modify information.

    The Team Management screen shows users in your Monolith environment along with information such as:

    • Name

    • Email address

    • Role

    • Office

    • Account status

    Use the Team Management table to find and review users:

    • Filters: Narrow the user list based on available criteria, such as role.

    • Search: Find a specific user by name.

    • Sort: Select a column header to reorder the table using that column.

    Select a user from the Team Management list to open their details.

    If you have the appropriate administrative access, available account management actions may include:

    • Send a password reset email

    • Send an MFA reset

    • Deactivate the user

    Deactivate a user when they should no longer have access to your Monolith environment, such as when someone leaves your organization.

    A deactivated user can no longer log in to Monolith.

    • Initial Setup

    • Offices

    • Login & 2FA

    • SSO Login

    Add a New User

    Offices are managed separately under Organization > Offices. See Offices for information about creating and organizing office locations.

    Roles

    Observer Status

    View Existing Users

    Filter, Search, and Sort

    Manage an Existing User

    Deactivate a User

    User accounts are associated with activity performed throughout Monolith. When someone leaves your organization, deactivate their existing account rather than creating changes intended to remove their historical identity from prior casework.

    Related Documentation

    Encryption is managed by Monolith. A limited number of authorized Monolith personnel may require access to customer data for support and maintenance purposes.

    Monolith maintains internal Security Operations and Data Management policies that define our security and data handling standards in greater detail.

    Organizations that need supporting policy documentation for a security review, procurement process, or vendor assessment can contact support@monolithforensics.com.

    Monolith cloud infrastructure is hosted in Amazon Web Services (AWS).

    Monolith currently operates hosted cloud environments serving customers in:

    • United States / North America

    • United Kingdom / Europe

    • Australia

    • Canada

    Monolith also supports a United Kingdom / Blue Lights Digital partner environment.

    Our United States cloud environment is hosted in the AWS GovCloud East Region.

    AWS GovCloud has additional security and compliance controls designed for organizations with regulatory or sensitive workload requirements. More information about AWS GovCloud is available from AWS. AWS GovCloud Info

    For additional service URLs, regional endpoints, and network allowlisting information, see Monolith Endpoints.

    Monolith database data is backed up every 24 hours. We retain up to 30 days of database backups, allowing data to be recovered from previous backup points when necessary.

    We may also create manual database backups before major updates or maintenance activities that require database changes.

    Backups are stored in an encrypted format separately from the active database environment to support recovery in the event of an infrastructure or regional service disruption.

    File Object Storage Backups

    Files uploaded to Monolith object storage use object versioning.

    When a file is overwritten, a new object version can be created while previous versions are retained. This provides additional recovery options for files that are accidentally overwritten or deleted.

    Deleted file versions may be retained for up to 90 days.

    The following diagram provides a simplified view of the Monolith cloud environment and illustrates how major infrastructure components communicate and share data.

    The Monolith cloud infrastructure has network and system level scans that occur every 24 hours to test for network and system vulnerabilities.

    These scans are used to identify vulnerabilities, configuration issues, and other conditions that may fall outside our security baseline. Results can then be reviewed and remediated as appropriate.

    All of our endpoints, including employee systems, are monitored using Crowdstrike Falcon. This provides continuous 24/7 monitoring of our endpoints for threat detection and allows for immediate remediation.

    Monolith conducts annual penetration testing to identify common infrastructure vulnerabilities, configuration issues, and application vulnerabilities.

    Testing is performed by an independent third party in controlled Monolith environments to avoid unnecessary disruption to customer-facing production services and reduce the risk of exposure to customer data during testing.

    Customers may request information about our latest penetration test by contacting support@monolithforensics.com.

    Various system logs are managed using AWS logging services and Datadog.

    Supported logs are aggregated within Datadog, providing a centralized location for operational monitoring, investigation, and periodic review.

    Multi-Tenancy

    Encryption

    support@monolithforensics.com

    Security Operations Policy

    Cloud Hosting

    Data Backup

    Database Backups

    Basic Cloud Infrastructure

    Cloud Infrastructure

    Vulnerability Scans

    A/V - Malware Detection

    Penetration Testing

    Logging

  • Computer collection process

  • Windows USB activity analysis

  • App review checklist

  • eDiscovery review

  • Standard onboarding checklist

  • Internal lab process checklist

  • Task templates can help users avoid rebuilding the same task list each time a case or evidence workflow requires a repeatable process.

    Tasks can be managed from within a case or from the main Tasks area in Monolith.

    Depending on the workflow, tasks may be viewed as a board or list. The board view can be used like a Kanban board, allowing users to organize tasks by status such as backlog, pending, in progress, or completed.

    Tasks can also include additional details such as:

    • Task name

    • Task description

    • Status

    • Due date

    • Category

    • Assigned users

    • Related evidence

    • Subtasks

    • Task template selection

    Task templates can be selected when creating a new task.

    To use a task template:

    1. Open the relevant case or the main Tasks area.

    2. Click New Task.

    3. Open the Template menu.

    4. Select the task template you want to use.

    5. Review the task details and subtasks that are added from the template.

    6. Make any case-specific updates.

    7. Save the task.

    After the template is applied, the task can still be adjusted for the specific case, evidence item, or workflow.

    Task templates are created from existing tasks.

    To create a task template:

    1. Create a new task.

    2. Add the task name, description, subtasks, and any other reusable task details.

    3. Open the task.

    4. Select Save as Template.

    5. Name the template clearly.

    6. Save the template.

    After the task is saved as a template, it becomes available for future tasks.

    Task templates can be managed from Settings > Task Templates.

    Use this section to review the task templates available in your Monolith environment and manage templates your team no longer needs.

    A lab may create a task template called iPhone Collection Process.

    The template could include subtasks such as:

    When a similar iPhone collection process is needed in the future, a user can create a new task and apply the template instead of manually recreating each step.

    • Use clear template names that describe the workflow.

    • Add subtasks for steps that should be completed consistently.

    • Keep templates specific enough to be useful but flexible enough for real casework.

    • Review templates periodically to make sure they still match your team’s process.

    • Create separate templates for different workflows instead of one large generic checklist.

    • Use task templates to support consistency across users, cases, and evidence processes.

    • Tasks

    • Cases

    • Evidence Items

    • Editor Templates

    When to Use Task Templates

    - Confirm device identifiers
    - Photograph device condition
    - Document power state
    - Confirm passcode status
    - Record collection authority
    - Perform acquisition
    - Document acquisition tool and version
    - Review acquisition output
    - Add notes and supporting files
    - Mark collection process complete

    Tasks in Monolith

    Use a Task Template

    Create a Task Template

    Manage Task Templates

    Example Workflow

    Best Practices

    Related Pages

    Select Create Evidence Type.

  • Enter the name of the new Evidence Type.

  • Select Create Evidence Type to save it.

  • The new type becomes available when creating or updating Evidence Items throughout Monolith.

    Choose names that are clear, recognizable, and meaningful to the people entering and reviewing Evidence.

    Create Evidence Type

    Evidence Types should reflect the kinds of sources your organization commonly receives or examines.

    Examples might include:

    • Smartphone

    • Tablet

    • Desktop

    • Laptop

    • Hard Drive

    • Removable Media

    • Email Account

    • Cloud Account

    • Virtual Machine

    • Network or Cloud Service

    • Other organization-specific Evidence categories

    The appropriate list will vary by organization.

    A law enforcement lab may focus heavily on physical devices, while a corporate, legal, or incident response team may also work with email accounts, cloud environments, SaaS platforms, or other non-physical sources.

    Evidence Type is an important reporting and filtering field.

    For example, consistent Evidence Types can help answer questions such as:

    • How many mobile devices did we receive this year?

    • How many email or cloud accounts are currently being worked?

    • What types of Evidence make up most of our workload?

    • Which Evidence Types are associated with the largest amount of recorded data?

    Keeping Evidence Types clean and consistent makes organization-wide Evidence views and reporting more useful.

    See Evidence Items for more information about the global Evidence table and Evidence metadata.

    Evidence Types can be deleted when they are no longer needed.

    Delete Evidence Type

    If Evidence Items are currently associated with the Evidence Type being deleted, those items must be reassigned to another existing Evidence Type before deletion can be completed.

    • Create Evidence Types that represent meaningful categories of devices, accounts, or data sources.

    • Keep naming consistent across the organization.

    • Avoid duplicate or nearly identical types.

    • Use broad enough categories to support useful long-term reporting.

    • Add new Evidence Types when your organization begins handling a genuinely different class of Evidence.

    • Review unused or outdated Evidence Types periodically.

    • Consider how Evidence Types will appear in filters, exports, dashboards, and reports.

    • Evidence Items

    • Evidence Progress

    • Query Filter

    • Cases

    View Evidence Types

    Create an Evidence Type

    View Evidence Types

    Choosing Evidence Types

    Evidence Types and Reporting

    Delete an Evidence Type

    Review the Evidence Items associated with an Evidence Type before deleting it. Existing Evidence Items must be reassigned so their categorization is preserved.

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Waiting on Client

  • On Hold

  • Pending Review

  • Case Status is separate from Case Progress. Status describes the overall state of the Case, while Case Progress represents where the Case currently sits within your organization's workflow or pipeline.

    The Case Statuses settings page displays the statuses currently configured for your organization.

    Each status also shows the number of Cases currently associated with it.

    Use this list to review the options available when creating or updating Cases.

    View your Case Statuses

    Active and Closed are required Monolith Case Statuses and cannot be renamed or deleted.

    These statuses have special meaning within Monolith.

    • Active represents an open Case that is still available for ongoing work.

    • Closed represents a Case that has been formally closed.

    Additional custom Case Statuses can be used to describe operational states while the Case remains open.

    For example, a Case may be placed in Waiting on Client or Standby without formally closing the Case.

    See Cases for more information about Case Status and closing Cases.

    To create a new Case Status:

    1. Select Create Case Status.

    2. Enter the name of the new status.

    3. Select Create Case Status to save it.

    The new status becomes available for supported Case workflows throughout Monolith.

    Create statuses that communicate meaningful operational states without duplicating information already represented by Case Progress.

    Create new Case Status

    Case Status and Case Progress are independent ways to describe a Case.

    Case Status answers:

    What is the overall state of this Case?

    Examples might include:

    • Active

    • Waiting on Client

    • Standby

    • Closed

    Case Progress answers:

    Where is this Case within our workflow?

    A configurable Case Progress pipeline might include stages such as:

    • Pending

    • Processing

    • Preservation

    • Collection

    • Analysis

    • Reporting

    • Case Completed

    This distinction allows a Case to remain Active while moving through several Progress stages.

    See Case Progress for information about configuring your organization's Case workflow.

    Custom Case Statuses can be deleted when they are no longer needed.

    If Cases are currently associated with the status being deleted, those Cases must be reassigned to another existing Case Status before deletion can be completed.

    The required Active and Closed statuses cannot be deleted.

    • Keep Active and Closed as the primary indicators of whether a Case is open or formally closed.

    • Use additional statuses for meaningful operational states such as waiting, hold, or review.

    • Use Case Progress rather than creating many statuses to represent every step in your workflow.

    • Keep status names clear and consistent across the organization.

    • Avoid creating duplicate or overlapping statuses that make reporting difficult.

    • Review unused custom statuses periodically as your workflows change.

    • Cases

    • Case Progress

    • Case Types

    • Query Filter

    View Case Statuses

    Active and Closed Statuses

    Create a Case Status

    Case Status vs. Case Progress

    Delete a Case Status

    Review the Cases associated with a custom Case Status before deleting it. Existing Cases must be reassigned so their current state remains accurately represented.

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Forensic Analysis

  • Intake

  • Machine Time

  • On-site Work

  • Reporting

  • Team Meeting

  • Testimony

  • The Time Entry Categories settings page displays the categories currently configured for your organization.

    Each category also shows the number of Time Entries currently associated with it.

    Use this list to review the classifications available when users record time in Monolith.

    View Time Entry Categories

    To create a new category:

    1. Select Create Category.

    2. Enter the name of the new Time Entry Category.

    3. Select Create Category to save it.

    The category becomes available for supported time-entry workflows throughout Monolith.

    Choose category names that clearly represent meaningful types of work performed by your team.

    Create Time Entry Category

    Time can be recorded against work performed through the Monolith Tasks system.

    Users can quickly add time from a Task or use the detailed Time Entry view under Dashboard > Tasks to review, create, or modify Time Entries.

    Categories help preserve what type of work was performed in addition to who performed it and how much time was recorded.

    See Tasks for more information about Task management and time tracking.

    Consistent Time Entry Categories make it easier to understand how time is being spent across your organization.

    For example, categories can help distinguish time spent on:

    • Evidence intake

    • Collection and preservation

    • Analysis

    • Reporting

    • Meetings

    • Testimony

    • Administrative or other organization-specific activities

    Time-entry information can also be reviewed alongside users, Tasks, Cases, duration, and other supported fields.

    Keeping categories consistent makes this information more useful when reviewing workload or exporting time-entry data.

    Time Entry Categories can be deleted when they are no longer needed.

    If Time Entries are currently associated with the category being deleted, those entries must be reassigned to another existing Time Entry Category before deletion can be completed.

    Delete a Time Entry Category
    • Create categories that represent meaningful types of work performed by your organization.

    • Keep category names clear and consistent.

    • Avoid duplicate or nearly identical categories.

    • Use categories broadly enough to support useful reporting over time.

    • Consider how categories will appear when reviewing or exporting Time Entries.

    • Review unused categories periodically as your organization's workflows change.

    • Tasks

    • Dashboard

    • Cases

    • Tables

    View Time Entry Categories

    Create a Time Entry Category

    Time Entry Categories and Tasks

    Using Categories for Reporting

    Delete a Time Entry Category

    Review the Time Entries associated with a category before deleting it. Existing entries must be reassigned so their work classification is preserved.

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    For endpoint-specific documentation and examples, see the Monolith API documentation.

    API keys are used to authenticate requests made to the Monolith API.

    Select New API Key to create a key for an application, integration, script, or other approved workflow that needs programmatic access to Monolith.

    API keys can be managed and revoked from this page.

    Monolith API requests authenticate using the X-API-KEY request header.

    See Monolith API for available resources, endpoints, and request guidance.

    Webhooks allow Monolith to notify another system when supported activity occurs.

    Instead of an external application repeatedly checking Monolith for changes, a Webhook can send an HTTP request to a configured URL when a subscribed resource is created, updated, or deleted.

    This can support workflows such as:

    • Sending information to another business system

    • Triggering an automation when Monolith data changes

    • Updating an external reporting or case-management workflow

    • Sending supported events into an integration platform

    • Starting another process when work is created or completed in Monolith

    Select New Webhook to create a Webhook.

    Configure:

    • Webhook Name — a recognizable name for the integration

    • Webhook URL — the external endpoint that will receive Webhook requests

    • Webhook Description — optional context about the purpose of the Webhook

    • Webhook Events — the Monolith resources the Webhook should subscribe to

    After configuring the Webhook, select Create Webhook.

    Webhooks can subscribe to supported resource events in Monolith.

    Current resource options include:

    • Cases

    • Evidence

    • Storage

    • Acquisitions

    • Tasks

    • Time Entries

    When a create, update, or delete event occurs for a subscribed resource, Monolith sends a Webhook call to the configured URL.

    A Webhook can subscribe to more than one resource type when the receiving system needs to respond to several kinds of Monolith activity.

    The API and Webhooks support different integration patterns.

    Monolith API

    Use the API when an external application needs to request, create, or update supported information in Monolith.

    Webhooks

    Use Webhooks when another system needs to react when supported activity occurs in Monolith.

    Many integrations use both approaches: a Webhook can notify the external system that something changed, and the API can then be used to retrieve or work with additional information.

    Before creating an API key or Webhook, identify:

    • Which Monolith resources the integration needs

    • Whether the external system needs to read or write information

    • Which events should trigger activity

    • Where Webhook requests should be delivered

    • How credentials will be stored securely

    • How the receiving system will process Monolith data

    For advanced integrations or workflows that involve multiple systems, contact Monolith Support for additional guidance.

    • Monolith API

    • Cases API

    • Evidence API

    • Acquisitions API

    API Key Management

    Treat API keys as sensitive credentials. Do not share them publicly or include them directly in source code or other locations where they may be exposed.

    Webhooks

    Create a Webhook

    Webhook Events

    API vs. Webhooks

    Integration Planning

    Related Documentation

    , or IdP, is the system your organization uses to authenticate users and manage access to applications.

    Common identity providers include Microsoft Entra ID, Okta, and other SAML-compatible identity platforms.

    The Service Provider, or SP, is the application that relies on the Identity Provider for authentication.

    For this integration:

    • Your organization's identity platform is the Identity Provider

    • Monolith is the Service Provider

    When a user authenticates to Monolith through SSO, authentication requirements such as Multi-Factor Authentication are managed by the Identity Provider.

    Monolith's built-in 2FA workflow is therefore not used as part of an SSO-authenticated login.

    Your organization can apply its own MFA, conditional access, device, network, or other authentication policies through the Identity Provider.

    After successful SSO authentication, Monolith creates an application session for the authenticated user.

    The user can then work in Monolith normally until the session expires or the user signs out.

    SSO setup requires coordination between your organization's identity or IT administrator and Monolith Support.

    Monolith will provide the Service Provider information required to configure the SAML application in your Identity Provider.

    This generally includes values such as:

    • ACS URL / Reply URL: The Monolith endpoint where the Identity Provider sends the SAML authentication response

    • Service Provider Entity ID: The unique identifier representing Monolith in the SAML configuration

    These values are specific to your Monolith environment and should be provided by Monolith Support during setup.

    Your organization will provide the corresponding Identity Provider information needed by Monolith.

    This commonly includes:

    • Identity Provider Entity ID / Issuer

    • Single Sign-On URL

    • X.509 signing certificate

    • SAML metadata, when available

    After both sides are configured, Monolith Support will coordinate testing with your organization's IT team before SSO is used for normal access.

    Monolith must be able to identify the authenticated user from the SAML response.

    The user's email address is typically provided through the SAML NameID or an email-related SAML attribute.

    The value returned by the Identity Provider must correspond to the email address associated with the user's Monolith account.

    If your organization uses aliases or another identifier in its Identity Provider, additional attribute mapping may be required during configuration.

    SSO authenticates the user but does not replace the Monolith user record.

    Users must still have an active Monolith account with an email address that can be matched to the identity returned by the Identity Provider.

    User accounts and access are managed under Organization > Team Management.

    Organizations using Relay can also configure SSO for Relay users.

    Monolith and Relay are separate applications, so SSO configuration for the main Monolith application does not automatically configure SSO for Relay.

    If your organization wants to use SSO with both applications, coordinate both configurations with Monolith Support.

    See Relay Administration for additional information about Relay access and authentication.

    If a user cannot sign in through SSO, confirm that:

    • The user has an active Monolith account

    • The email or identifier returned by the Identity Provider matches the Monolith user

    • The correct Monolith environment is being used

    • The SAML application contains the correct ACS URL

    • The Service Provider Entity ID matches the value provided by Monolith

    • The user is permitted to access the Monolith application through the Identity Provider

    Authentication errors involving reply URLs, Entity IDs, certificates, or SAML attributes may require coordination between your IT administrator and Monolith Support.

    To configure or troubleshoot SSO for Monolith or Relay, contact support@monolithforensics.com.

    • Cloud Security

    • Security Overview

    • Login & 2FA

    • Team Management

    What Is Single Sign-On?

    SAML 2.0

    Identity Provider and Service Provider

    Identity Provider

    Service Provider

    Multi-Factor Authentication

    SSO Sessions

    SSO Setup and Configuration

    User Identification

    User Accounts

    Relay SSO

    Troubleshooting SSO

    Support

    Related Documentation

    Go to Settings.

  • Select System.

  • Scroll near the bottom of the page.

  • Download the appropriate Monolith Desktop installer for your device.

  • After installing Monolith Desktop and opening it for the first time, you will be prompted to select an API mode.

    This setup screen determines whether Monolith Desktop connects to a Monolith cloud tenant or an on-premises Monolith server.

    Monolith Desktop - API Mode Selection

    Customers using a Monolith-hosted cloud region or supported partner environment should keep the API mode set to Cloud.

    Cloud mode connects Monolith Desktop to a Monolith-hosted cloud tenant. When using cloud mode, select the region where your Monolith tenant is hosted.

    Monolith currently supports the following cloud regions:

    • United States / North America

    • Australia

    • Canada

    • United Kingdom / Blue Lights Digital

    • United Kingdom / Europe

    Select the cloud region or partner environment where your Monolith tenant is hosted.

    If you are not sure which region to select, use the same region you use when accessing Monolith from the web application, or contact your Monolith administrator.

    Note: Trial tenants are typically hosted in our US / North America region by default. However, trials can be requested in any supported Monolith region. Selecting the preferred region during the trial can help avoid a tenant migration later and may be preferred for data residency or organizational reasons.

    On-premises customers should change the API mode to On-Premises.

    This mode allows Monolith Desktop to connect to a Monolith server running within your organization’s own environment or network.

    After selecting On-Premises, enter your Monolith server’s API endpoint. This is typically the IP address of your Monolith server or a custom domain configured by your organization.

    The API endpoint should use one of the following formats:

    Examples:

    If Monolith Desktop can successfully reach the server, a green check mark will appear and the Monolith login screen will load.

    Monolith On-Premises Server Connection

    If the connection does not validate, confirm that the endpoint is correct, the server is reachable from your device, and your organization’s network or VPN settings allow access to the Monolith server.

    If you need to change the Monolith Desktop connection settings after initial setup, use the Reset Monolith option on the Monolith login screen.

    Monolith Login Page

    Resetting Monolith returns the desktop application to the API mode selection screen. From there, you can switch between cloud and on-premises mode, select a different cloud region, or enter a new on-premises API endpoint.

    This can be useful if:

    • You selected the wrong cloud region during setup

    • Your on-premises server address changed

    • You need to switch between cloud and on-premises environments

    • Monolith Support asks you to reset your connection settings during troubleshooting

    • Accessing Monolith

    • Login & 2FA

    • SSO Login

    • On-Premises Deployments

    Initial Installation

    on-premises
    Accessing Monolith
    https://{monolith-server-ip-address}/api
    https://{custom-monolith-domain}/api
    https://192.168.1.22/api
    https://monolith.myorg.com/api

    Cloud Customers

    Blue Lights Digital is a Monolith partner environment for supported customers in the United Kingdom. If your organization accesses Monolith through Blue Lights Digital, select that environment when connecting.

    On-Premises Customers

    Reset Monolith Connection Settings

    Related Documentation

    QR code scanning
  • USB connectivity

  • Wireless connectivity

  • Windows

  • macOS

  • This makes it a flexible option for desktop workstations, laptops, and physical Audit workflows where users may need to move around the lab.

    When a supported barcode or QR code is scanned, Monolith can use the encoded identifier to locate the corresponding record.

    A common workflow is:

    Scanning can reduce manual searching when working with larger Evidence or Storage inventories.

    Scanners are particularly useful during Audits.

    As your team works through a physical inventory, scanning the Monolith label can help identify the corresponding item and support the verification workflow.

    See Using a Scanner for detailed Audit scanning guidance.

    Most standard scanners do not require special configuration within Monolith.

    Before using a scanner for a large workflow:

    1. Connect the scanner to the computer.

    2. Confirm the operating system recognizes the device.

    3. Open Monolith.

    4. Scan a known Monolith barcode or QR code.

    5. Confirm that the expected record can be located.

    Testing the scanner before beginning an Audit can help identify connectivity or configuration issues in advance.

    The barcode or QR code printed on a Monolith label must contain the appropriate Monolith identifier for the scanning workflow to work correctly.

    See Item Labels for information about creating label templates and using supported QR code and barcode variables.

    • Hardware Integrations

    • Using a Scanner

    • Audits

    • Item Labels

    Recommended Scanner

    Tera Pro 8100 Wireless Barcode Scanner

    Tera Pro 8100 Wireless Barcode Scanner
    Print a Monolith label
        ↓
    Attach it to the physical item
        ↓
    Scan the barcode or QR code
        ↓
    Monolith locates the matching record

    Using Scanners With Monolith

    Scanners and Audits

    Scanner Setup

    Labels and Scanning

    Related Documentation

    Video Walkthrough

    Adding a Filter

    Filter Persistence

    Clearing Filters

    AND/OR Logic on the Evidence Table

    The selected AND/OR logic is persistent along with the filter conditions, so remember to clear or change it when you are finished with that view.

    Related Documentation

    Monolith UI Features
    Tables
    Global Search
    An image showing the Add Filter dropdown with a searchable filter dimension and scrollable list of filter options.
    Gif showing the user clearing 3 filter sets to return to the default table view
    Screenshot showing the AND/OR filter dropdown
    An example OR filter showing a filter for case name is Smith Fraud Case OR case name is Smith Agency

    Column Reordering

    Column Hiding and Showing

    Searching

    Exporting

    Related Documentation

    Global Search
    Monolith UI Features
    Query Filter
    Global Search
    A gif showing how to click and drag to resize a column
    Dragging and dropping a column to place it in a different location on the table.
    A gif showing how to show and hide columns by selecting them from a checkbox menu.
    Typing a word into the table search bar to see returned results
    Icons at the top of a Monolith table, with the Export Icon highlighted
    A gif showing how to click a column order to sort ascending, descending, and clear the sort

    Auditing Items

    Verify Evidence and Storage Items during an Audit, record passed or failed results, and review the resulting Audit history.

    The Auditing Items workflow is where your team verifies the physical items included in an Audit.

    Items begin in a Pending state. As each item is reviewed, mark it as Passed or Failed based on whether its physical location and recorded information match what you expect.

    Use the status views at the top of the Audit to move between:

    • All

    • Pending

    • Passed

    • Failed

    The counts displayed with each view update as the Audit progresses.

    Auditing an item generally involves verifying:

    1. The item's physical location

    2. The item's recorded details, when applicable

    Open or review the item card in the Audit and compare the information shown in Monolith with the physical item in your possession.

    Each Audit item displays its recorded location information.

    For example, an Evidence Item might show a Location Path such as:

    Calgary / Evidence Room / AAA

    This indicates that Monolith expects the item to be located:

    • In the Calgary Office

    • Within the Evidence Room Location Group

    • At the AAA Location

    Locate the physical item and confirm that its actual location matches the location recorded in Monolith.

    See for information about how Offices, Location Groups, and individual Locations are used to track Evidence and Storage Items.

    An Audit can also be used to confirm information about the item itself.

    Review the available Evidence or Storage Item information and compare it with the physical item or your organization's records.

    This can help identify inaccurate or outdated information that should be corrected in Monolith.

    If the item's location or other reviewed information does not match the expected record, change the item's Audit status to Failed.

    When marking an item as Failed, enter a note describing the issue.

    For example:

    • Item is not in the recorded location

    • Item label does not match the Monolith record

    • Recorded item details need to be corrected

    • Additional investigation is required before the item can be verified

    After the status is updated, the item moves to the Failed view.

    The underlying Evidence or Storage Item can then be reviewed and corrected as needed.

    If the item's location and reviewed information are correct, change the Audit status to Passed.

    Enter a note when additional context about the verification is useful.

    An item that previously failed can also be marked as Passed after the underlying issue has been corrected and the item has been verified again.

    After the status is updated, the item moves to the Passed view.

    Monolith records how an item was verified during the Audit.

    Common Audit methods include:

    • Manual: The auditor reviewed the item and updated its status directly in Monolith.

    • Scanned: The item was located and verified using a supported barcode or QR code scanning workflow.

    When you manually change an item's status to Passed or Failed, the Audit method is recorded as Manual.

    See for information about scanning items during an Audit.

    Each time an Audit item's status is updated, Monolith records the activity in the Audit Logs.

    Audit Log entries can include:

    • Timestamp

    • Audit Item

    • User

    • Audit Status

    These logs provide a historical record of the Audit process and can help explain why an item failed, what was corrected, and when it was later verified.

    Audit history associated with a specific Evidence Item can also be viewed from that item's Audit Logs area.

    A typical item verification process is:

    1. Start with the Pending items.

    2. Locate the physical item.

    3. Compare its location and applicable details with the Monolith record.

    4. Mark the item Passed if the information is correct.

    Settings

    Configure organization-wide Monolith behavior, workflows, templates, evidence and case options, quality assurance, integrations, and administrative settings.

    The Settings section contains organization-wide configuration options used to tailor Monolith to your team's workflow.

    Most settings are intended for administrators configuring how Cases, Evidence, users, reporting, quality assurance, and other Monolith features behave across the organization.

    General Settings

    Use these settings for account, organization, and user-facing configuration.

    • System: Review subscription information, download Monolith Desktop, and configure date, time, and currency formats.

    • Email Notifications: Manage your personal Monolith email notification preferences.

    • : Maintain your organization's name, address, logo, and other organization-level information.

    Use these settings to define how Cases and Evidence are classified, numbered, and tracked.

    • : Configure automatic numbering formats for Cases, Evidence Items, and Storage Items.

    • : Define the categories of casework performed by your organization.

    • : Configure Case Status options in addition to Monolith's core Active and Closed statuses.

    Use templates to reduce repetitive work and standardize common processes.

    • : Create reusable content for Case and Evidence Notes.

    • : Build repeatable Tasks and subtasks for common workflows.

    • : Configure label templates used for Evidence, Storage Items, and other supported records.

    • :

    Templates can help teams standardize recurring workflows without requiring users to recreate the same information each time.

    Use these settings to support consistent work tracking and review processes.

    • : Define categories used when recording time in Monolith.

    • : Create reusable checklist items for Quality Assurance reviews.

    • : Define the types of issues that can be recorded during QA workflows.

    Relay is Monolith's request portal for collecting structured forensic requests from people outside the primary Monolith user base.

    Relay-specific settings in Monolith control areas such as tenant information, request instructions, user management, and which Custom Fields are exposed to requestors.

    For complete Relay setup and administration guidance, see .

    See for information about enabling Inquiry and Evidence Custom Fields in Relay and mapping Inquiry fields to Case fields.

    Use these areas when Monolith needs to connect with other systems or workflows.

    • : Configure supported Monolith integrations.

    • API: Manage API access for supported Monolith resources.

    For developer documentation and available endpoints, see .

    Webhook documentation is maintained separately as Monolith's event-driven integration capabilities are documented.

    • : Review supported administrative activity recorded within Monolith.

    • Release Notes: Review product updates and changes when available.

    For a new Monolith environment, you do not need to configure every setting before beginning work.

    Start with the settings most relevant to your organization's workflow, such as:

    1. Organization information

    2. Users and Offices

    3. Item Number Formats

    4. Case Types and Case Progress

    See for the recommended implementation checklist.

    Offices

    Offices represent the physical facilities, laboratories, branches, or other operating locations used by your organization.

    Each Office provides organizational context for your team and serves as the top level of the location structure used by Item Locations.

    For organizations operating from multiple facilities, Offices allow each location to maintain its own users and physical location structure while remaining part of the same Monolith environment.

    View Offices

    Navigate to Organization > Offices to view the Offices configured for your organization.

    Each Office displays information such as:

    • Office name

    • City or location

    • Assigned manager

    • Number of users assigned to the Office

    Select an Office to review or manage its details.

    To create a new Office:

    1. Navigate to Organization > Offices.

    2. Select New Office.

    3. Enter the Office Name.

    4. Optionally select a Manager.

    Available Office information includes:

    • Office Name

    • Manager

    • Address

    • City

    Not every field is required. Configure the information that is useful for your organization.

    Users are assigned to an Office through Organization > Team Management.

    When creating or editing a Monolith user, select the Office that person belongs to.

    Office assignments help organize your team and also connect users to the location structure for that Office.

    See for information about creating users and assigning Offices.

    An Office is the starting point for physical locations in Monolith.

    Navigate to Evidence Management > Item Locations and select an Office to view the locations configured for that facility.

    The general structure is:

    For example:

    This allows organizations to model their real-world evidence handling and storage environment inside Monolith.

    Users assigned to an Office are available within that Office's location structure.

    In the Exam Table group, Monolith displays users associated with the selected Office. This allows evidence or storage items to be associated with a person when that reflects the item's current physical custody or working location.

    For example, an item may move from an evidence room to an examiner while work is being performed, then return to an evidence or storage location afterward.

    In addition to user locations, each Office can contain customizable location groups.

    Location groups can represent the physical areas your organization uses to handle evidence and storage items, such as an evidence room, evidence cage, shelving area, locker area, laboratory workspace, or another internal location structure.

    Within each group, create the locations needed to reflect how items are physically organized.

    The goal is not to reproduce every detail of your building. Create enough structure for users to accurately identify where an item is located and support your organization's custody and storage workflow.

    Organizations with more than one laboratory or physical facility can create a separate Office for each location.

    Each Office can have:

    • Its own assigned users

    • Its own manager

    • Its own contact and address information

    • Its own Item Locations structure

    For example, an organization with laboratories in Calgary and Vancouver can configure each as a separate Office and build the appropriate evidence rooms, shelves, lockers, and working locations for each facility.

    This keeps physical location information aligned with the facility where the work is actually taking place.

    Create Offices before configuring the related users and Item Locations for a new Monolith environment.

    A typical setup sequence is:

    1. Create each Office used by your organization.

    2. Add users through Team Management and assign them to the appropriate Office.

    3. Open Item Locations and select the Office.

    4. Create location groups that reflect the major physical areas used by that facility.

    • Item Locations

    Item Locations

    Track where evidence and storage items are physically located and use locations throughout intake and chain of custody workflows.

    Item Locations allows you to keep track of where you are physically storing items in your lab and keep that record associated with your evidence and storage items in Monolith. When you assign a location to an evidence or storage item, Monolith tracks where that item sits and updates it automatically as the item moves through the chain of custody process.

    Offices and Item Locations

    Item Locations are organized by Office.

    Each Office can maintain its own Team location, Location Groups, and individual locations to reflect how evidence and storage items are handled at that facility.

    If your organization has multiple offices, use the Office selector at the top of Item Locations to switch between their location structures.

    See Offices for information about creating and managing Offices in Monolith.

    View your item locations

    1. In the left-hand navigation, open Evidence Management.

    2. Click Item Locations.

    This page shows the locations configured for the selected Office. If your organization has multiple Offices, use the Office selector at the top of the page to switch between their location structures.

    Item Locations uses a simple hierarchy so you can recreate your physical storage in Monolith and get a digital picture of where everything is:

    • Item Locations is the overall section.

    • A Group represents a physical storage area, such as a long-term storage room or evidence locker.

    • Inside a group, each individual location appears as a tile. Tiles map to the rows, shelves, bins, or however else you organize that space in reality.

    You can view your item locations in two ways, using the view toggle near the top of the page:

    • Tiles is the default view. It shows each group with its locations laid out as tiles, giving you a visual picture of your storage.

    • Grid shows the same locations in a table, with columns for type, office, and the number of evidence and storage items in each. This is useful for scanning details across all of your locations at once.

    Alongside any Location Groups you create, each Office has a Team location that Monolith creates automatically.

    The Team location is populated with users assigned to that Office through Organization > Team Management.

    You cannot create a Team location using Create Group, but you can rename the existing Team location.

    You can assign evidence and storage items to a user within the Team location. When you do, the Current Location shows that user's name, and the Location Path identifies the Office, Team location, and user.

    In Grid view, the Type column identifies whether a location belongs to a Group or the Team location.

    See Team Management for information about assigning users to Offices.

    Click any tile to open it. Monolith shows a list of everything currently stored there, including both evidence items and storage items. Use the back navigation to return to the locations view.

    You assign a location as part of the intake process when creating an evidence item.

    1. Open the New Evidence Item window.

    2. In the Intake Details section, find the Received By box.

    3. Choose the location you want to assign from your set-up item locations.

    4. Complete the rest of the intake details and save the item.

    Once intake is complete, scroll down to the Evidence Overview. You will see the Current Location (for example, a specific shelf) along with the full Location Path.

    If you open an evidence item and no location appears in the evidence details, intake has not been started for that item yet. You can assign a location by entering intake details directly from the item.

    1. Open the evidence item and go to its Chain of Custody actions.

    2. Click the COC Actions dropdown and select Enter Intake Details.

    3. In the window that opens, choose a location from the dropdown in the Received By box, the same way you would for a new item.

    Storage items work the same way as evidence items.

    1. Open the Storage Items tab and create a New Storage Item.

    2. Assign one of your item locations.

    3. Click Create Storage.

    To confirm the assignment, view the storage item. In the box on the left-hand side you will see the Current Location and the Location Path, just as you do for evidence items.

    The Location Path gives you the full context for where an item lives. When you have multiple item locations within an office, the path shows:

    • the office

    • the group

    • the specific tile (for example, the shelf) where the item is stored

    Any time an item moves through the chain of custody process, Monolith updates the Current Location and Location Path to reflect where that item currently sits. This applies to both evidence items and storage items. Because locations are used throughout intake and chain of custody workflows, configuring them before active evidence intake helps keep physical location information consistent.

    Custom Fields

    Create and manage organization-specific fields for Cases, Evidence Items, Acquisitions, Inquiries, Storage Items, Clients, and Contacts.

    Custom Fields allow your organization to capture structured information that is specific to your workflows but is not part of Monolith's standard fields.

    Custom Fields can be created for:

    • Cases

    • Evidence Items

    • Inquiries

    • Acquisitions

    • Storage Items

    • People

    Custom People Fields apply to both Clients and Contacts.

    For example, an organization might use Custom Fields to capture legal authority, internal department, examination type, handling requirements, matter classifications, employee identifiers, agency information, or other information relevant to its work.

    The Custom Fields settings page allows administrators to create, edit, enable, disable, reorder, and delete Custom Fields for each supported record type.

    Custom Fields appear in the applicable Create and Edit forms throughout Monolith.

    The available sections include:

    • Custom Case Fields

    • Custom Evidence Fields

    • Custom Inquiry Fields

    • Custom Acquisition Fields

    Open the section for the record type where you want the field to appear, such as Custom Case Fields, Custom Evidence Fields, or Custom People Fields.

    When creating a Custom Field, configure the following options:

    1. Field Name — the name displayed to users in Monolith.

    2. Is Required — determines whether users must provide a value when creating or editing the applicable record.

    3. Editor Type — determines how users enter the value.

    4. Description — provides placeholder or guidance text within the field.

    Available Editor Types include:

    • Textbox — standard text entry

    • Date — date selector

    • Drop Down Menu — select one value from a predefined list

    • Tag Box — select multiple values from a predefined list

    Choose the Editor Type based on how you want users to enter and standardize the information.

    For information that will frequently be filtered or reported on, predefined selections such as Drop Down Menu or Tag Box can help keep values consistent.

    Custom People Fields allow your organization to capture additional structured information about Clients and Contacts.

    A Custom People Field is shared across both record types, meaning the same field can appear when working with either a Client or a Contact.

    These fields can be useful for information such as:

    • Internal or external identifiers

    • Department or business unit

    • Agency information

    • Employee or custodian information

    Use Custom People Fields when the information applies to people records generally rather than to a specific Case, Evidence Item, or Acquisition.

    See and for more information about how people records are used throughout Monolith.

    Existing Custom Fields can be managed from their applicable section.

    Enable or disable a field to control whether it appears in Create and Edit forms.

    Disabling a Custom Field does not remove previously stored values from records that already contain data for that field.

    Use Edit to update supported Custom Field settings such as the name, description, required setting, or available selection options.

    The Editor Type cannot be changed after creation.

    Deleting a Custom Field removes the field and its associated values from your Monolith tenant.

    Review existing use of the field before deleting it.

    Custom Fields can be reordered within each record category by dragging and dropping them into the preferred position.

    The configured order determines how the fields are presented to users within applicable Monolith forms.

    Arrange commonly used or important fields near the top so they are easier to find during data entry.

    Organizations using Relay can expose supported Inquiry and Evidence Custom Fields to requestors.

    Inquiry Custom Fields can also be mapped to corresponding Case Custom Fields so selected information can carry forward when an Inquiry is used to create a new Case.

    Relay visibility and field mapping are configured under Settings > Relay Settings > Custom Field Options.

    See for complete Relay configuration guidance.

    Supported Custom Field values can also be used in Monolith label templates where applicable.

    See for supported Custom Field label variables and syntax.

    • Use Custom Fields for information that is meaningful to your organization's workflow.

    • Choose the Custom Field category that matches where the information belongs.

    • Use Custom People Fields for information that should be available on both Clients and Contacts.

    • Prefer structured selection fields when consistent values will improve filtering or reporting.

    User Management

    Invite, approve, and manage Relay users and control who can administer your organization's request portal.

    Use User Management to control who can access your organization's Relay tenant and which users have Relay administrative privileges.

    Relay users are separate from Monolith users and do not consume Monolith licenses. This allows a forensic team with a relatively small number of Monolith users to support a much larger population of investigators, attorneys, employees, partners, or other requestors through Relay.

    In Monolith, navigate to:

    Settings > Relay Settings > User Management

    From here, administrators can:

    • Invite new Relay users

    Time Entry Categories
    Tasks
    Integrations
    Relay Administration
    Printer Recommendations
    : Build the workflow stages used to track Cases through your organization's process.
  • Evidence Types: Define the types of devices, accounts, media, and other Evidence Items your team handles.

  • Evidence Progress: Build the workflow stages used to track individual Evidence Items.

  • Custom Fields: Add organization-specific structured fields to Cases, Evidence, Inquiries, Acquisitions, and other supported records.

  • Manage Microsoft Word templates used for Custom Report Templates.
    Evidence Types and Evidence Progress
  • Item Locations

  • Labels, Templates, QA, Relay, and integrations as needed

  • Relay Administration

  • Monolith API

  • Cases and Evidence

    Templates and Standardization

    Time Tracking and Quality Assurance

    Relay

    Integrations and API

    Administrative Tools

    Recommended Starting Point

    Related Documentation

    Organization Info
    Item Number Formats
    Case Types
    Case Statuses
    Case Progress
    Editor Templates
    Task Templates
    Item Labels
    Document Templates
    Time Entry Categories
    QA Checklist Items
    QA Issue Types
    Relay Administration
    Custom Field Options
    Integrations
    Monolith API
    Admin Log
    Initial Setup
    Initial Setup
    Organization
    Evidence Management
    Case Management

    Custom Storage Fields

  • Custom People Fields

  • Matter-specific classifications
  • Organization-specific contact details

  • Other information your team consistently tracks about people

  • Use clear field names and descriptions so users understand what information should be entered.

  • Avoid creating duplicate fields that capture the same information in slightly different ways.

  • Consider whether a field should be required before making it mandatory for every applicable record.

  • Disable fields when they are no longer needed but historical values should be preserved.

  • Delete fields only when the field and its stored values are no longer required.

  • Order fields according to how frequently or early they are used in the workflow.

  • Clients

  • Contacts

  • Custom Field Options

  • Item Labels

  • Custom Field Settings

    Add a Custom Field

    A Custom Field's Editor Type cannot be changed after the field is created. The field can still be enabled, disabled, reordered, edited, or deleted.

    Editor Types

    Custom People Fields

    Manage Custom Fields

    Enable or Disable

    For example, if an Evidence Custom Field called Agency ID is disabled, Evidence Items that already contain an Agency ID value will continue to retain that information. To permanently remove the Custom Field and its stored values, the field must be deleted.

    Edit

    Delete

    Deleting a Custom Field is different from disabling it. Disable a field when you want to stop using it while preserving previously recorded values.

    Reorder Custom Fields

    Custom Fields and Relay

    Custom Fields and Item Labels

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Clients
    Contacts
    Custom Field Options
    Item Labels
    Cases
    Inquiries
    Evidence Items
    Storage Items
    Notes entered during verification

    Mark the item Failed and document the issue if something does not match.

  • Correct the underlying Evidence or Storage record when needed.

  • Reverify failed items after corrections are made.

  • Review the remaining Pending and Failed items before completing the Audit.

  • Using a Scanner

  • Item Locations

  • Evidence Items

  • Storage Items

  • How to Audit an Item

    Verify the Item Location

    Verify the Item Details

    Audit Procedure

    Fail an Audit Item

    Pass an Audit Item

    Audit Methods

    Audit Logs

    Recommended Audit Workflow

    Related Documentation

    Item Locations
    Using a Scanner
    Audits
    Creating Audits
    Viewing and Accessing Audits
    Audit Features & Layout
    Pending Items Audit Tab
    Audit Item
    Failing an audit item
    Passing an audit item
    Audit Logs
    Item Labels

    Enter the Office address and other contact information as needed.

  • Select Create Office.

  • State/Province
  • Postal Code

  • Phone

  • Add the individual locations needed for evidence and storage movement.

  • Test the structure with a small number of items before using it for active casework.

  • Create an Office

    Assign Users to an Office

    Offices and Item Locations

    User Locations

    Custom Location Groups

    Multi-Office Organizations

    Recommended Setup

    Related Documentation

    Team Management
    Team Management
    Initial Setup
    Storage Items
    Office
    └── Location Group
        └── Location
    Calgary
    ├── Exam Table
    │   ├── User A
    │   ├── User B
    │   └── User C
    ├── Evidence Room
    │   ├── Shelf A
    │   ├── Shelf B
    │   └── Shelf C
    └── Evidence Cage
        ├── Locker 1
        └── Locker 2

    Audits

    How locations are organized

    For details on creating and managing groups, see the Item Location Groups documentation.

    Switching views

    Team locations

    See what is stored in a location

    Assign a location to a new evidence item

    Add a location to an existing item

    Assign a location to a storage item

    Location Path and chain of custody

    Related Documentation

    Offices
    Team Management
    Location Groups
    Storage Items

    Review users requesting access

  • Approve or deny tenant access

  • Manage existing Relay users

  • Control Relay administrative privileges

  • There are two primary ways to add users to your Relay tenant.

    1. Register through your organization's Relay URL

    2. Receive a direct invitation from your team

    Each Relay tenant has its own URL.

    Organizations can distribute this URL to people who need to submit requests. A user who visits the tenant URL can create a Relay account and request access.

    Creating an account does not automatically grant access to the tenant.

    The user's request must first be approved through User Management in Monolith.

    Administrators can invite users directly from Settings > Relay Settings > User Management.

    This is useful when you already know which investigators, employees, attorneys, partner agencies, or other requestors should have access to your Relay tenant.

    To invite a user:

    1. Select Invite User.

    2. Enter the user's email address.

    3. Select Invite.

    4. Relay sends an invitation to the provided email address.

    The invitation identifies the Relay tenant the user has been invited to and provides an Accept Invite option for completing account setup.

    Invite a Relay User

    Relay Invitation Email

    After selecting Accept Invite, the user is directed to Relay to complete their account setup.

    If the person does not already have a Relay account, they will be prompted to register and create one.

    Once account setup is complete, the user can sign in to Relay and access the tenant they were invited to.

    If the user already has a Relay account, the new tenant can be added to their existing account rather than requiring a separate Relay identity.

    This is especially useful for requestors who work with multiple forensic organizations. For example, a detective may use one Relay account to submit requests to several different labs, with each lab appearing as a separate Forensic Partner in Relay.

    Account signup screen for Relay users

    Users who register through your tenant URL remain pending until your organization approves their access.

    Review pending users before granting access to confirm that they are an appropriate requestor for your organization.

    Once approved, the user can access your Relay tenant and begin using the request portal.

    If a registration request should not be granted access, it can be denied instead.

    Relay User Management

    Relay users do not require a Monolith license.

    This allows organizations to provide structured request intake to a much larger group of people without providing each requestor access to the primary Monolith application.

    For example, a forensic lab may have a small team of examiners working in Monolith while allowing hundreds of investigators or other requestors to submit work through Relay.

    Relay access is independent of Monolith licensing. An organization may have a small number of licensed Monolith users while supporting a much larger community of Relay requestors.

    A Relay user can have access to more than one organization's Relay tenant.

    For example, a detective may submit forensic requests to several different labs that use Relay. That detective can use the same Relay account to access each Relay tenant that has granted them permission.

    Within Relay, each organization appears as a separate Forensic Partner.

    Requests and case information remain associated with the appropriate organization.

    Most Relay users are requestors.

    They use Relay to:

    • Submit forensic requests

    • Review their requests

    • Track request status

    • Review available case and evidence progress

    • Communicate through request Comments

    • Access files shared through Case Drives

    Some members of the forensic team may also need Relay Admin access.

    Relay Admin access is particularly useful for Monolith users responsible for reviewing and managing incoming Relay requests.

    A Relay Admin may need to:

    • Access All Requests

    • Open requests directly in Relay

    • Review requests from the Relay side

    • Communicate with requestors through Comments

    • Use @mentions within request conversations

    • Help manage the Relay request workflow

    Monolith and Relay currently use separate user accounts.

    A Monolith account does not automatically provide access to Relay.

    For teams actively using Relay, the Monolith users responsible for request intake and triage should also have Relay accounts with the appropriate permissions when they need to work directly inside Relay.

    A common workflow may look like:

    1. A requestor submits a request through Relay.

    2. The request appears under Case Management > Inquiries in Monolith.

    3. A Monolith user reviews the submitted request and updates its Inquiry status.

    4. If direct communication is needed, the Monolith user opens the corresponding request in Relay using their Relay account.

    5. The forensic team and requestor communicate through Relay Comments.

    6. When the request is ready for active casework, the Monolith user creates a new case or merges the Inquiry into an existing case.

    Relay uses an authentication system separate from Monolith.

    By default, Relay users sign in using their Relay account credentials.

    Single Sign-On (SSO) can also be configured for Relay.

    Relay SSO is configured separately from Monolith SSO, even when an organization uses the same identity provider for both applications.

    See Single Sign-On (SSO) for additional information.

    • Review self-registration requests before approving tenant access.

    • Use direct invitations when you already know which users should have access.

    • Provide Relay Admin access to the forensic team members who need to work directly inside Relay.

    • Make sure Monolith users responsible for Relay communication also have appropriate Relay accounts.

    • Use your Relay tenant as a common intake point for the people who regularly submit work to your team.

    • Remember that requestors do not need Monolith licenses to use Relay.

    • Test the experience using both a standard requestor account and a Relay Admin account when initially configuring your tenant.

    • Relay Overview

    • Using Relay

    • Managing Relay Requests in Monolith

    • Relay Administration

    Access User Management

    How Users Get Access to Relay

    Self-Registration

    Your Relay tenant URL can be distributed broadly without automatically granting access to everyone who receives it. New users must still be approved before they can access the tenant.

    Direct Invitation

    User Account Setup

    Approve Relay Users

    Self-registration creates the Relay account and requests access to your tenant. Approval determines whether that account can actually use your organization's Relay portal.

    Relay Users and Monolith Licenses

    Users Can Belong to Multiple Relay Tenants

    Standard Relay Users and Relay Admins

    Monolith Users Who Also Work in Relay

    Inquiry review, status management, and case conversion occur in Monolith. Request-specific Comments and @mentions remain in Relay.

    A Monolith user who needs to participate in Relay messaging should also have a Relay account with the appropriate permissions.

    Relay Authentication

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Query Filter

    Monolith Case Reports

    Create standard case reports by selecting Monolith case data and report sections, then export the result as an editable Microsoft Word document.

    Monolith Case Reports allow users to generate case reports directly from the case interface.

    This is the recommended reporting option for most users because it provides a point-and-click workflow without requiring custom template syntax. Select the sections and records you want to include, generate the report, then export it as a Microsoft Word document for review, quality control, final edits, and distribution.

    Use Monolith Case Reports when you want to:

    • Generate a report from information already captured in Monolith

    • Choose which Case sections should be included

    Clients

    Manage requestors, associate clients with cases, and maintain a reusable client directory across Monolith.

    Clients represent the requestors associated with work performed in Monolith.

    A client can be selected or created during case creation, added or changed later by editing the case, or carried into a case from a Relay request. Monolith maintains these client records in People > Clients, where your team can search, review, import, and reuse clients across future cases.

    This allows the relationship between the requestor and the work performed for them to remain part of the case record over time.

    Selecting a client is part of the normal case creation workflow in Monolith.

    When creating a case, the Client field allows you to:

    • Search for and select an existing client

    Contacts

    Track people related to your case and associate them with cases, evidence items, acquisitions, and other forensic work.

    Contacts represent people who are related to your forensic work but are not necessarily the client or requestor for the case.

    Contacts can be added as you work through a case and associated with the records where that relationship matters. This makes it easier to preserve who a device, account, acquisition, or other piece of case information belongs to or is associated with.

    Common contacts may include:

    • Custodians

    • Suspects

    .env

    This is an environment variables file that is loaded into the Monolith Docker deployment at build/run time. These values determine various setup options and licensing information for your Monolith deployment.

    The values are typically set for you when you purchase Monolith.

    This is a license key that allows for your Monolith deployment to get licensing information from our online license server. Using this value ensures that your Monolith deployment always has up to date license info.

    This key will be provided to you upon purchase.

    This is a signed token that contains licensing information for your Monolith purchase. This can be used to utilize cached license info without needed to query our licensing server for license info.

    This is a good option for Monolith deployments that exist in air-gapped environments.

    If this value is provided, Monolith will use this instead of the license key value.

    This should be a long alphanumeric string. This value is used for various cryptographic operations related to access tokens, encryption, and session management.

    If the video does not render, .
    watch the Global Search walkthrough on YouTube
    If the video does not render, watch the Tables walkthrough on YouTube.
    Custom Field Options
    Single Sign-On (SSO)

    This should be a long alphanumeric string. This value is used for various cryptographic operations related to access tokens, encryption, and session management.

    This is the name of the MySQL schema that the Monolith API server should connect to.

    This is the domain or IP address of the MySQL database host that the Monolith API server should connect to.

    This is the MySQL user name that should be used for database connections.

    The port that should be used for database connections. The default MySQL port is 3306.

    MySQL password used to establish database connections.

    First name of initial Monolith user. Only required for first time setup/deployment.

    Last name of initial Monolith user. Only required for first time setup/deployment.

    Email of initial Monolith user. Only required for first time setup/deployment.

    Password of initial Monolith user - this will be used for firs time login to Monolith. Only required for first time setup/deployment.

    Initial tenant name for your Relay deployment. Only required for first time setup/deployment.

    Organization name for your Relay deployment. Only required for first time setup/deployment.

    URL slug for your Relay deployment. Only required for first time setup/deployment.

    Initial tenant email for your Relay deployment. Only required for first time setup/deployment.

    The Monolith API server runs in "cluster" mode. This allows multiple instances to run at the same time, which increases scalability. This value defaults to 1 and is disabled by default. You will likely not need to use this value, but contact support if you think this is needed.

    This value determines whether Monolith will use a local file system or Amazon S3 to store Monolith files. Allowed values are "S3" or "Local". The default value is "Local". If you set this to "S3", you will also need to set the S3 access key values.

    This value configures Monolith to use the correct AWS region with your S3 bucket.

    The S3 bucket where you would like to store files uploaded to Relay.

    The S3 bucket where you would like to store files uploaded to Monolith.

    AWS access key to use S3 APIs for file storage.

    AWS secret key to use S3 APIs for file storage.

    Email host domain to enable email capabilities in Monolith.

    Email port to enable email capabilities in Monolith. This value is typically 587.

    User value to enable email capabilities in Monolith. May not be required if you are using an SMTP relay.

    User password to enable email capabilities in Monolith. May not be required if using an SMTP relay.

    Example

    Make sure the file name is changed to ".env" from "env.txt".

    Values

    MONOLITH_LICENSE_KEY

    MONOLITH_LICENSE_TOKEN

    ACCESS_TOKEN_SECRET

    REFRESH_TOKEN_SECRET

    MONOLITH_DB_NAME

    MONOLITH_DB_HOST

    MONOLITH_DB_USER

    NOTE: This should only be root if you are using the default MySQL container. If using an external MySQL database, you should provision a user account other than root to use here.

    MONOLITH_DB_PORT

    MONOLITH_DB_PASSWORD

    MONOLITH_ADMIN_FIRST_NAME

    MONOLITH_ADMIN_LAST_NAME

    MONOLITH_ADMIN_EMAIL

    MONOLITH_ADMIN_PASSWORD

    FORM_TENANT_NAME

    FORM_ORG_NAME

    FORM_TENANT_SLUG

    FORM_TENANT_EMAIL

    API_INSTANCE_COUNT

    FILE_SERVICE

    AWS_ENDPOINT

    MONOLITH_FORMS_BUCKET

    MONOLITH_CLOUD_BUCKET

    S3_ACCESS_KEY

    S3_SECRET_KEY

    SMTP_HOST

    SMTP_PORT

    SMTP_USER

    SMTP_PASSWORD

    ### Application Settings ###
    
    ### Mandatory Options ###
    
    ### Monolith License key
    # Used to activate license
    
    MONOLITH_LICENSE_KEY=
    MONOLITH_LICENSE_TOKEN=
    
    ### API Token Secrets
    # Used to generate secure access tokens and refresh tokens
    # Set these to long, random alphanumeric strings
    
    ACCESS_TOKEN_SECRET=
    REFRESH_TOKEN_SECRET=
    
    
    ### Monolith Database Config
    
    MONOLITH_DB_NAME=monolith
    MONOLITH_DB_USER=monolith
    MONOLITH_DB_PORT=3306
    MONOLITH_DB_HOST=mysql
    MONOLITH_DB_PASSWORD=
    
    ### Initial Monolith User - Only needed for initial setup
    
    MONOLITH_ADMIN_FIRST_NAME=
    MONOLITH_ADMIN_LAST_NAME=
    MONOLITH_ADMIN_EMAIL=
    MONOLITH_ADMIN_PASSWORD=
    
    ### Monolith Forms Settings
    
    FORM_TENANT_NAME=
    FORM_ORG_NAME=
    FORM_TENANT_SLUG=
    FORM_TENANT_EMAIL=
    
    ### OPTIONAL SETTINGS ###
    
    ### API Instance Total
    # Set the number of API cluster instances to run
    # default is 1 - which should be plenty for most deployments
    
    #API_INSTANCE_COUNT=1
    
    ### File Service
    # Choose the file service you wish to use
    # Options are "S3" and "LOCAL"
    # Defaults to "LOCAL" if not set
    # S3 keys required if using S3 service
    
    # FILE_SERVICE=S3
    # FILE_SERVICE=LOCAL
    
    
    
    ### AWS S3 Config
    
    # AWS_ENDPOINT={aws_endpoint}
    # MONOLITH_FORMS_BUCKET={aws_bucket_name}
    # MONOLITH_CLOUD_BUCKET={aws_bucket_name}
    # S3_ACCESS_KEY={s3_access_key}
    # S3_SECRET_KEY={s3_secret_key}
    
    ### SMTP settings
    SMTP_HOST=
    SMTP_PORT=
    SMTP_USER=
    SMTP_PASSWORD=
    
    ### SendGrid Email Settings
    SENDGRID_API_KEY=
    SENGRID_VERIFIED_EMAIL=
    Slug Example
    my-forensic-company

    Select specific Evidence Items, Notes, Contacts, or other supported records

  • Create a report without using custom template syntax

  • Export the report as an editable Microsoft Word document

  • Review and refine the report before final delivery

  • For most standard reporting workflows, start with Monolith Case Reports before considering a Custom Report Template.

    To access case reports:

    1. Open a case.

    2. Select the Reports tab.

    3. Open or create a report.

    4. Review the available report options.

    5. Select the sections you want to include.

    6. Generate the report.

    7. Download the report as a Microsoft Word document.

    The Report Options step controls which sections and records are included in the final report.

    Sections can be enabled or disabled depending on the information you want to include. Some sections can also be expanded to configure additional options or select specific records.

    Available sections may include:

    • Template Options

    • Report Options

    • Cover Page

    • Table of Contents

    • Case Summary

    • Analysis

    • Evidence

    • Tasks Summary

    • Case Notes

    • People

    • Activity Log

    The Template Options section is used when generating a report from a custom report template.

    Custom report templates are Microsoft Word documents that use Monolith report variables and template syntax. These are useful when your organization needs a specific report format, layout, wording, or structure.

    From Template Options, users may be able to:

    • Upload and create a new custom template

    • Select an existing custom template for the report

    Most users creating a standard Monolith Case Report can skip Template Options and continue configuring the built-in report sections.

    See Custom Report Templates for additional guidance.

    The Report Options section controls general report-level settings.

    Available options may include:

    • Include Report Header

    • Include Report Footer

    Use these options to include or remove the standard report header and footer from the generated Word document.

    The Cover Page section adds a cover page to the report.

    Available options may include:

    • Include Organization Logo

    Use this section when the report should include a formal cover page with organization branding or other high-level report information.

    The Table of Contents section adds a table of contents to the report.

    This can help readers navigate longer reports with multiple sections, evidence items, notes, contacts, or supporting details.

    The Case Summary section includes high-level case information.

    Available options may include:

    • Include My Info

    • Include Client Info

    • Include Case Description

    • Include Report Summary

    • Include Evidence List

    Use this section when the report should include general case details, user or examiner information, client information, case description, report summary, or a list of evidence items.

    The Analysis section includes analysis-related information from the case.

    Use this section when the report should include narrative analysis, examination details, conclusions, or other analysis content documented in Monolith.

    The Evidence section includes selected evidence items from the case.

    When this section is enabled, users can choose which evidence items should be included in the report. This allows the report to include all evidence items or only the items relevant to the final report.

    Available options may include:

    • Include Description

    • Include Details

    • Include Chain of Custody

    • Include Acquisitions

    • Include Child Evidence

    • Include Photos

    Users can also sort evidence items and select the specific evidence records that should be included in the report.

    Use this section when the report should include evidence-level details such as evidence number, type, make, model, serial number, description, acquisitions, photos, child evidence, or custody history.

    The Tasks Summary section includes task-related information from the case.

    Use this section when the report should summarize work that was assigned, tracked, or completed as part of the case.

    The Case Notes section includes selected notes from the case.

    When this section is enabled, users can choose which notes should be included in the report. This allows teams to include relevant notes while excluding internal notes or notes that are not needed for the final report.

    Use this section when important case notes, examination notes, processing notes, or other narrative documentation should be included in the final report.

    The People section includes selected people or contacts associated with the case.

    When this section is enabled, users can choose which contacts should be included in the report. This may include clients, custodians, requestors, suspects, victims, witnesses, or other associated people depending on your organization’s workflow.

    The Activity Log section includes activity history from the case.

    Use this section when the report should include a record of case activity or actions taken in Monolith.

    After selecting the desired report sections, go to Create Report to generate the report.

    Monolith will create a Microsoft Word document based on the selected report options and available case data.

    Monolith Case Reports are generated as Microsoft Word .docx documents.

    This allows users to:

    • Review the report before final delivery

    • Perform quality control

    • Adjust formatting if needed

    • Add final comments or supplemental language

    • Make organization-specific edits

    • Save the final report according to internal procedures

    • Share the report in a familiar document format

    The generated Word document is intended to reduce manual report writing while still allowing users to make final edits before delivery.

    Monolith supports two primary reporting approaches.

    Use the standard report builder when you want:

    • Point-and-click report generation

    • Control over which sections and records are included

    • A report generated from information already captured throughout the Case

    • An editable Microsoft Word document without building custom template logic

    Use Custom Report Templates when your organization needs:

    • A specific Microsoft Word report format

    • Organization-specific branding or layout

    • Custom wording or structure

    • Monolith variables, loops, or conditional logic

    • Greater control over how Case information is rendered

    See Custom Report Templates for additional guidance.

    • Keep Case information current throughout the life of the Case.

    • Review Evidence, Acquisition, Note, Contact, and other relevant information before generating the report.

    • Include only the sections needed for the intended audience.

    • Select specific Evidence Items, Notes, or Contacts when the report should be limited in scope.

    • Use structured Monolith data throughout the workflow so more of the final report can be generated automatically.

    • Download and review the Word document before sharing it externally.

    • Use the Word document for final quality control and editing when needed.

    • Consider a Custom Report Template when the standard report builder does not meet your organization's reporting requirements.

    • Case Reports

    • Custom Report Templates

    • Template Variables

    • Template Examples

    Video Walkthrough

    When to Use Monolith Case Reports

    Access Case Reports

    Report Options

    Template Options

    General Report Options

    Cover Page

    Table of Contents

    Case Summary

    Analysis

    Evidence

    Tasks Summary

    Case Notes

    People

    Activity Log

    Create Report

    Microsoft Word Export

    Monolith Case Reports vs. Custom Report Templates

    Monolith Case Reports

    Custom Report Templates

    Best Practices

    Related Documentation

    Create a new client without leaving the case creation form

  • Leave the client blank and add one later by editing the case

  • You do not need to create clients in advance before beginning casework.

    If the appropriate client already exists, select them from the searchable client list. If they do not exist, select Create New Client and create the client as part of the case creation process.

    This allows the client and case relationship to be established without interrupting the intake workflow.

    Create Client

    A client does not have to be selected when the case is first created.

    If the requestor is not yet known, or the case was created before all intake information was available, edit the case later and select or create the appropriate client.

    This can also be useful when correcting or updating the requestor associated with a case.

    Relay provides another common path for clients to enter the Monolith workflow.

    A typical Relay workflow is:

    1. A requestor submits a request through Relay.

    2. The request appears in Monolith as an Inquiry.

    3. Your team reviews the inquiry.

    4. The inquiry is used to create a new case or merge information into an existing case.

    5. The requestor from the inquiry is associated with the resulting Monolith case as the client.

    This allows requestor information collected during intake to carry forward into the case without requiring your team to manually recreate it.

    For more information, see the Relay Request Portal documentation.

    People > Clients is the global client directory for your Monolith environment.

    Clients created during case creation, received through supported workflows, imported through integrations, or added programmatically through the API become part of this reusable client list.

    Use People > Clients to:

    • Search and review existing clients

    • Create clients outside of a case when needed

    • Update client information

    • Review organization information

    • Review cases associated with a client

    • Find repeat requestors

    • Import clients from supported directory integrations

    • Maintain a consistent client directory for future case creation

    When a client already exists in this directory, that client becomes available in the searchable Client field when creating or editing a case.

    Clients Table

    Client records can be used to preserve useful requestor information such as:

    • Name

    • Email address

    • Phone information

    • Organization

    • Address

    • City

    • State or province

    • Postal code

    • Client or requestor type

    • Notes or other relevant information

    Maintaining consistent client information makes it easier to identify repeat requestors and understand the history of work associated with a person or organization.

    Client Page

    A client record also provides access to the cases associated with that requestor.

    This is especially useful when working with repeat clients or reviewing the history of work performed for a particular person or organization.

    Two case views are available:

    • My Associated Cases — Shows cases associated with the client that you are assigned to as a user.

    • All Associated Cases — Provides an administrative view of all cases associated with the client.

    The associated cases table can help answer questions such as:

    • How many cases has this client submitted?

    • What work has previously been performed for this requestor?

    • Which cases from this client am I currently assigned to?

    • How frequently does this person or organization request work?

    This history becomes increasingly useful as your organization builds more case and client data in Monolith.

    Associated Cases views

    Client information can also be used with Monolith's custom label system.

    From the client detail page, use Print Label to select an available label template and print a label using information from that client record.

    The information displayed on the printed label depends on the selected template and the client variables configured within it.

    For more information about creating custom labels and the available client variables, see Item Labels.

    Client records become increasingly useful as your organization builds case history in Monolith.

    For example, your team may regularly receive requests from ABC Law with several different requestors at that organization.

    From the Clients area, you can use filtering and the associated case information to answer questions such as:

    • How many requestors do we work with at ABC Law?

    • Which clients are associated with that organization?

    • How many cases has a particular requestor submitted?

    • Which cases are associated with a specific client?

    • How frequently are we receiving work from a particular organization?

    For example, filtering clients by organization may show three requestors from the same firm, while opening one of those client records may show that the individual is associated with ten cases.

    This makes the Clients area useful not only for case intake, but also for understanding the relationships and request history your organization has built over time.

    Organizations using Microsoft 365 or Google Workspace can configure directory integrations to help populate the Monolith client directory at scale.

    Supported directory integrations include:

    • Microsoft 365 Admin

    • Google Workspace Admin

    These integrations are configured from Settings > Integrations.

    Once configured, the client import functionality in People > Clients can use information from the connected directory to bring selected users into the Monolith client list.

    This can be particularly useful when your organization has a known group of internal requestors that should already be available for selection when cases are created.

    For example, instead of creating twenty internal requestors individually as new cases arrive, an administrator can import those users into the global client directory. They will then appear in the searchable Client field during case creation.

    Clients can also be created and managed programmatically through the Monolith API.

    The API provides another way to add records to the global client directory and can be useful when integrating Monolith with another system or automating client management.

    Clients created through the API become available for use throughout Monolith just like clients created through the application.

    See Clients API for available endpoints and developer documentation.

    Clients and Contacts both store information about people, but they represent different relationships to your work.

    Clients generally represent the requestor associated with a case.

    Contacts represent other people connected to the case, evidence, acquisitions, or related forensic work.

    For example, a case might include:

    • An investigator as the Client who requested the examination

    • A device owner as a Contact

    • A suspect as a Contact

    • A victim as a Contact

    • A custodian as a Contact

    • An attorney as a Contact

    Contacts can be associated with cases, evidence items, and acquisitions as needed.

    See Contacts for more information.

    Maintaining accurate client information helps preserve the requestor relationship throughout the lifecycle of a case.

    Client information can be used when reviewing case history and can also be included where applicable in Monolith case reporting.

    Keeping client and organization information consistent helps ensure that the requestor information associated with a case remains useful when the work is reviewed or reported later.

    • Create or select the client as part of case intake when the requestor is known.

    • Add the client later if the information is not available when the case is created.

    • Search for an existing client before creating a duplicate record.

    • Reuse the same client record when a repeat requestor submits additional cases.

    • Keep organization names consistent so filtering and review remain useful.

    • Use Clients for requestors and Contacts for other people related to the case.

    • Use Microsoft 365 or Google Workspace imports when maintaining a larger known requestor population is helpful.

    • Use the Clients API when client creation or management needs to be integrated with another system.

    Administrators can delete a client from the client detail page when the record is no longer needed.

    To delete a client:

    1. Open the client from People > Clients.

    2. Select Delete.

    3. Review the confirmation message.

    4. Confirm Delete Client.

    Delete Client
    • Cases

    • Contacts

    • Relay Request Portal

    • Monolith Case Reports

    Clients and Case Creation

    Add or Change a Client Later

    Clients From Relay

    People > Clients

    You do not need to populate the client directory before using Monolith. Clients can be created naturally as cases and requests are received, while the global Clients area provides a central place to manage those records over time.

    Client Information

    Associated Cases

    Printing Client Labels

    Organizations and Repeat Requestors

    Import Clients From Microsoft 365 or Google Workspace

    Directory import is optional. Many organizations simply create clients as requests and cases are received. Integrations provide an additional option when maintaining a larger known group of requestors in advance is useful.

    Clients API

    Clients vs. Contacts

    Clients and Reporting

    Best Practices

    Delete a Client

    Deleting a client cannot be undone. Confirm that you have selected the correct client before completing the action.

    Related Documentation

    Victims

  • Witnesses

  • Attorneys

  • Opposing counsel

  • Investigators

  • Employees

  • Colleagues

  • Device owners

  • Account holders

  • Other people relevant to the case

  • For many cases, teams simply add the few contacts they need as they move through intake and examination. For larger matters or organizations with many known people, Monolith also provides CSV import, directory integrations, and API options to add contacts at scale.

    Monolith uses Clients and Contacts to represent different relationships to your work.

    Clients generally represent the person or organization requesting the work and are associated with the case as the requestor.

    Contacts represent other people connected to the case, evidence items, acquisitions, or related forensic work.

    For example, a case may have:

    • An investigator or attorney as the Client who requested the work

    • A device owner as a Contact

    • A suspect as a Contact

    • A victim or witness as a Contact

    • A custodian whose device or account is being examined as a Contact

    See Clients for more information about managing requestors.

    For most workflows, contacts are added naturally while working within a case.

    You do not need to populate a large contact directory before beginning casework. Add people as they become relevant, then associate them with the appropriate case, evidence item, or acquisition.

    The Contacts tab within a case provides a central place to manage the people associated with that case.

    From the case Contacts area, users can:

    • Create a new contact

    • Assign an existing contact to the case

    • Import multiple contacts from CSV

    • Review the contacts already associated with the case

    A contact added to the case can later be associated with specific evidence items, acquisitions, or other records when additional context is needed.

    This is useful when you know who the relevant people are at intake but have not yet determined exactly which devices, accounts, or collections belong to each person.

    Contacts can also be selected or created while adding an evidence item.

    The Linked Contact field on the evidence creation form allows you to:

    • Search for an existing contact

    • Select a contact already available in Monolith

    • Create a new contact without leaving the evidence intake workflow

    This is useful when the relationship between the person and the evidence is already known.

    For example, when entering a mobile phone, laptop, email account, or other item, you may immediately associate it with the custodian, owner, suspect, or other relevant person.

    If the appropriate contact is not yet known, the evidence item can be created first and the relationship can be added later.

    Contacts can also be associated directly with acquisitions.

    When creating or editing an acquisition, use the Linked Contact field to connect the acquisition with the person relevant to that collection.

    This can help document relationships such as:

    • Whose account was collected

    • Which custodian an acquisition belongs to

    • Which person is associated with a forensic image or extraction

    • Who is relevant to a particular collection or examination

    As with evidence intake, users can work with existing contacts and add the relationship as it becomes known.

    Contacts may also enter the case workflow through the Relay Request Portal.

    A typical workflow is:

    1. A requestor submits information through Relay.

    2. The request appears in Monolith as an Inquiry.

    3. Your team reviews the inquiry and its submitted information.

    4. The inquiry is used to create a new case or merge into an existing case.

    5. Relevant people from the request can carry forward into the resulting Monolith workflow.

    6. Those contacts can then be associated with the appropriate evidence items, acquisitions, or other case records.

    This allows people identified during request intake to remain connected to the case instead of being entered again manually.

    People > Contacts is the global contact directory for your Monolith environment.

    Contacts created during casework, imported from other sources, or added through supported integrations and APIs become part of this reusable contact list.

    Use People > Contacts to:

    • Search and review contacts

    • Create contacts outside of a specific case when needed

    • Update contact information

    • Review or maintain people used across Monolith

    • Reuse existing contacts instead of creating duplicates

    For most day-to-day casework, users may encounter contacts primarily from within a case, evidence item, or acquisition. The global Contacts area provides the broader management view when needed.

    A contact record can preserve information that helps identify the person and document their relationship to your work.

    Depending on the information available, this may include:

    • Name

    • Organization

    • Title

    • Email address

    • Phone information

    • Address

    • City

    • State or province

    • Postal code

    • Contact type

    • Notes or other descriptive information

    Capture enough information to clearly identify the person and distinguish them from similarly named contacts.

    Contact information can also be used with Monolith's custom label system.

    From a contact record, use Print Label to select an available label template and print a label using information associated with that contact.

    The information displayed on the label depends on the selected template and the variables configured within it.

    For more information about custom labels and supported People variables, see Item Labels.

    Manual contact entry works well when a case involves only a few important people.

    Larger cases and environments may involve dozens, hundreds, or more custodians, employees, account holders, or other relevant people. In these situations, Monolith provides additional methods for adding contacts without entering each person individually.

    Contacts can be imported into a specific case from a CSV file.

    From the case Contacts tab:

    1. Open Actions.

    2. Select Import from CSV.

    3. Select the CSV containing the contacts you want to add.

    4. Complete the import.

    5. Review the imported contacts in the case.

    This can be useful for:

    • Large custodian lists

    • Internal investigations

    • eDiscovery matters

    • Employee investigations

    • Matters involving many witnesses or account holders

    • Other cases where manual entry would be inefficient

    After the contacts have been imported into the case, they can be associated with specific evidence items or acquisitions as needed.

    Organizations using Microsoft 365 or Google Workspace can configure supported directory integrations from Settings > Integrations.

    Available directory integrations include:

    • Microsoft 365 Admin

    • Google Workspace Admin

    These integrations can help organizations use existing directory information when adding internal contacts to Monolith.

    This can be especially useful for internal investigations or larger organizations where many of the people involved already exist in the organization's Microsoft 365 or Google Workspace directory.

    Contacts can also be created and managed programmatically through the Monolith API.

    The API can be useful when:

    • Integrating Monolith with another system

    • Loading larger sets of contact records

    • Automating contact creation

    • Maintaining contact information through an existing organizational workflow

    Contacts created through the API become available for use throughout Monolith just like contacts created through the application.

    See Contacts API for available endpoints and developer documentation.

    Contacts associated with a case can be included in Monolith Case Reports.

    When configuring the People section of a case report, users can select which contacts should appear in the final Microsoft Word document.

    This allows relevant people and their information to remain part of the final case documentation without requiring that information to be manually recreated in the report.

    Not every contact needs to appear in every report. Select the people that are relevant to the intended audience and purpose of the report.

    • Add contacts as they become relevant during casework.

    • Create or select a contact directly during evidence or acquisition intake when the relationship is already known.

    • Use the case Contacts tab when managing the broader group of people associated with a case.

    • Associate contacts with specific evidence items or acquisitions when that relationship provides useful context.

    • Search for an existing contact before creating a duplicate.

    • Capture enough identifying information to distinguish similar people.

    • Use CSV import when a case contains too many contacts for practical manual entry.

    • Use Microsoft 365 or Google Workspace integrations when internal directory information can reduce repetitive data entry.

    • Use the Contacts API when contact creation needs to be automated or integrated with another system.

    • Include only relevant contacts when generating case reports.

    • Clients

    • Evidence Items

    • Relay Request Portal

    • Monolith Case Reports

    Contacts vs. Clients

    Adding Contacts During Casework

    Add Contacts From a Case

    Add a Contact During Evidence Intake

    Add a Contact During Acquisition Intake

    Contacts From Relay

    People > Contacts

    Contact Information

    Printing Contact Labels

    Adding Contacts at Scale

    Import Contacts From CSV

    Microsoft 365 and Google Workspace

    Directory integrations are optional. For cases involving only a few contacts, creating or selecting contacts directly during casework is often the simplest workflow.

    Contacts API

    Contacts and Reporting

    Best Practices

    Related Documentation

    Custom Report Templates

    Create Microsoft Word report templates using Monolith variables, loops, tables, and conditional logic to match your organization's reporting format.

    Custom Report Templates allow your organization to generate reports using its own Microsoft Word .docx format.

    Use custom templates when your team already has a preferred agency, lab, customer, or organization-specific report format that you want Monolith to populate with Case data.

    Templates can control the report's layout, wording, branding, structure, and logic while using information already captured throughout Monolith.

    For most standard reporting workflows, start with Monolith Case Reports. Use Custom Report Templates when you need greater control over the final Word document.

    Video Walkthrough

    This video walks through the basics of creating and using Custom Report Templates in Monolith.

    How Custom Report Templates Work

    A Custom Report Template is a Microsoft Word document containing Monolith report variables and template syntax.

    When a report is generated, Monolith replaces the template variables with information from the selected Case. This allows you to create a reusable Word template once and use it across different Cases.

    Templates can include information such as:

    • Case Number and Case Name

    • Organization information

    • User or examiner information

    • Evidence details

    See for the available Monolith report data and syntax.

    Use a custom report template when you need:

    • A specific Microsoft Word report layout

    • Organization-specific wording or formatting

    • Agency, lab, or customer-specific report language

    • A report that matches an existing document your team already uses

    Custom templates are powerful, but they require more setup than the standard Monolith Case Report builder.

    The template document must be a Microsoft Word document using the .docx file format.

    Create your report layout in Microsoft Word, then insert Monolith variables where case data should appear.

    Custom report templates use placeholder variables that Monolith recognizes and replaces with case data when the report is generated.

    Standard variables are used for single values, such as a case number or organization name.

    Example:

    You can include variables directly in your Word document.

    Example template text:

    When the report is generated, Monolith replaces the variable with the actual value from the case.

    Some report data can include multiple records.

    For example, a case may have one evidence item, several evidence items, or many evidence items. Because the number of items can change from case to case, templates use loops to repeat content for each item in a list.

    Example:

    This loop tells Monolith to repeat the content inside the loop for each evidence item selected for the report.

    The above syntax will loop through a list of evidence items (stored in the "evidence" variable) and output a vertical list of evidence numbers.

    Loops are a very powerful way to create complex report templates and display just about any data that you want.

    A loop can be used to output information such as:

    • Evidence numbers

    • Evidence types

    • Item names

    • Manufacturers

    Custom templates can also use table syntax to repeat rows in a Microsoft Word table.

    This is useful when you want to list evidence, acquisitions, chain of custody entries, or other repeated data in a structured table format.

    Table row syntax is similar to regular loop syntax, but uses special table row handling so that Monolith can repeat the row for each item in the list.

    Use table rows when your report should display repeated data in columns instead of narrative text.

    Given the following evidence data passed to the template from a case:

    Template Syntax for table -

    Generated Document Result -

    The "tr" prefix denotes that we are creating a loop through table rows.

    You'll notice that the table rows that have the start loop syntax and end loop syntax are not included in the final rendered table.

    Using this syntax you can create tables with templated lists pulled in from Monolith.

    Custom report templates can also support conditional logic for more advanced report behavior.

    Conditional logic can be useful when certain text should only appear if data exists or if a specific condition is met.

    Most templates only need:

    • Standard variables

    • Lists and loops

    • Table rows

    • Basic conditional logic, when needed

    For more advanced template logic, start simple and test the report output as you build.

    Custom templates can be used from the Reports tab inside a case.

    To use a custom template:

    1. Open a case.

    2. Select the Reports tab.

    3. Open Template Options.

    4. Upload a new template or select an existing template.

    Existing templates can be managed from Settings > Document Templates.

    This is useful when you need to update a template without creating duplicate versions during testing.

    A common workflow is:

    1. Create or update the Word template.

    2. Upload it to Monolith.

    3. Generate a test report.

    4. Review the Word output.

    This iteration process helps you refine the template until the generated report matches your desired output.

    When creating a new custom report template, start simple.

    Recommended workflow:

    1. Create a basic Word document.

    2. Add a few standard variables, such as case number, case name, organization name, and user information.

    3. Upload the template to Monolith.

    4. Generate a test report.

    Starting with a simple template makes it easier to identify syntax issues before the template becomes more complex.

    If a custom report does not generate or does not display data as expected, check for common issues:

    • Missing spaces or incorrect formatting inside variables

    • Misspelled variable names

    • A loop that is missing its {% endfor %} statement

    • Evidence or other records not selected for the report

    For a full list of supported report variables, see .

    For downloadable sample templates and examples, see .

    • Start with a simple template and build gradually.

    • Test the report frequently while editing the template.

    • Use clear section headings in the Word document.

    • Keep a backup copy of working template versions.

    Custom Report Templates support additional template syntax beyond the common variables, loops, tables, and conditional logic covered on this page.

    Start with the simplest syntax needed for your report and test the generated output as you add more advanced logic.

    If you need assistance building or troubleshooting a Custom Report Template, contact .

    Item Labels
    Contacts API
    Clients API
    Acquisition details
  • Chain of Custody information

  • Notes

  • Contacts

  • Other supported report variables

  • More control over how case, evidence, acquisition, note, or custody data is displayed

  • A reusable template for different report types or workflows

  • Serial numbers
  • Acquisition details

  • Chain of custody entries

  • Other list-based report data

  • Configure the report options.

  • Generate the report.

  • Download the generated Microsoft Word document.

  • Update the template file.
  • Re-upload the revised version to the existing template.

  • Generate the report again.

  • Confirm the variables populate correctly.

  • Add a simple loop, such as an evidence list.

  • Generate another test report.

  • Continue adding sections, tables, and more advanced logic as needed.

  • Empty values in the underlying case data

  • Table row syntax that is not structured correctly

  • Complex nested logic that needs to be simplified and tested in smaller sections

  • Use loops for repeated data such as evidence items.

  • Use tables when repeated data should appear in columns.

  • Review the generated Word document before using it as a final report.

  • Use custom templates when the standard Monolith Case Report builder does not meet your reporting requirements.

  • Cases

    {{ case.case_number }}
    This case was issued case number {{ case.case_number }}.
    {% for item in evidence %}
    {{ item.evidence_number }}
    {% endfor %}
    // Here is a basic evidence list variable example:
    // evidence = [{evidence_number: "1234"}, {evidence_number: "45689"}]
    
    Example 1: Vertical list of evidence numbers - 
    
    // template syntax for a loop
    {% for item in evidence %}
    {{ item.evidence_number }}
    {% endfor %}
    
    // The above syntax will result in the following document output:
    1234
    45689
    
    Example 2: Horizontal list of evidence numbers - 
    // template syntax for a loop
    {% for item in evidence %}{{ item.evidence_number }} {% endfor %}
    
    // The above syntax will result in the following document output:
    1234 45689
    [
        {
            evidence_number: "1234", 
            manufacturer: "Apple"
        },
        {
            evidence_number: "45689", 
            manufacturer: "Dell"
        }
    ]

    When to Use Custom Report Templates

    Template Document

    Template Syntax

    Standard Variables

    Be mindful of spacing inside template variables. Use the variable format exactly as shown in the Template Variables documentation.

    Lists and Loops

    When using loops, make sure every loop has a matching end statement. A missing {% endfor %} is a common template issue.

    Table Rows

    Conditional Logic

    Upload or Select a Template

    Manage Existing Templates

    Recommended Template Building Workflow

    Common Template Issues

    Template Variables and Examples

    Best Practices

    Other Template Syntax

    Related Documentation

    Template Variables
    Template Variables
    Template Examples
    support@monolithforensics.com
    Case Reports
    Monolith Case Reports
    Template Variables
    Template Examples
    Cases

    Acquisitions

    Record and manage forensic acquisitions, including source Evidence, collection method, software, storage, hashes, size, and other acquisition details.

    Acquisitions record forensic collections, extractions, exports, and other acquired data associated with a Monolith Case.

    An Acquisition can be linked to an Evidence Item when the collected data originated from a specific device, account, media item, or other Evidence source. Acquisitions can also be created without an Evidence Item when the work does not need to be associated with a specific Evidence record.

    Acquisition information can capture how the data was collected, the software used, its size, hashes, storage location, examiner, duration, and other details needed to document the forensic process.

    View Acquisitions

    Open a Case and select the Acquisitions tab to view Acquisition records associated with that Case.

    The Acquisitions table supports standard Monolith table functionality such as searching, filtering, sorting, column selection, and export.

    Available columns include:

    • Acquisition Name

    • Case Number

    • Status

    • Format

    • Type

    • Size

    • Size (GB)

    • Created On

    • Acquire Date

    • Acquired By

    • Forensic Software

    • Software Version

    • Storage

    • Hash 1

    • Hash 1 Algorithm

    • Hash 2

    • Hash 2 Algorithm

    • Duration

    • Evidence Number

    • Evidence UUID

    • Evidence Type

    • Evidence Provider

    • Evidence Name

    • Evidence Model Number

    • Evidence Unique ID

    • Evidence Size

    • Linked Contact

    • Description

    • Location Path

    • Acquisition Custom Fields

    Use the column selector to display the information that is most useful for your workflow.

    Select New Acquisition from the Case Acquisitions tab.

    Only the Acquisition Name is required to create an Acquisition. Additional fields can be used to document the source, method, output, storage, and other details of the acquisition.

    Available information includes:

    • Evidence

    • Acquisition Name

    • Format

    • Type

    An Acquisition can optionally be associated with an Evidence Item from the Case.

    This creates a relationship between the original Evidence source and the data acquired from it.

    For example:

    An Acquisition can be associated with one Evidence Item.

    Evidence is not required. This allows users to document acquisitions that do not originate from a specific Evidence Item or where creating an Evidence relationship is not appropriate for the workflow.

    After an Acquisition is associated with Evidence, information from the Evidence Item can also be displayed in the Acquisitions table, including its Evidence Number, UUID, Type, provider or manufacturer, name, model, unique identifier, and size.

    See for more information about managing Evidence.

    Type describes the method or nature of the acquisition.

    Examples may include:

    • Advanced Logical

    • After First Unlock

    • Before First Unlock

    • Chip-off

    The available list can be extended when another Acquisition Type is needed.

    Type can help distinguish different collection methods while keeping Acquisition records structured for searching, reporting, and analysis.

    Format identifies the format of the acquired data.

    Available formats may include common forensic and general data formats such as:

    • AD1

    • AFF4

    • BIN

    • DD

    Additional formats can be added when needed.

    Format and Type describe different parts of the Acquisition. For example, a physical acquisition may produce an E01 or RAW image, while a logical acquisition may result in another supported format.

    Use Software and Software Version to record the tool used to perform the acquisition.

    The Software selector uses software recorded under Lab Management > Forensic Software, helping teams consistently identify tools used during forensic work.

    A software value can also be added when the required tool is not already available in the configured list.

    Recording the software and version can provide useful context for reporting, review, quality assurance, and future examination of the Case.

    Use Size and Unit to record the amount of data produced by the acquisition.

    Acquisition size contributes to Monolith's Acquisition data totals and can be used in Analytics and reporting to understand collected data volume.

    The Acquisitions table can display both the entered Size and a normalized Size (GB) value.

    See Reports for additional information about Acquisition reporting and analytics.

    An Acquisition can be associated with Storage Items to identify where the acquired data is stored.

    Multiple Storage Items can be selected during Acquisition creation.

    This can be useful when the same acquired data is maintained on multiple storage destinations.

    See the for information about managing Storage Items and their relationship to Casework.

    Use Acquire Date to record when the acquisition occurred.

    The Acquisition form also supports Duration Hours and Duration Minutes for recording how long the acquisition took.

    These fields provide additional context about when the work was performed and the time required to complete it.

    Use Acquired By to identify the Monolith user who performed or is responsible for the acquisition.

    Recording the examiner or user responsible for an Acquisition helps preserve attribution as part of the Case record.

    An Acquisition can optionally be associated with a Contact.

    This can be useful when the acquired data relates to a particular person, custodian, account holder, device owner, or other Contact associated with the Case.

    See for more information.

    Acquisitions can record up to two hash values and their corresponding algorithms.

    Available fields include:

    • Hash 1

    • Hash 1 Algorithm

    • Hash 2

    • Hash 2 Algorithm

    Use these fields when hash values are available and should be retained with the Acquisition record.

    Use the Acquisition Notes field to record additional information about the collection that does not fit into the structured Acquisition fields.

    This may include relevant collection context, processing information, exceptions, or other details useful for future review.

    Organizations can configure Custom Acquisition Fields to capture additional structured information required by their workflow.

    Custom Fields appear in the Acquisition form alongside the standard Acquisition information.

    This can be useful when an organization needs to collect information beyond Monolith's standard Acquisition fields while maintaining consistent structured records.

    See for configuration guidance.

    Select an Acquisition from the table to open its details.

    The Acquisition Details panel provides a consolidated view of the Acquisition and related information, including:

    • Acquisition details

    • Case information

    • Acquisition Status

    • Format and Type

    From the Acquisition Details panel, users can also Copy, Edit, or Delete the Acquisition when appropriate.

    Acquisitions can also be added in bulk using the Import from CSV option available from the Actions menu on the Acquisitions tab.

    This can be useful when Acquisition records already exist in another system or when a larger set of Acquisition information needs to be added to a Case.

    Review imported records after the import to confirm that Acquisition information and relationships were created as expected.

    Acquisition records contribute to Monolith's operational reporting and Analytics.

    Acquisition reporting can be used to review information such as:

    • Number of Acquisitions

    • Total acquired data

    • Acquisition Types

    • Acquisition Formats

    Because Acquisition size contributes to collected-data metrics, consistently recording Acquisition size can improve the usefulness of these reports.

    See for additional reporting guidance.

    Organizations can also work with Acquisition information programmatically through the Monolith API.

    The Acquisitions API can support integrations, automation, data synchronization, or external workflows that need to interact with Monolith Acquisition records.

    See for supported endpoints and implementation details.

    • Create an Acquisition for forensic collections, extractions, exports, or other acquired data that should remain part of the Case record.

    • Link the Acquisition to an Evidence Item when the collected data originated from a specific Evidence source.

    • Use Type and Format consistently to keep Acquisition records easy to search and report on.

    • Record the forensic software and version used when applicable.

    A recorded Monolith Mondays session covering the full acquisitions workflow, including the topics described above.

    Notes

    Document findings, observations, screenshots, and other Case context using searchable, versioned Notes that can be exported or incorporated into Case reports.

    Notes provide a flexible workspace for documenting findings, observations, screenshots, methodology, investigative context, and other information collected throughout Casework.

    Rather than keeping examination notes in a separate application, users can document work directly within the Case where it remains connected to the Evidence, Tasks, and other records being worked.

    Notes are automatically saved, searchable, versioned, and available for export. They can also be incorporated into Monolith Case Reports, allowing documentation created during the examination to become part of the final work product without needing to recreate it later.

    Why Use Notes?

    Notes can serve as the working narrative of a Case.

    Use Notes to capture information such as:

    • Examination findings

    • Investigative observations

    • Screenshots and images

    • Procedures or methodology

    • Important dates and timestamps

    • Commands, queries, or technical details

    • Conversations or contextual information

    • Evidence-specific findings

    • Task-related work

    • Information that may later be included in a report

    Because Notes live directly within Monolith, they can become part of the Case record rather than remaining in a separate notebook, document, or note-taking application.

    As work progresses, individual Notes can be exported independently or selected for inclusion in a larger Case Report.

    Open a Case and select the Notes tab to review Notes associated with that Case.

    The Notes workspace brings together Notes created throughout the Case, including Notes associated with different parts of Monolith.

    Depending on the Case, this may include:

    • Case Notes

    • Evidence Notes

    • Task Notes

    • Other supported Notes associated with Case activity

    This allows users to document information where the work is happening while still reviewing those Notes together from the Case Notes workspace.

    Notes are grouped by their associated record, making it easier to distinguish general Case documentation from Notes related to specific Evidence Items or other work.

    Create a Case Note when the information applies broadly to the Case rather than to a specific Evidence Item or Task.

    Case Notes can be used as a general workspace for documenting Case activity, findings, research, observations, or other information that should remain part of the overall Case record.

    Each Note has a name that can be changed as the purpose of the Note becomes clearer.

    Notes are automatically saved while you work.

    Notes do not need to be created only from the Case Notes tab.

    Users can also begin documenting work from other areas of the Case.

    For example:

    • Create an Evidence Note while reviewing or examining an Evidence Item.

    • Create a Task Note while documenting work performed for a Task.

    • Create a Case Note for information that applies to the Case more broadly.

    These Notes remain associated with the record where they were created while also being available from the Case's overall Notes workspace.

    This allows users to document findings in context without losing the ability to review the Case documentation as a whole.

    The Note editor provides rich formatting tools for creating structured examination documentation directly within Monolith.

    Users can add and format content such as:

    • Headings

    • Paragraph text

    • Bulleted lists

    • Numbered lists

    This makes Notes useful for both quick observations and detailed technical documentation.

    The editor also supports undo and redo while editing.

    Type / in the Note editor to quickly insert common content and formatting without leaving the keyboard.

    Available commands include:

    • Text

    • Heading 1

    • Heading 2

    • Heading 3

    Slash commands provide a quick way to structure documentation while an examination is in progress.

    For example, Current Timestamp can be useful when recording when an action was performed, while Image can be used to add supporting screenshots directly alongside the written findings.

    Images and screenshots can be inserted directly into Notes, including by copying an image to your clipboard and pasting it into the Note editor.

    This makes it easy to document work as it happens. For example, while examining data in a forensic tool, you can use your operating system's built-in screenshot or snipping utility to capture a relevant result, copy it to the clipboard, and paste it directly alongside your written findings in Monolith.

    This can be useful for capturing:

    • Forensic tool output

    • Artifact views and examination results

    • Search or query results

    • Application or system screens

    Screenshots can be placed directly alongside explanatory text, headings, timestamps, and other Note content so the visual evidence remains connected to the context describing why it was important.

    Images and screenshots remain part of the Note and are included when supported Notes are exported to PDF or Microsoft Word or incorporated into Case Reports.

    The Notes workspace provides several ways to locate documentation as the number of Notes in a Case grows.

    Users can:

    • Search Notes

    • Filter Notes by user

    • Review Notes by associated record type

    • Expand or collapse groups of related Notes

    Available sort options include:

    • Note Name (A-Z)

    • Note Name (Z-A)

    • Updated On (Newest)

    • Updated On (Oldest)

    This allows a Case to accumulate substantial documentation while keeping individual Notes easy to locate later.

    Notes can support collaborative Casework.

    Users can switch between their own Notes and Notes created by other authorized users.

    When a colleague's Note is available to the current user, it is presented as read-only rather than allowing one user to silently modify another user's documentation.

    Visibility also follows the permissions and organization of the underlying Case and Note location.

    This allows teams to share examination documentation while preserving the relationship between a Note and the user who created it.

    Monolith automatically maintains version history as Notes are edited.

    Open the Note menu and select History to review previous versions.

    Version History records earlier states of the Note along with information about when the version was created and the user associated with the change.

    Previous versions can be reviewed and restored when needed.

    This can be particularly useful when Notes contain important examination findings or documentation that changes as additional information becomes available.

    Use the Note options menu to manage an existing Note.

    Available actions include:

    • History

    • Rename

    • Delete

    Rename a Note when a more descriptive title would make it easier to locate later.

    Delete Notes only when the information is no longer required as part of the Case documentation.

    Notes can be exported directly without creating a complete Case Report.

    Supported export formats include:

    • PDF

    • Microsoft Word

    Users can export an individual Note, multiple open Notes, or available groups of their Notes depending on the selected export option.

    Formatting, images, and other supported Note content are carried into the generated document.

    When a Note export is generated, Monolith also adds the resulting PDF or Microsoft Word document to the Case Files area.

    This provides a convenient way to preserve the generated document alongside other Case files and work products.

    Exporting Notes can be useful when:

    • A finding needs to be shared independently

    • Only a portion of the Case documentation is needed

    • A standalone examination note is required

    • Notes need to be preserved as a separate document

    Notes can also become part of a larger Monolith Case Report.

    When configuring a standard Case Report, users can select the Notes that should be included in the report and control their order.

    This allows documentation created throughout the examination to become part of the final report without requiring the examiner to rewrite the same information at the end of the Case.

    A typical workflow might look like:

    Notes can therefore serve both as working documentation during the examination and as source material for the final Case deliverable.

    See for more information about creating standard Case Reports.

    Custom Report Templates can also work with Note information.

    A template can be designed to include or iterate through Notes when generating a custom report, allowing organizations to build reporting workflows around the documentation captured during Casework.

    This can be useful for organizations that want Notes to form a significant portion of a standardized final report while controlling the overall document layout and presentation.

    See for additional information.

    Notes are designed to remain close to the work they document.

    A Case may accumulate Notes from:

    • General Case activity

    • Individual Evidence Items

    • Tasks

    • Multiple examiners

    The Case Notes workspace brings that documentation together while preserving its relationship to the underlying work.

    This allows Monolith to act as the central record for both structured Case data and the less structured findings, observations, screenshots, and context that naturally arise during forensic work.

    • Document findings as the work occurs rather than recreating examination notes at the end of the Case.

    • Create Evidence Notes when a finding relates directly to a specific Evidence Item.

    • Use Case Notes for broader findings, methodology, research, or Case-wide context.

    • Use Task Notes when documenting work performed as part of a specific Task.

    A recorded Monolith Mondays session covering the full notes system, including the topics described above.

    Files

    Store, organize, review, hash, download, and securely share files and folders associated with a Monolith Case.

    Files provides a centralized file system for documents, exports, reports, screenshots, supporting material, and other files associated with a Monolith Case.

    Files can be uploaded directly by Monolith users or added through other workflows, including Relay intake and Note exports. Files and folders can also be shared with Relay users through Case Drives when information needs to be provided back to a requestor.

    Video Walkthrough

    View Case Files

    Open a Case and select the Files tab to access its file system.

    Case Files supports standard Monolith table functionality, including:

    • Search

    • Filtering

    • Sorting

    • Column selection

    • Exporting the file list to Microsoft Excel

    • Folder navigation

    Available columns include:

    • Action

    • UUID

    • Name

    • Type

    Use the column selector to display the information most useful for your workflow.

    Case Files behaves like a file system rather than a flat attachment list.

    Users can:

    • Create folders

    • Create nested folders

    • Upload files

    • Upload folders

    This allows a Case to hold a substantial amount of supporting material without requiring every file to remain in a single list.

    For example, a Case might organize files into folders for:

    • Search authority

    • Supporting documentation

    • Examination exports

    • Reports

    Enable Recursive to view files contained within nested folders without manually opening each folder.

    This can be especially useful when searching or reviewing a Case with a larger folder structure.

    Disable Recursive view when you want to work within the current folder only.

    Use New > Upload File to add a file to the Case.

    Files can also be added through drag and drop.

    Use Upload Folder when an existing folder structure should be brought into the Case.

    Case Files are intended for general Case-related material, allowing teams to keep supporting documents and work products associated with the Case where they can be easily found later.

    Enable Hash Uploads when Monolith should calculate hash values for files as they are uploaded.

    Supported file metadata includes:

    • MD5

    • SHA1

    • SHA256

    Hashing can provide additional integrity information for files retained with the Case.

    Use Search Files to locate files within the Case.

    Search can use information such as the file name and Description, making descriptive file metadata useful as the number of Case Files grows.

    Filters can also be applied using supported File fields such as:

    • UUID

    • Name

    • Type

    • Status

    Combined with folders and Recursive view, these tools make it easier to locate material within larger Cases.

    Select Show Details from a file's action menu to review additional information about the file.

    Available details may include:

    • UUID

    • Name

    • Type

    • Status

    Descriptions can provide useful additional context about why a file is part of the Case or what it contains.

    The File Details view also includes an Activity section.

    Activity provides a history of supported actions associated with the file, including activity such as:

    • Viewing the file

    • Downloading the file

    • Other supported file interactions

    Entries identify the user associated with the activity, when the action occurred, and whether it was accessed within Monolith or within the Relay Request Portal.

    This provides additional context around how Case Files have been accessed over time.

    Use the file action menu to work with an individual file.

    Available actions include:

    • Show Details

    • Share via Relay

    • View Item

    • Edit

    View Item allows supported files to be opened or previewed from Monolith.

    Use Download when a local copy of the file is needed.

    Use Edit to update supported File information such as the Description.

    Adding a meaningful Description can make files easier to identify through search and provides additional context beyond the filename alone.

    Use Delete when a file should be removed from the Case.

    Monolith prompts for confirmation before completing the deletion.

    Not every Case File begins with a manual upload.

    Files may also enter the Case through other Monolith workflows.

    Documents submitted with a Relay request can be carried into the resulting Case when the Inquiry is converted or merged.

    Once imported, those documents become normal Case Files and can be organized alongside other Case material.

    See and for more information.

    When a Note is exported to PDF or Microsoft Word, Monolith also adds the generated document to the Case Files area.

    This allows exported examination Notes to remain with the Case alongside other documents and work products.

    See for more information.

    Case Files can be shared with Relay users through Case Drives.

    Select Share via Relay from the file action menu to make appropriate Case material available to one or more Relay users.

    Files and folders can be shared with multiple Relay users as needed.

    For each user, Relay provides a Case Drive associated with the Monolith Case and the content that has been shared with them.

    A typical workflow looks like:

    This can be useful for sharing:

    • Reports

    • Deliverables

    • Supporting documents

    • Exported data

    Sharing a file through Relay does not move or remove the original file from the Monolith Case.

    Sharing can later be removed when the Relay user should no longer have access to that content.

    Removing the share does not delete the underlying Case File.

    File details also provide information about users the file has been shared with, allowing the forensic team to review its sharing history.

    See for the Relay user experience.

    Use Export List to XLSX to export the current Files table to Microsoft Excel.

    As with other Monolith tables, the export reflects the current table configuration, including the selected columns and applicable filtering.

    This can be useful for reviewing or providing an inventory of files associated with a Case without downloading the files themselves.

    Case Files provide a central location for the documents and supporting material associated with Casework.

    A Case may accumulate material from:

    • Manual uploads

    • Relay request Documents

    • Note exports

    • Examiner work products

    Folders, descriptions, search, hashes, and activity history allow that material to remain organized and connected to the Case rather than being maintained across unrelated file shares or local folders.

    • Keep Case-related documents and work products associated with the Case when practical.

    • Use folders to organize larger collections of Case Files.

    • Use descriptive filenames and Descriptions so files remain easy to locate later.

    • Use Recursive view when reviewing files across nested folders.

    A recorded Monolith Mondays session covering the full File system workflow, including the topics described above.

    Managing Licensing

    Configure and update Monolith licensing for an on-premises deployment using an offline license token or online license key.

    On-premises Monolith licensing is configured through the .env file included with your Monolith deployment.

    Monolith supports two licensing methods:

    • License Token: Preferred method that supports both connected and offline environments

    • License Key: Online method that retrieves licensing information from the Monolith licensing service

    Where Your License Is Managed

    Your Monolith license configuration is stored in the .env file within your Monolith deployment directory.

    Two environment variables are used for licensing:

    When the Monolith server starts, it determines the active license using these values.

    If both values are present, MONOLITH_LICENSE_TOKEN takes precedence.

    The Monolith License Token is the preferred licensing method for on-premises deployments.

    A License Token is a securely signed value containing the licensing information for your Monolith environment.

    This method:

    • Works in environments with internet access

    • Works in offline or air-gapped environments

    • Does not require Monolith to contact the online licensing service during normal operation

    • Allows the Monolith deployment to remain licensed during internet or external service interruptions

    When Monolith starts, the server derives the applicable license information directly from the token.

    License Tokens are tied to your Monolith subscription and expire according to the applicable renewal period.

    A refreshed token must be provided when the current token expires.

    To request a new License Token, contact .

    The Monolith License Key is a shorter unique value associated with your Monolith customer account.

    When this licensing method is used, Monolith contacts the online licensing service to retrieve the applicable licensing information.

    For environments without reliable internet access, use a Monolith License Token instead.

    To update an existing on-premises license:

    1. Locate the .env file in your Monolith deployment directory.

    2. Replace the existing MONOLITH_LICENSE_TOKEN or MONOLITH_LICENSE_KEY value with the new value provided by Monolith.

    3. Save the .env file.

    Run the following commands:

    Run these commands from the directory containing the .env and docker-compose.yml files.

    After the containers restart, Monolith will load the updated licensing information.

    If the updated license is not recognized, confirm that:

    • The License Token or License Key was copied completely

    • The value was entered on the correct line in the .env file

    • There are no unintended spaces or characters in the value

    • The Monolith containers were restarted after the change

    If the issue continues, contact .

    Printer Recommendations

    Review recommended DYMO label printers for printing Monolith Evidence, Storage, and other supported labels.

    Monolith supports DYMO label printers for printing labels from supported records throughout the platform.

    Use the printer models below as recommended options when setting up a new Monolith labeling workflow.

    Recommended DYMO Printers

    DYMO LabelWriter 550 Turbo

    The DYMO LabelWriter 550 Turbo is a good general-purpose option for organizations printing standard Monolith labels.

    It is well suited for common Evidence, Storage, and other labeling workflows where a compact desktop label printer is appropriate.

    DYMO LabelWriter 550 Turbo

    DYMO LabelWriter 5XL

    The DYMO LabelWriter 5XL supports larger label formats and may be useful for organizations that need additional space for item information, barcodes, QR codes, or other label content.

    DYMO LabelWriter 5XL

    Before Purchasing a Printer

    Consider the label sizes and amount of information your organization plans to print.

    Monolith label templates can include information such as:

    • Evidence or Storage identifiers

    • Item details

    • QR codes

    • Barcodes

    The best printer for your organization depends on the physical label format you plan to use.

    After selecting a printer, install DYMO Connect and confirm that the printer can successfully print from the computer before configuring it for Monolith.

    See for installation, connection, and troubleshooting guidance.

    See for information about building Monolith label templates and using QR codes or barcodes.

    Tasks

    Manage Tasks across Cases, optionally link work to Evidence Items, organize repeatable workflows, track time, and monitor completion.

    Tasks provide a structured way to organize, assign, and track work across Monolith.

    Every Task belongs to a and can optionally be associated with a specific within that Case. This allows teams to manage both general Case work and work related to a particular device, account, dataset, or other Evidence Item.

    The Dashboard > Tasks page provides a centralized view of Tasks across the Cases you have access to.

    Tasks can be viewed from two primary places in Monolith.

    The global Tasks page provides a cross-Case work queue.

    Use this view when you want to:

    If the video does not render, .
    Organization-specific label content

    Printer Setup

    Related Documentation

    DYMO Label Printers
    Item Labels
    Hardware Integrations
    DYMO Label Printers
    Item Labels
    Scanner Recommendations
    watch the Query Filter walkthrough on YouTube

    Restart the Monolith Docker deployment.

    MONOLITH_LICENSE_TOKEN is not unintentionally overriding MONOLITH_LICENSE_KEY

  • Internet access is available if using License Key licensing

  • Treat license keys and tokens as sensitive configuration values and avoid sharing the contents of your .env file unnecessarily.

    Monolith License Token

    License Token Renewal

    Monolith License Key

    License Key licensing requires internet connectivity and is not suitable for air-gapped environments.

    Update Your License

    Troubleshooting Licensing

    Related Documentation

    support@monolithforensics.com
    support@monolithforensics.com
    On-Premises Deployments
    Monolith Containers (Docker)
    Deployment
    Updates
    MONOLITH_LICENSE_KEY=
    MONOLITH_LICENSE_TOKEN=
    docker compose down
    docker compose up -d
    Software
  • Software Version

  • Size and Unit

  • Storage Items

  • Hash values and algorithms

  • Acquire Date

  • Duration

  • Acquired By

  • Linked Contact

  • Notes

  • Acquisition Custom Fields

  • Cloud
  • File System

  • Full File System

  • JTAG

  • Logical

  • Manual

  • Memory

  • Network

  • Other

  • Physical

  • DMG
  • E01

  • ISO

  • L01

  • RAW

  • TAR

  • UFD

  • VHDX

  • VMDK

  • XRY

  • ZIP

  • Size
  • Acquisition date

  • Acquired By

  • Forensic Software and version

  • Storage

  • Hashes

  • Duration

  • Related Evidence information

  • Linked Contact

  • Location Path

  • Custom Fields

  • Software used
  • Acquired By

  • Acquisition activity over time

  • Record Acquisition size when known so collected-data metrics remain useful.

  • Associate Storage Items when Monolith should track where the acquired data is maintained.

  • Record hashes when they are available and useful to the forensic workflow.

  • Identify the user who performed the Acquisition when examiner attribution is important.

  • Use Custom Fields for additional structured Acquisition information specific to your organization.

  • Custom Fields

  • Reports

  • Acquisitions API

  • Evidence Item
        ↓
    Acquisition
        ↓
    Collected / Extracted Data

    Create an Acquisition

    Link an Acquisition to Evidence

    Acquisition Type

    Acquisition Format

    Forensic Software

    Acquisition Size

    Storage Items

    When multiple Storage Items are selected during creation, Monolith creates a corresponding Acquisition record for each selected Storage Item using the Acquisition details entered in the form.

    Acquire Date and Duration

    Acquired By

    Linked Contact

    Hashes

    Notes

    Acquisition Custom Fields

    Review and Edit an Acquisition

    Import Acquisitions From CSV

    Acquisitions in Analytics

    Acquisitions API

    Recommended Practices

    Acquisitions Extended Walkthrough

    Related Documentation

    Evidence Items
    Storage documentation
    Contacts
    Custom Fields
    Reports
    Acquisitions API
    Cases
    Evidence Items
    Contacts
    Forensic Software
    Bold, italic, underline, and other text formatting
  • Blockquotes

  • Links

  • Inline code

  • Horizontal dividers

  • Images and screenshots

  • Dates and timestamps

  • Heading 4

  • Bullet List

  • Numbered List

  • Code

  • Blockquote

  • Horizontal Rule

  • Current Date

  • Current Timestamp

  • Image

  • Error messages
  • Configuration information

  • Relevant visual findings

  • Other supporting context

  • Sort Notes by name
  • Sort by Created On

  • Sort by Updated On

  • Open multiple Notes in tabs

  • Created On (Newest)
  • Created On (Oldest)

  • A user wants to review documentation outside Monolith

    Different stages of an examination

    Give Notes descriptive names so they remain easy to locate as Case documentation grows.

  • Use headings and lists to keep longer Notes readable.

  • Include screenshots when they provide useful context for a finding.

  • Use the Current Date and Current Timestamp slash commands when documenting time-sensitive activity.

  • Review Version History when earlier Note content needs to be referenced or restored.

  • Export individual Notes when a standalone document is useful.

  • Select relevant Notes for inclusion in Case Reports rather than recreating the same findings elsewhere.

  • Monolith Case Reports

  • Custom Report Templates

  • Perform Examination
            ↓
    Document Findings in Notes
            ↓
    Add Screenshots / Context
            ↓
    Continue Updating Notes
            ↓
    Select Relevant Notes
            ↓
    Generate Case Report

    Video Walkthrough

    View Notes

    Create a Case Note

    Notes do not require a separate manual Save action. Changes are automatically saved and become part of the Note's version history.

    Take Notes Where You Work

    Using the Note Editor

    Slash Commands

    Images and Screenshots

    Clipboard paste can make Notes especially useful during active examination. Capture the relevant portion of your screen with your preferred screenshot or snipping tool, copy it, and paste it directly into the Note without needing to save and upload the image separately.

    Find and Organize Notes

    Notes From Other Users

    Note History and Versioning

    Version History allows the current Note to evolve during Casework while retaining previous versions for future review.

    Rename or Delete a Note

    Export Notes

    Exported Notes and Case Files

    Include Notes in Case Reports

    Notes in Custom Report Templates

    Notes as Part of the Case Record

    Recommended Practices

    Notes Extended Walkthrough

    Related Documentation

    Monolith Case Reports
    Custom Report Templates
    Cases
    Evidence Items
    Tasks
    Files
    Status
  • Size

  • Extension

  • Path

  • Created On

  • Client Modified

  • Created By

  • MD5

  • SHA1

  • SHA256

  • Description

  • Drag and drop files into the Files workspace
  • Move files between folders

  • Organize related Case material into a folder structure

  • Screenshots
  • Deliverables

  • Client-provided material

  • Other Case-specific work products

  • Size
  • Extension

  • Path

  • Size
  • Extension

  • Path

  • Created On

  • Client Modified

  • Created By

  • MD5

  • SHA1

  • SHA256

  • Shared With

  • Description

  • Download

  • Delete

  • Other Case-related files
    External reports
  • Screenshots

  • Supporting documentation

  • Final deliverables

  • Enable Hash Uploads when file hash values are useful to your workflow.

  • Be aware that hashing large files can increase upload processing time.

  • Review File Details when additional metadata or activity history is needed.

  • Share only the files or folders a Relay requestor should have access to.

  • Remove Relay sharing when access is no longer appropriate without deleting the underlying Case File.

  • Use Case Drives when providing reports, deliverables, or other files back to Relay users.

  • Consider available tenant storage when deciding whether particularly large datasets should be stored in Case Files.

  • Using Relay

  • Case Drives

  • Case File or Folder
            ↓
    Share via Relay
            ↓
    Select Relay User(s)
            ↓
    Case Drive Available in Relay
            ↓
    Requestor Accesses Shared Content

    Organize Files and Folders

    Recursive View

    Upload Files

    File storage is part of your Monolith environment's available storage allocation. Organizations working with particularly large datasets should consider whether the Case Files area or another storage workflow is most appropriate for that data.

    Hash Files During Upload

    Calculating hashes requires Monolith to process the uploaded data and may increase upload time, particularly for larger files.

    Search and Filter Files

    File Details

    File Activity

    View and Download Files

    Edit File Information

    Delete Files

    Confirm that the file is no longer required before deleting it from the Case.

    Files Added From Other Monolith Workflows

    Relay Inquiry Documents

    Note Exports

    Share Files Through Relay

    Video Walkthrough

    Manage Relay Sharing

    Case Files remain controlled from Monolith. Relay Case Drives provide access to specifically shared content rather than exposing the entire Case file system to the requestor.

    Export the File List

    Files as Part of the Case Record

    Recommended Practices

    Files Extended Walkthrough

    Related Documentation

    Inquiries
    Managing Relay Requests in Monolith
    Notes
    Case Drives
    Cases
    Notes
    Inquiries
    Managing Relay Requests in Monolith
    Review Tasks across multiple Cases
  • Find work assigned to you or another user

  • Review Tasks by Status

  • Search and filter Tasks

  • Review archived Tasks

  • Track time across Tasks and Cases

  • Export Task or time-entry information

  • Each Case also contains its own Tasks tab.

    This view shows the Tasks associated with that specific Case and is useful when you are already working within the Case record.

    Both areas use the same underlying Task system.

    Case Tasks View

    Select New Task to create a Task.

    A Task can include:

    • Task Name

    • Description

    • Case

    • Evidence Item

    • Status

    • Priority

    • Due Date

    • Category

    • Assignee

    • Task Template

    Every Task must be associated with a Case.

    A Task can also be linked to an Evidence Item from that Case when the Task is created. Evidence linkage is optional and is useful when the work applies to a specific Evidence Item rather than the Case generally.

    A Task can be assigned to one Monolith user or left unassigned.

    Assignment helps identify who is responsible for the work while still allowing teams to create backlog Tasks that have not yet been assigned.

    Users can filter the global Tasks view by Assignee when reviewing team workload.

    Users can also enable an email notification when a Task is assigned to them. This preference is managed under Settings > Email Notifications.

    See Email Notifications for information about managing personal Monolith notification preferences.

    Monolith uses the following Task Statuses:

    • Backlog

    • Pending

    • In Progress

    • Complete

    • Canceled

    Status identifies the current state of the Task and determines where it appears when Tasks are grouped by Status.

    The default Kanban view organizes Tasks into these Status columns, making it easy to see work moving through the Task workflow.

    Tasks can use the following Priority values:

    • Urgent

    • High

    • Low

    • None

    Priority can be displayed directly on Task cards and used when filtering the Tasks view.

    Tasks can include a Due Date when work needs to be completed by a particular date.

    Due Dates can be displayed on Task cards, used for filtering, and surfaced through areas such as the Tasks Due Soon Dashboard widget.

    Tasks can be assigned a Category to help organize work and support time-entry workflows.

    Categories are configured using Time Entry Categories and can be useful when teams want to distinguish different types of work for operational or reporting purposes.

    Tasks can contain Subtasks for workflows that require multiple individual steps.

    A Subtask behaves like its own Task while remaining nested beneath its parent Task.

    Subtasks can have their own:

    • Status

    • Assignee

    • Due Date

    • Priority

    • Time entries

    • Other supported Task information

    Subtasks do not automatically inherit changes made to the parent Task. Each Subtask can be managed independently.

    This makes Subtasks useful for repeatable processes where several distinct actions need to be completed as part of a larger piece of work.

    Task Templates allow teams to quickly recreate common Task workflows.

    A Template can contain a parent Task and predefined Subtasks, making it possible to create a repeatable process without rebuilding the same steps each time.

    Examples might include:

    • Mobile device collection

    • Computer acquisition

    • Processing workflows

    • Quality review preparation

    • Application review

    • eDiscovery processing

    • Other recurring forensic procedures

    Select Template while creating a Task to use an existing Task Template.

    See Task Templates for information about creating and managing reusable Task workflows.

    The global Tasks page provides several ways to display and work with Task information.

    The default Kanban view organizes Tasks into columns based on their Status.

    Columns include:

    • Backlog

    • Pending

    • In Progress

    • Complete

    • Canceled

    Task cards can display information such as:

    • Linked Case or Evidence Item

    • Assignee

    • Status

    • Priority

    • Due Date

    • Subtask progress

    • Time spent

    Use Display to control how much information appears on each Task card.

    The List view provides a more compact Task layout while continuing to group and display Tasks according to the selected configuration.

    This can be useful when you want to review a larger number of Tasks without the larger Kanban cards.

    The Table view displays Tasks in a traditional grid.

    This view is especially useful when you want to:

    • Review Task metadata in columns

    • Sort through a larger Task list

    • Review archived Tasks

    • Select which columns are visible

    • Export Task information

    The Time Entry view provides a detailed view of time recorded against Tasks.

    Use this area to review who performed work, when the work occurred, and how much time was recorded.

    Time-entry information can include fields such as:

    • Task

    • Task Description

    • Category

    • Entry Description

    • User

    • Duration

    • Date Entered

    • Start

    • End

    • Price

    • Invoice information

    • Case Number

    • Case Name

    Users can also add or modify supported time entries from this area.

    Select Display to change how Tasks are presented.

    Available options can include:

    • View Filter

    • Grouping

    • Ordering

    • Show Subtasks

    • Task Display Properties

    Task card properties can include:

    • Assignees

    • Linked Object

    • Status

    • Priority

    • Due Date

    • Subtasks

    • Subtask Icon

    • Time Spent

    Use these controls to create a more compact Task view or display additional operational information directly on each card.

    Select Filter to narrow the Tasks displayed.

    Available filters include:

    • Status

    • Priority

    • Category

    • Assignees

    • Has Subtasks

    • Due Date

    • Type

    The Type filter can distinguish between Tasks associated with Cases and Tasks linked to Evidence Items.

    Task filters use predefined matching behavior for each field. Where supported, multiple values can be selected within a filter.

    These filters are separate from the more advanced Query Filter used by some other Monolith tables.

    Use the Search Tasks field in the upper-right corner of the Tasks page to quickly locate Task records.

    Search can be useful when the global Tasks view contains work from a large number of Cases.

    The Table and Time Entry views provide column controls that allow you to choose which information is displayed.

    Use the column selector to add or remove available fields from the current view.

    These views can also be exported to a Microsoft Excel .xlsx file using the export control.

    The selected columns determine the information represented in the exported data.

    See Tables for more information about table controls and exports.

    Tasks can be used as the foundation for time tracking in Monolith.

    Users can quickly add time while working from a Task or use the Time Entry view for more detailed entry and review.

    Time entries can preserve information about:

    • The Task performed

    • The Case associated with the work

    • The user who performed the work

    • The amount of time recorded

    • The applicable Category

    • Additional entry details

    This information can support operational reporting and the time-based metrics available elsewhere in Monolith.

    Tasks can be archived when they no longer need to appear in the normal Tasks workflow.

    Archiving changes how a Task is displayed, but it does not change the Task's Status or mark the Task as Complete.

    This distinction is important because Task completion contributes to the My Progress and Total Progress calculations displayed on a Case.

    If an incomplete Task is archived, it may continue to affect the Case's Task completion metrics.

    Before archiving a Task, review its Status and make sure it accurately represents the work that was performed.

    Archived Tasks can be reviewed from the Table view.

    To view them:

    1. Open Dashboard > Tasks or the Tasks tab within a Case.

    2. Switch to the Table view.

    3. Select Display.

    4. Enable Show Archived.

    The table will display archived Tasks along with the Archive Status control.

    To return an archived Task to the normal Tasks workflow:

    1. Open the Tasks Table view.

    2. Enable Show Archived from the Display options.

    3. Locate the archived Task.

    4. Use the Archive Status control to unarchive the Task.

    5. Return to your preferred Tasks view.

    The Task will once again appear in the normal Task workflow according to its current Status.

    Task completion is one of the components used to calculate progress on a Case.

    Case progress metrics can consider:

    • Tasks

    • Evidence Items

    • Quality Assurance Reviews

    Keeping Task Statuses current helps ensure that the Case's My Progress and Total Progress metrics accurately reflect the work being performed.

    • Create Tasks within the appropriate Case so work remains connected to the Case record.

    • Link a Task to an Evidence Item when the work specifically applies to that item.

    • Assign Tasks when responsibility for the work is known.

    • Use Due Dates when work has a meaningful deadline.

    • Keep Task Statuses current as work progresses.

    • Use Subtasks for workflows that contain several independent steps.

    • Use Task Templates for processes your team performs repeatedly.

    • Record time consistently when your organization uses Monolith time tracking.

    • Review Task Status before archiving Tasks so Case progress remains accurate.

    • Use the global Tasks page when reviewing work across multiple Cases.

    • Dashboard

    • Overview

    • Cases

    • Evidence Items

    Global Tasks and Case Tasks

    Dashboard > Tasks

    Case
    Evidence Item
    Dashboard Tasks View, showing tasks across cases you have access to in Monolith
    Dashboard Tasks View

    Case > Tasks

    Create a Task

    Video Walkthrough

    Task Assignment

    Task Status

    Task Priority

    Due Dates

    Task Categories

    Subtasks

    Task Templates

    Task Views

    Kanban View

    List View

    Table View

    Time Entry View

    Customize the Task Display

    Filter Tasks

    Search Tasks

    Select Columns and Export

    Time Tracking

    Archived Tasks

    View Archived Tasks

    Restore an Archived Task

    Archiving is primarily an organization and visibility tool. If a Task represents completed work, update the Task Status appropriately before archiving it.

    Tasks and Case Progress

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Using Relay

    Submit structured forensic requests, track case and evidence progress, communicate with forensic teams, and access shared files through Relay.

    Relay is Monolith's request portal for submitting structured forensic requests to the teams you work with.

    Each forensic organization using Relay has its own Relay tenant. After you have been granted access, you can submit requests, provide evidence and contact information, upload supporting files, track the progress of your requests, communicate with the forensic team, and access files shared back with you.

    Access Relay

    Each Relay tenant has its own URL.

    Your forensic provider or organization may send you this URL directly, provide it through an internal website or resource, or invite you by email.

    A Relay tenant URL may look similar to:

    https://relay-app.monolithforensics.com/{tenant}

    Use the URL provided by the forensic organization you are submitting requests to.

    Relay and Monolith use separate authentication systems. If you also use Monolith, sign in using your Relay account unless your organization has configured Single Sign-On (SSO) for Relay.

    Create a Relay Account

    If the organization allows self-registration, you can create a Relay account from its tenant URL.

    Creating an account does not automatically provide access to the tenant. The forensic organization must approve your access before you can begin submitting requests.

    After registration:

    1. Submit your account request.

    2. Wait for the forensic organization to approve your access.

    3. Return to Relay after approval.

    4. Log in using your Relay account.

    Organizations may also send users direct invitations rather than asking them to self-register.

    A Relay account can belong to more than one Relay tenant. For example, an investigator who submits requests to multiple forensic labs may use the same Relay account to access each organization that has granted them permission.

    After logging in, Relay provides access to the forensic organizations you are approved to work with.

    Under each Forensic Partner, available options include:

    • Submit a Request

    • My Requests

    • Case Drives

    Relay Admins may also have access to All Requests for reviewing requests submitted by other users.

    Your Relay home page also provides training resources for common Relay workflows.

    Select Submit a Request under the appropriate forensic partner to begin a new request.

    Relay guides you through a structured intake process so the forensic team receives useful information before work begins.

    A request may include sections such as:

    • Request Descriptor

    • Request Details

    • Supporting Files

    • Evidence Items

    The exact information requested may vary depending on how the forensic team has configured Relay.

    Before beginning a request, the forensic organization may provide instructions explaining what should be included with your submission.

    These instructions may include guidance such as:

    • Required case or matter information

    • What details should be included in the request description

    • Supporting documents that should be attached

    • Evidence information that should be provided

    Review these instructions before submitting your request.

    Providing complete information during intake can reduce follow-up questions and help the forensic team determine whether the request is ready to proceed.

    Use the request details section to explain what work is being requested and provide the context the forensic team needs to understand the matter.

    Provide enough information for the team to understand:

    • Why the work is being requested

    • What should be examined or collected

    • Relevant background information

    • Important deadlines or circumstances

    The information entered here becomes part of the Inquiry reviewed by the forensic team in Monolith.

    Supporting documents can be uploaded with the Relay request.

    Examples may include:

    • Warrants

    • Search authority

    • Consent forms

    • Case documentation

    These files remain associated with the request and can be brought into the resulting Monolith case when appropriate.

    Evidence information can be entered directly into the Relay request.

    Provide as much information about each item as is reasonably available.

    Depending on the evidence and the forensic organization's configuration, this may include information such as:

    • Evidence type

    • Manufacturer or service provider

    • Item name

    • Model or service information

    Providing evidence details before physical intake can help the forensic team understand what is being submitted and prepare for the work.

    Relay also allows you to identify people related to the request.

    Contacts may represent:

    • Custodians

    • Suspects

    • Victims

    • Witnesses

    Contacts can also be linked to the evidence items they are associated with.

    For example, a custodian can be added to the request and associated with the laptop, mobile device, or account belonging to that person.

    When the Relay request becomes a Monolith case, supported contact information can carry forward with the rest of the request.

    The forensic organization may configure additional custom fields for Relay.

    These fields allow the team to collect information specific to its intake process while continuing to use Relay's standard request structure.

    Custom fields may apply to:

    • The overall request

    • Individual evidence items

    Some Inquiry fields may also be mapped to fields in the resulting Monolith case so the information remains available after intake.

    See for information about configuring Relay custom fields and Inquiry-to-Case field mapping.

    Before submitting, review the request and confirm that the information is complete.

    Pay particular attention to:

    • Request details

    • Evidence items

    • Contacts

    • Supporting documents

    Submit the request when everything is ready.

    After submission, the request is sent directly into the forensic team's Monolith environment as an Inquiry for review and triage.

    Submitting a Relay request does not necessarily mean that forensic work begins immediately.

    The forensic team may first need to:

    • Review the request

    • Confirm that required information is present

    • Review supporting documents

    • Approve the requested work

    The current request status in Relay helps communicate where the request is in that process.

    Use My Requests to review requests you have submitted.

    Relay Admins can also use All Requests to review requests submitted by other users within the Relay tenant.

    Request status may include values such as:

    • New

    • Contacted

    • Accepted

    • Declined

    The forensic team controls the Inquiry status from Monolith, and updates are reflected in Relay.

    Each Relay request includes a Comments area for request-specific communication.

    Comments can be used to:

    • Answer follow-up questions

    • Provide clarification

    • Discuss the submitted request

    • Add additional context

    Relay also supports @mentions.

    When the forensic team is ready to begin active casework, your Relay request may be used to create a new Monolith case or merged into an existing case.

    Supported information submitted through Relay can be carried into the resulting case, including:

    • Requestor information

    • Evidence items

    • Evidence metadata

    • Contacts

    The forensic team determines which information should be brought into the case.

    After your request has been connected to a Monolith case, Relay can provide visibility into the resulting forensic work.

    Available case information may include:

    • Case name

    • Case number

    • Case lead

    • Case status

    This allows you to check the status of your request without needing to contact the forensic team for every routine update.

    Relay can also display information about evidence associated with the resulting case.

    Available information may include:

    • Evidence number

    • Evidence progress

    • Evidence type

    • Manufacturer or service provider

    Available chain of custody information can also be downloaded from Relay.

    Case Drives provide access to files that the forensic team has shared with you from a Monolith case.

    Files may include:

    • Reports

    • Deliverables

    • Exported data

    • Supporting documents

    When a Monolith user shares an eligible file with your Relay account, the file becomes available through Case Drives.

    Files originally uploaded as part of your request remain associated with the request itself. Case Drives are used when the forensic team shares files back with you during or after casework.

    A single Relay account can have access to multiple Relay tenants.

    If multiple forensic organizations have granted you access, each appears as a separate Forensic Partner in Relay.

    Make sure you select the correct forensic partner before submitting a request.

    Requests, cases, and files remain associated with the appropriate forensic organization.

    If you cannot access Relay, verify that:

    • You are using the correct Relay tenant URL.

    • Your account has been approved for that tenant.

    • You are using your Relay credentials rather than your Monolith credentials.

    • You are signing in through your organization's identity provider if Relay SSO is configured.

    If you still cannot access Relay, contact the organization or forensic team that provided your Relay access. Your organization's Relay administrator can contact Monolith Support if additional assistance is needed.

    • Review the forensic organization's request instructions before starting.

    • Provide enough detail for the forensic team to understand the requested work.

    • Add evidence information before submission when it is available.

    • Identify relevant contacts and associate them with evidence when appropriate.

    Accessing Monolith

    Monolith can be accessed from the web, the Monolith Desktop application, and the Monolith Mobile app.

    Monolith can be accessed through a web browser, the Monolith Desktop application, or Monolith Mobile.

    Choose the method that best fits your workflow and make sure you are connecting to the correct Monolith environment.

    Monolith Web App

    Monolith can be accessed through supported web browsers, including:

    • Google Chrome

    • Mozilla Firefox

    • Microsoft Edge

    • Apple Safari

    Select the cloud region or partner environment where your Monolith tenant is hosted.

    Monolith can also be used as a desktop application called . The desktop app is available for Windows and macOS.

    Download the version that matches your device:

    Tip: Most newer Macs use Apple Silicon. To check your Mac type, open Apple menu > About This Mac and look for the chip or processor listed.

    is available for iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

    On tablets, Monolith provides a larger-screen experience that is closer to the full desktop/web application, without the additional browser header and controls that appear when accessing Monolith through Safari or another web browser.

    On phones, Monolith Mobile is focused on mobile-friendly case and evidence workflows. The phone experience is not yet a full replacement for the Monolith web or desktop application, but it supports key workflows such as viewing case and evidence information, uploading evidence photos, adding notes, scanning evidence details, and completing chain of custody actions.

    Download the version that matches your device:

    Organizations running Monolith on-premises connect to their organization's Monolith server rather than one of the Monolith cloud regions listed above.

    Your organization should provide the URL or server information required to access the environment.

    For Monolith Desktop connection details, see .

    After accessing the correct Monolith environment, sign in using the authentication method configured for your organization.

    For standard Monolith authentication, see . If your organization uses Single Sign-On, see .

    Managing Relay Requests in Monolith

    Review Relay requests as Inquiries, triage submitted information, update request status, and create or merge cases when your team is ready to begin work.

    Requests submitted through Relay appear in Monolith under Case Management > Inquiries.

    The Inquiries area provides a central intake queue for Relay requests, where your team can review submitted information and determine how the request should proceed.

    For many teams, the workflow is straightforward: review the request, then either create a new Case or merge the Inquiry into an existing Case.

    When additional review is needed, an Inquiry can remain in the intake workflow while your team updates its Status, waits for additional information or physical Evidence, communicates with the requestor, or determines whether the request should move forward.

    Open Case Management > Inquiries to review requests submitted through Relay.

    The Inquiries table provides a central view of incoming and previously processed requests.

    Available information may include:

    Contacts
  • Additional custom fields configured by the forensic organization

  • People or contacts who should be identified

  • Physical evidence delivery instructions

  • Other intake requirements

  • Other details that may affect the forensic process

    Prior reports
  • Screenshots

  • Supporting correspondence

  • Other documents relevant to the request

  • Unique identifier
  • Size

  • Description

  • Custom evidence information

  • Associated contacts

  • Attorneys
  • Employees

  • Device owners

  • Account holders

  • Other relevant individuals

  • Required custom fields
    Wait for physical evidence to arrive
  • Request additional clarification

  • Determine whether the work belongs to a new or existing case

  • Converted

  • Merged

  • Transferred

  • Communicate about intake or next steps
    Documents
  • Custom field information

  • Case progress
  • Case open date

  • Case close date

  • Last activity date

  • Unique identifier
  • UUID

  • Size

  • Description

  • Evidence photos

  • Chain of custody information

  • Other case-related files

    Attach supporting authority or documentation when required.

  • Monitor your request status in Relay.

  • Use request Comments when clarification is needed.

  • Review case and evidence progress in Relay before requesting a manual status update.

  • Use Case Drives for files shared back to you by the forensic team.

  • Confirm that you are submitting to the correct Forensic Partner when you belong to multiple Relay tenants.

  • Contacts

    Relay Home

    Submit a Request

    Request Instructions

    Request Details

    Attach Files

    Add Evidence Items

    Add Contacts

    Custom Fields

    Complete the Request

    What Happens After Submission?

    Track Your Requests

    Communicate With the Forensic Team

    Request comments live in Relay. They are separate from Monolith case notes and do not automatically become part of the Monolith case record.

    When Your Request Becomes a Case

    Track Case Progress

    Track Evidence Progress

    Case Drives

    Working With Multiple Forensic Partners

    Account or Login Problems

    Best Practices

    Related Documentation

    Custom Field Options
    Relay Overview
    Managing Relay Requests in Monolith
    Relay Administration
    Custom Field Options

    Monolith Cloud Regions

    United States / North America

    Use this URL if your Monolith tenant is hosted in the United States / North America:

    https://monolith-app.monolithforensics.com

    Australia

    Use this URL if your Monolith tenant is hosted in Australia:

    https://monolith-syd.monolithforensics.com

    Canada

    Use this URL if your Monolith tenant is hosted in Canada:

    https://monolith-can.monolithforensics.com

    United Kingdom / Blue Lights Digital

    Use this URL if your Monolith tenant is hosted with Blue Lights Digital in the United Kingdom:

    https://monolith-app.bluelightsdigital.com

    United Kingdom / Europe

    Use this URL if your Monolith tenant is hosted in the United Kingdom / Europe:

    https://monolith-app.monolithforensics.co.uk

    Blue Lights Digital is a Monolith partner environment for supported customers in the United Kingdom. If your organization accesses Monolith through Blue Lights Digital, select that environment when connecting.

    Trial environments are typically hosted in the United States / North America region unless another supported region is requested. Trials can be provisioned in Australia, Canada, or the United Kingdom / Europe when preferred for data residency, organizational requirements, or to avoid moving the environment later.

    Monolith Desktop

    Monolith Mobile

    On-Premises Monolith

    Login and Authentication

    Related Documentation

    Monolith Desktop
    Download Monolith Desktop for macOS Apple Silicon / ARM
    Download Monolith Desktop for macOS Intel
    Download Monolith Desktop for Windows
    Monolith Mobile
    Download Monolith Mobile for Android
    Download Monolith Mobile for iOS / iPadOS
    Monolith Desktop Setup
    Login & 2FA
    SSO Login
    Welcome to Monolith
    Initial Setup
    Monolith Desktop Setup
    Monolith Mobile
  • Request name

  • Inquiry Status

  • Inquiry date

  • Request type

  • Converted date

  • Client / requestor

  • Organization

  • Description

  • Evidence total

  • Other available request metadata

  • Use filtering, sorting, and search to locate or review requests as your intake queue grows.

    Select an Inquiry to review the complete request.

    Depending on what the requestor submitted, the Inquiry may contain:

    • Requestor information

    • Organization information

    • Request details

    • Submitted date and time

    • Evidence Items

    • Evidence metadata

    • Uploaded files and documents

    • Contacts

    • Custom Inquiry fields

    • Custom Evidence fields

    Review the submitted information before deciding how the request should proceed.

    After reviewing the Inquiry, determine the appropriate next step.

    If the request is ready for Casework, you can:

    • Create a new Case when the request represents new work

    • Merge the Inquiry into an existing Case when the request belongs to Casework that already exists in Monolith

    If additional information, physical Evidence, clarification, or internal review is needed, the Inquiry can remain in the intake workflow until your team is ready to proceed.

    Relay supports both approaches: a direct request-to-Case workflow and a more structured triage process when additional review is useful.

    When a request represents new Casework, select Create Case from the Inquiry.

    Because this workflow creates a new Case, Monolith can use information collected during the Inquiry to initialize the Case record.

    Depending on the request, selected options, and your configuration, information carried forward may include:

    • Case Name from the request

    • Case Type

    • Case Description

    • Client / requestor information

    • Selected Evidence Items and their supported metadata

    • Selected Contacts

    • Uploaded Documents

    • Mapped Inquiry Custom Field values

    Review the information that will be transferred before completing Case creation.

    After conversion, the Inquiry Status reflects that the request has been Converted into a Monolith Case.

    If the Relay request belongs to a Case that already exists in Monolith, use Merge Inquiry instead of creating another Case.

    This is useful when additional requests relate to an existing investigation, matter, or other ongoing Casework.

    The Merge workflow is intentionally more limited than Create Case. Because the destination Case already exists, Monolith does not carry forward or overwrite Case-level metadata in the same way it does when creating a new Case.

    During the merge, users can select supported related records to carry forward, including:

    • Evidence Items and their supported metadata

    • Contacts

    • Uploaded Documents

    Monolith also links the Inquiry to the existing Case.

    Case-level information from the Inquiry does not automatically carry forward in the same way as Create Case. This includes information such as:

    • Inquiry / Case Description

    • Case Name

    • Case Type

    • Case Status

    • Case Lead

    • Assignments

    • Case-level Custom Field values

    Before completing the merge, review the Inquiry for information that should remain directly visible in the existing Case.

    This may include:

    • Request narrative or Description

    • Important operational context

    • Inquiry Custom Field values

    • Supplemental instructions

    • Other information needed for reporting or future review

    Add this information to the appropriate Case Description, Case Note, Case Custom Field, File, or other Case record as part of your workflow.

    After the merge is completed, the Inquiry Status reflects that the request has been Merged into the existing Case.

    Not every request needs to become active Casework immediately.

    An Inquiry can remain in Monolith while your team determines whether the request is ready to proceed.

    This can be useful when:

    • Physical Evidence has not yet been delivered

    • Supporting documents are still needed

    • Additional clarification is required

    • The request needs internal approval

    • The request should be declined

    • The request belongs with an existing Case

    For organizations that use a more structured intake process, Inquiry Statuses and Relay communication provide additional tools for managing the request before creating or merging a Case.

    Use the Inquiry Status menu to reflect the current state of the request.

    Available Statuses may include:

    • New

    • Contacted

    • Accepted

    • Declined

    • Converted

    • Merged

    • Transferred

    The current Inquiry Status is visible to the requestor in Relay, providing visibility into how their request is progressing.

    For example:

    • Use New for requests that have not yet been reviewed.

    • Use Contacted when additional communication or information is needed.

    • Use Accepted when the request has been approved for work.

    • Use Declined when the request cannot move forward in its current state.

    • Converted indicates that the Inquiry was used to create a new Monolith Case.

    • Merged indicates that the Inquiry was merged into an existing Case.

    Teams do not need to use every Status or triage step for every request. If the submission is ready for Casework, the Inquiry can move directly into the Create Case or Merge Inquiry workflow.

    Request-specific messaging is handled in Relay rather than directly from the Monolith Inquiry page.

    A Monolith user who also has the appropriate Relay access can open the corresponding request in Relay and use the Comments section to communicate with the requestor.

    Relay comments support request-specific communication and @mentions.

    Relay comments remain in Relay and do not become Monolith Case Notes or comments.

    If the Monolith user does not have the required Relay access, the requestor's contact information can still be used to communicate through another method such as email or phone.

    For some forensic workflows, especially law enforcement intake, the Relay request may be submitted before physical Evidence arrives at the lab.

    This allows the forensic team to review the request in advance and identify missing information before accepting custody of the Evidence.

    A workflow using this additional intake step may look like:

    This is one available workflow rather than a required Relay process. Requests that are already ready for Casework can move directly from review into Case creation or merge.

    Information submitted through Relay can continue into Monolith when an Inquiry is used to create or merge a Case.

    The exact information carried forward depends on the type of information, the Create or Merge workflow, selected options, and your organization's configuration.

    Custom Inquiry fields can be mapped to Custom Case fields.

    These mappings are most useful when creating a new Case from an Inquiry, allowing submitted request information to initialize the corresponding Case Custom Fields.

    When merging an Inquiry into an existing Case, review mapped Inquiry values before completing the merge. Merge does not carry forward Case-level metadata in the same way as Create Case, and important Inquiry values may need to be added manually to the existing Case.

    See Custom Field Options for setup instructions.

    The person who submits the Relay request can carry forward as the Client associated with the resulting Monolith Case.

    This preserves the relationship between the requestor and the Case without requiring the forensic team to manually create the Client again during intake.

    See Clients for more information.

    Contacts submitted through Relay can also carry forward into Monolith.

    These may represent people such as:

    • Custodians

    • Suspects

    • Victims

    • Witnesses

    • Attorneys

    • Device owners

    • Account holders

    • Other people related to the request

    Contacts can be associated with specific Evidence Items during the Relay submission and can continue to be associated with Case records after conversion.

    See Contacts for more information.

    Evidence Items submitted through Relay can be brought into the resulting Case.

    The submitted Evidence information may include details such as:

    • Evidence Type

    • Manufacturer or provider

    • Item name

    • Unique identifier

    • Size

    • Description

    • Custom Evidence fields

    • Associated Contacts

    • Other available metadata

    After the Evidence becomes part of the Monolith Case, your team can continue normal Evidence workflows such as intake, photography, Chain of Custody, storage, acquisition, and reporting.

    Requestors can attach supporting files and documents to their Relay request.

    When the Inquiry is converted or merged, supported documents can be carried into the resulting Case.

    Examples may include:

    • Search authority

    • Warrants

    • Consent forms

    • Case documentation

    • Supporting reports

    • Other request-related files

    Once the Inquiry has been converted or merged, the forensic team continues working in Monolith using the normal Case workflow.

    This may include:

    • Evidence intake

    • Chain of Custody

    • Storage

    • Acquisitions

    • Analysis

    • Tasks

    • Notes

    • Files

    • Contacts

    • Quality Assurance

    • Reporting

    Relay remains useful after Case creation because the requestor can continue to review available Case and Evidence progress through the request portal.

    Once the Relay request is connected to a Monolith Case, the requestor may be able to review information such as:

    • Case Name

    • Case Number

    • Case Lead

    • Case Status

    • Case Progress

    • Case Open Date

    • Case Close Date

    • Last Activity Date

    • Evidence Number

    • Evidence Progress

    • Evidence Type

    • Manufacturer or service provider

    • Unique identifier

    • UUID

    • Size

    • Description

    • Evidence photos

    • Chain of Custody

    Available Chain of Custody information can also be downloaded from Relay.

    This visibility can reduce the need for manual status-update emails or phone calls during active Casework.

    Files shared with a Relay requestor after Case creation are available through Case Drives.

    From the Monolith Files tab, a user can share an appropriate file with a Relay user.

    The requestor can then access the shared file from Case Drives in Relay.

    This can be useful for:

    • Reports

    • Deliverables

    • Exported data

    • Supporting documents

    • Other Case-related files

    Files originally attached to the Relay request remain part of the request and intake workflow, while Case Drives provide a way for the forensic team to share files back with the requestor.

    • Review the complete Inquiry before creating or merging a Case.

    • Create a new Case when the request represents new Casework.

    • Merge requests into existing Cases when appropriate instead of creating duplicates.

    • Use Inquiry Statuses when additional intake or triage visibility is useful.

    • Request clarification before creating or merging a Case when important information is missing.

    • Wait for physical Evidence when your workflow requires custody or intake before active Casework begins.

    • Review which Evidence Items, Contacts, and Documents should carry forward during conversion or merge.

    • Configure Custom Inquiry field mapping when request information should remain part of the resulting Case.

    • Make sure Monolith users who need Relay messaging also have appropriate Relay access.

    • Use Case Drives when sharing deliverables or other files back with requestors.

    • Relay Overview

    • Using Relay

    • Clients

    • Contacts

    Review Inquiries

    Relay Request Submitted
            ↓
    Inquiry Reviewed
            ↓
    Request Accepted
            ↓
    Physical Evidence Delivered
            ↓
    Create or Merge Case
            ↓
    Chain of Custody / Intake
            ↓
    Forensic Work Begins

    Open an Inquiry

    Decide How the Request Should Proceed

    Create a New Case

    Merge Into an Existing Case

    Review important Inquiry metadata before completing a merge. Information stored only at the Inquiry level may need to be manually added to the existing Case if it should remain part of the permanent Case record.

    Review Inquiry Information Before Merging

    Triage When Additional Review Is Needed

    Update Inquiry Status

    An accepted request does not need to become a Case immediately. For workflows involving physical Evidence, your team may choose to accept the request and wait until the Evidence arrives before creating or merging the Case.

    Communicate With the Requestor

    Monolith and Relay currently use separate user accounts. A Monolith user who needs to communicate with requestors through Relay should also have a Relay account with the appropriate permissions.

    Wait for Physical Evidence

    Information That Can Carry Forward

    Custom Field Mapping

    Requestor and Client Information

    Contacts

    Evidence

    Uploaded Files

    After the Inquiry Becomes a Case

    What Requestors Can See After Case Creation

    Case Information

    Evidence Information

    Sharing Files Through Case Drives

    Best Practices

    Related Documentation

    Task Templates
    Time Entry Categories
    Email Notifications
    Tables
    Query Filter
    The case tasks view shows tasks associated with that specific case

    Inquiries

    Review and triage incoming work before creating a new Case or merging the request into an existing Case.

    An Inquiry is a pre-case intake record used to collect, review, and triage requested work before it becomes an active Case.

    Inquiries give your team a place to evaluate what has been requested, review the available Evidence, Documents, Contacts, and other information, and decide how the request should move forward.

    A common workflow looks like:

    Request
       ↓
    Inquiry
       ↓
    Review and Triage
       ↓
    ┌──────────────────┬─────────────────────┐
    ↓                  ↓
    Create New Case    Merge Into Existing Case

    Relay is Monolith's built-in request portal and is a common way for Inquiries to enter Monolith, but Inquiries can also be created manually or through the Monolith API.

    View Inquiries

    Navigate to Case Management > Inquiries to view the Inquiries available in your Monolith environment.

    The Inquiries table provides an organization-wide view of incoming and previously processed requests.

    The table can display metadata associated with each Inquiry, including standard fields and configured Custom Fields.

    Available columns may include:

    • Request Name

    • Status

    • Inquiry Date

    • Type

    Use the column selector to choose which information appears in the table. This allows teams to surface the Inquiry details that are most useful for their intake and triage workflow.

    Use search, filters, sorting, and the available table controls to find and review requests.

    For example, an organization might display legal authority, request type, evidence count, priority-related information, or other Custom Fields directly in the Inquiry queue so users can evaluate incoming work without opening each request individually.

    Requests submitted through flow directly into Case Management > Inquiries.

    Relay provides a structured request experience for people outside the primary Monolith user base while allowing the forensic team to review the resulting request inside Monolith.

    A Relay-originated Inquiry can include:

    • Requestor and Client information

    • Request details

    • Evidence

    • Documents

    When the team is ready, the Inquiry can be used to create a new Case or merged into an existing Case.

    See for the complete Relay workflow.

    Users can also create an Inquiry directly in Monolith.

    This can be useful when a request is received through another channel but the team still wants to use the Inquiry workflow for intake and triage.

    Organizations with another request, intake, or business system can use the Inquiries API to integrate that workflow with Monolith.

    This allows organizations to use Monolith's Inquiry and Case Management workflows without requiring Relay to be the source of every request.

    See for available endpoints and implementation details.

    To create an Inquiry:

    1. Navigate to Case Management > Inquiries.

    2. Select New Inquiry.

    3. Enter a Request Name.

    4. Select an existing or create a new Client.

    A Client is required when manually creating an Inquiry.

    Inquiry Type uses the configured in Monolith.

    This allows the same organizational categories used for Cases to help classify requested work while it is still in the Inquiry stage.

    For example, a law enforcement organization may use investigative or crime-related types, while a corporate or legal team may use categories such as internal investigation, breach, or legal matter.

    See Case Types for configuration guidance.

    Open an Inquiry to review its submitted information and determine how the request should proceed.

    The Inquiry workspace includes:

    • Overview

    • Evidence

    • Documents

    • Contacts

    The left side of the Inquiry also displays Requestor and Inquiry information such as:

    • Client

    • Organization

    • Email

    • Referred By

    Inquiry information can be edited as additional details become available.

    The Evidence tab contains the devices, accounts, data sources, media, and other items submitted or added as part of the Inquiry.

    Evidence can be added or updated while the request is still being reviewed. The Inquiry workflow captures the core information needed to identify the item without requiring the full Evidence intake and chain of custody information used later during active casework.

    Standard Evidence information available during Inquiry intake can include:

    • Evidence Number

    • Evidence Type

    • Make or Provider

    • Model Number or Service

    Depending on your organization's configuration, additional Evidence Custom Fields may also be collected as part of the request.

    When the Inquiry is used to create a new Case or merged into an existing Case, your team can select which Evidence Items should carry forward.

    Selected Evidence becomes Evidence Items within the resulting Case, and supported metadata collected during the Inquiry carries forward with each item.

    Once the Evidence Item is part of the Case, your team can add the additional information needed for active casework, including intake details, chain of custody, location, assignment, acquisitions, photos, notes, and other Evidence metadata.

    Evidence Custom Fields remain associated with the individual Evidence Item as it moves from the Inquiry into active casework.

    For example, if your organization collects additional information about a device, account, authority, condition, or requested collection during intake, those values can remain attached to that Evidence Item after the Case is created or merged.

    This is different from Inquiry Custom Fields, which describe the request as a whole and can be mapped to corresponding Case Custom Fields.

    Preserving Evidence information through the intake workflow reduces duplicate data entry and maintains continuity between the original request and the Evidence record used during forensic work.

    See for information about managing Evidence after it becomes part of active casework.

    The Documents tab contains files provided with or added to the Inquiry.

    Examples might include:

    • Authorization documents

    • Request forms

    • Supporting documentation

    • Legal documents

    Selected Documents can carry forward when the Inquiry is used to create or merge a Case.

    The Contacts tab contains people associated with the request.

    Contacts might include investigators, custodians, employees, attorneys, suspects, witnesses, victims, device owners, account holders, or other people relevant to the requested work.

    Selected Contacts can carry forward into the resulting Case and can later be associated with individual Evidence Items or Acquisitions when appropriate.

    See for additional information.

    Custom Fields allow your organization to collect additional structured information during intake.

    An Inquiry can include both Inquiry Custom Fields and Evidence Custom Fields, depending on how your environment is configured.

    Inquiry Custom Fields capture structured information about the overall request.

    Examples might include legal authority, requesting department, service requested, handling requirements, or other information relevant to the request as a whole.

    Inquiry Custom Fields can be mapped to corresponding Case Custom Fields for use when creating a new Case from the Inquiry. This allows supported request-level information to initialize the new Case without requiring users to enter it again.

    When merging an Inquiry into an existing Case, do not rely on the merge workflow to update existing Case Custom Fields or other Case metadata. Review important Inquiry values during the merge and manually capture anything that should remain directly visible on the Case.

    Evidence Custom Fields capture additional structured information about the individual Evidence Items included with the Inquiry.

    When selected Evidence is carried forward during the Create Case or Merge Inquiry workflow, its supported Evidence Custom Field values carry forward with the resulting Evidence Item.

    This allows information collected about a device, account, data source, or other item during intake to remain associated with that Evidence Item as it moves into active casework.

    Unlike Inquiry-to-Case field mapping, Evidence Custom Fields remain associated with the Evidence Item itself.

    When Relay is used for request intake, enabled Inquiry and Evidence Custom Fields can be presented directly to the requestor as part of the submission process.

    This allows your organization to collect structured information before the request reaches the forensic team.

    See for information about enabling Inquiry and Evidence Custom Fields in Relay and mapping Inquiry fields to Case fields.

    Inquiry Status provides a simple way to communicate where a request stands during the intake and triage process.

    Available statuses include:

    • New

    • Contacted

    • Accepted

    • Declined

    These statuses are separate from Case Status and are intended to help manage the Inquiry before or as it transitions into active casework.

    Use New for a request that has entered the Inquiry queue and still needs review.

    Use Contacted when your team has reached out for clarification, additional information, evidence delivery, or another follow-up.

    Accepted indicates that your team intends to proceed with the request.

    Accepting an Inquiry does not create a Case.

    This allows the Inquiry to remain in the triage process while your team waits for physical evidence, additional information, authorization, or another requirement before active casework begins.

    Use Declined when the requested work will not move forward.

    Converted identifies an Inquiry that has been used to create a new Case.

    Merged identifies an Inquiry that has been merged into an existing Case.

    Transferred is available for workflows where the Inquiry has been transferred as part of the intake or triage process.

    How this status is used may depend on your organization's workflow.

    When the request is ready to become active casework, select Create Case from the Inquiry.

    Because this workflow creates a new Case, Monolith can use information from the Inquiry to initialize the Case record.

    Depending on the Inquiry and your configuration, information carried forward can include:

    • Case Name

    • Case Type

    • Case Description

    • Client information

    This preserves information collected during intake and reduces the need to manually recreate the request inside Monolith.

    After the Case is created, the Inquiry is marked Converted.

    See Cases for information about managing the resulting Case and its related work.

    If the requested work belongs to a Case that already exists, select Merge Inquiry instead of creating another Case.

    The Merge workflow is designed to add selected related records to the existing Case while preserving the Case's current metadata.

    During the merge, users can carry forward supported records such as:

    • Evidence

    • Documents

    • Contacts

    Monolith also links the Inquiry to the existing Case.

    Unlike Create Case, Merge Inquiry does not overwrite or append existing Case-level information such as:

    • Case Name

    • Case Description

    • Case Type

    • Case Status

    This is useful when multiple requests or supplemental submissions belong to the same Case and the existing Case record should remain intact.

    Before completing a merge, review the Inquiry for information that should remain part of the active Case record.

    For example, consider whether the Inquiry contains:

    • Important request narrative

    • Operational or investigative context

    • Inquiry Custom Field values

    • Supplemental instructions

    If that information should remain visible directly within the Case, add it to the appropriate Case Description, Case Note, Custom Field, File, or other Case record as part of your workflow.

    After the merge is completed, the Inquiry is marked Merged.

    When an Inquiry originates from Relay, Monolith preserves the relationship to the original Relay request.

    Changes to Inquiry Status can be reflected back to the requestor in Relay.

    If additional communication is needed, request-specific comments and @mentions are handled in Relay rather than directly from the Monolith Inquiry.

    A Monolith user who needs to participate in Relay comments must also have an appropriate Relay account.

    Once the Inquiry becomes a Case, supported Case and Evidence progress information can be made visible to the requestor through Relay.

    See Managing Relay Requests in Monolith for additional guidance.

    The Inquiry workflow can also serve as the intake boundary between Monolith and another system.

    An organization may already have an established request process, internal application, ticketing system, or other intake workflow.

    The Inquiries API provides a way for those systems to send structured requests into Monolith while preserving the Inquiry review and triage process.

    A common integration model might look like:

    This allows Monolith to become the system used for forensic casework without requiring users to manually re-enter information that already exists elsewhere.

    Inquiry information can be edited when additional details are received or existing information needs to be corrected.

    Users with the appropriate permissions can also delete an Inquiry.

    • Use Inquiries as a triage layer when work should be reviewed before becoming an active Case.

    • Capture enough information during intake for the team to understand what is being requested.

    • Use structured Evidence, Contacts, Documents, and Custom Fields instead of relying only on a free-text description.

    • Use Inquiry Status consistently so users can quickly understand where requests stand.

    Evidence Items

    Create, track, and manage the devices, data sources, accounts, media, and other evidence associated with Monolith cases.

    Evidence Items represent the devices, data sources, accounts, media, and other items associated with forensic work in Monolith.

    An Evidence Item might represent a mobile phone, computer, hard drive, email account, cloud account, removable media, or another physical or logical source of data.

    Every Evidence Item belongs to a Case. Once created, the Evidence Item becomes the central record for tracking information about that source and the work performed against it.

    Evidence can connect to:

    • Structured item metadata

    • Contacts

    • Intake information

    • Chain of custody

    • Physical location

    • Assigned users

    • Progress and status

    • Acquisitions

    • Storage items

    • Child evidence

    • Photos

    • Notes

    • Audits

    • Reporting

    Keeping this information together provides a consistent historical record of the item throughout its lifecycle.

    Evidence is often one of the first records created after a Case.

    A common workflow looks like:

    An individual Case may contain many Evidence Items, and each item can move through its own workflow independently.

    For example, one device may be awaiting legal authority while another device in the same Case is being acquired and a third is already in analysis.

    Monolith tracks those Evidence Items individually while keeping all of them associated with the same Case.

    There are two common ways to work with Evidence Items in Monolith.

    The Evidence Items page provides an organization-wide view of evidence across Monolith.

    Use this view to:

    • Search for evidence across Cases

    • Filter and sort Evidence Items

    • Review evidence across the organization

    • View Evidence Items associated with your Cases

    Because this view is not scoped to a single Case, Monolith requires you to select the appropriate Case when creating an Evidence Item here.

    The My Cases option can be used to focus the list on Evidence Items belonging to Cases associated with the current user.

    When you are already working inside a Case, use the Case's Evidence tab to work with the Evidence Items associated with that Case.

    Creating evidence from within a Case keeps the workflow focused on the Case you are already working in.

    Both views work with the same underlying Evidence Items. The difference is simply your frame of reference.

    Evidence does not always need to be entered manually from scratch.

    Depending on your workflow, Evidence Items can originate from several places.

    Create an Evidence Item directly from:

    • Case > Evidence

    • Evidence Management > Evidence Items

    Evidence information submitted through Relay can flow into a Monolith Inquiry.

    When the Inquiry is used to create a new Case or merged into an existing Case, selected evidence information can carry forward into Evidence Items without requiring your team to re-enter the requestor's information.

    See for more information.

    Monolith Mobile can be used during intake or field work to create Evidence Items, capture evidence information, and photograph items directly from a phone or tablet.

    This creates the same underlying Evidence Item used throughout Monolith.

    See for additional mobile workflows.

    If evidence information already exists in text that you can copy to your clipboard, Smart Paste can help populate the Evidence form.

    Copy the available item information, open the Evidence creation form, and use Smart Paste to populate supported evidence details.

    Review the populated information before creating the Evidence Item.

    Smart Paste focuses on Evidence details and does not populate chain of custody information or the Linked Contact.

    To create an Evidence Item from the organization-wide Evidence Items page:

    1. Navigate to > Evidence Items.

    2. Click Add Evidence.

    3. Select the Case the Evidence Item belongs to.

    4. Enter or review the Evidence Number.

    When creating Evidence from within a Case, the Evidence Item is created in the context of that Case.

    The Evidence form is designed to capture structured information that helps identify, track, search, report on, and work with the item throughout its lifecycle.

    Depending on the item, useful information may include:

    • Evidence Type

    • Item Brand or Provider

    • Item Name

    • Model Number or Service

    Capture the information that is available and relevant to your workflow.

    More complete records improve the usefulness of Monolith for searching, filtering, reporting, historical review, and operational visibility.

    Evidence can be associated with a .

    This is useful when a device, account, or other item has a meaningful relationship to a person involved in the Case, such as a device owner, custodian, employee, suspect, or other relevant contact.

    Linking the Contact preserves that relationship as part of the Evidence record.

    Evidence Types classify the kinds of devices, data sources, and other items handled by your organization.

    Examples might include:

    • Mobile Phone

    • Computer

    • Hard Drive

    • Removable Media

    Configure that reflect the work your organization actually performs.

    Consistent Evidence Types make it easier to understand and report on your workload over time.

    For example, an organization can distinguish between the number of mobile phones, hard drives, cloud accounts, email accounts, or other sources processed during a given period.

    Each Evidence Item has an Evidence Number.

    Monolith can automatically generate Evidence Numbers using the format configured by your organization under Settings > .

    For most organizations, allowing Monolith to generate Evidence Numbers is recommended.

    A consistent organization-wide numbering format helps:

    • Keep Evidence Numbers unique

    • Reduce ambiguity between Evidence Items

    • Make global evidence searches easier

    • Improve organization-wide reporting

    Some organizations use their own evidence numbering procedures, and Monolith supports manually entered Evidence Numbers when required.

    For example, an organization may choose to restart evidence numbering within every Case. While this may match an existing procedure, repeated values such as EVI-001 across many Cases make the organization-wide Evidence Items view less immediately identifiable.

    Choose a numbering strategy that fits your organization's procedures while considering how Evidence Items will be searched and reported across Monolith over time.

    Creating an Evidence Item and formally intaking it do not have to happen at the same time.

    The Intake Details section allows you to begin chain of custody tracking when the item is received.

    Intake information can include:

    • Received By

    • Received From

    • Signatures

    • Intake Timestamp

    Received By identifies the person receiving the item or data, typically a Monolith user, and begins the associated chain of custody record.

    Once chain of custody begins, Monolith can track the item's location as it moves between people and Item Locations.

    Intake does not need to be completed during initial Evidence creation.

    For workflows involving multiple Evidence Items, your team may choose to create the records first and then use bulk chain of custody actions to intake or move multiple items together.

    See for information about configuring the physical locations used during these workflows.

    Monolith provides several independent ways to describe what is happening with an Evidence Item.

    These fields answer different questions.

    Status represents the current state or condition of the Evidence Item.

    Evidence Status uses a standardized set of options in Monolith rather than a customer-defined workflow.

    Progress represents where the Evidence Item currently sits in your organization's workflow or pipeline.

    Evidence Progress is configurable so organizations can define stages that reflect how their lab operates.

    A pipeline might include stages such as:

    The exact pipeline depends on your organization's process.

    Evidence Progress is intentionally independent from Case Progress. A Case may contain several Evidence Items at completely different stages of work.

    An Evidence Item can be assigned to one user associated with the Case.

    Assignment answers a different question from Status or Progress:

    • Status: What state is the item in?

    • Progress: Where is it in the workflow?

    • Assigned User: Who is responsible for it?

    Keeping these concepts separate provides more useful operational visibility than trying to represent all three with a single field.

    Open an Evidence Item to view its complete record.

    The Evidence Overview brings together identifying information, workflow information, location information, and related activity.

    Depending on the Evidence Item and your configuration, information may include:

    • Evidence Number

    • Case

    • Evidence Type

    • Item Name

    The Evidence record also provides access to several related workflows.

    The Chain of Custody area maintains custody and location history for the Evidence Item.

    As the item moves between users and physical locations, Monolith can maintain its current location and historical custody record.

    This helps preserve a defensible history of where the item has been and who has handled it.

    An Evidence Item represents the original source or item being examined.

    An Acquisition represents a forensic collection, extraction, image, or other acquisition performed against that source.

    One Evidence Item can have multiple Acquisitions.

    For example:

    Keeping the source Evidence Item separate from its Acquisitions allows Monolith to preserve both the original evidence record and the individual forensic collections performed against it.

    Acquired forensic data often needs to be stored somewhere.

    Monolith uses Storage Items to track the physical or digital storage used to preserve forensic acquisitions.

    A common relationship is:

    These are separate records because they represent different parts of the forensic workflow.

    The Evidence Item represents the source. The Acquisition represents the forensic collection. The Storage Item represents where that collected data is preserved.

    See for additional information.

    Evidence can contain other evidence.

    Use Child Items when something associated with or contained within the original evidence needs to become independently tracked evidence.

    For example, removable media or another component removed from a source item may need its own Evidence record so its location and chain of custody can be tracked separately.

    The parent and child relationship preserves the connection between those Evidence Items.

    Photos can be associated directly with an Evidence Item.

    Use Evidence Photos to document the physical item, identifying information, condition, labels, packaging, or other useful visual information.

    Photos can be uploaded from existing images or captured as part of a mobile workflow using Monolith Mobile.

    The Audit Logs area shows audit activity involving the Evidence Item when the item has been included in a Monolith Audit.

    This provides a record of the item's participation in inventory and verification workflows.

    See for information about conducting evidence and storage audits.

    Evidence Notes allow information to be documented directly against the Evidence Item rather than only at the Case level.

    This helps keep item-specific observations, work details, and other information associated with the source they relate to.

    Because every Evidence Item belongs to a Case, confirm that the correct Case is selected before creating the item from the global Evidence Items page.

    Monolith includes an Evidence migration workflow for situations where an Evidence Item has been created in the wrong Case.

    Review the migration option before deleting and recreating an Evidence Item solely to correct its Case association.

    For a strong and consistent Evidence workflow:

    • Create Evidence Items as early as practical once the relevant sources are known.

    • Use structured Evidence Types that reflect the work your organization performs.

    • Capture useful identifying information rather than relying only on a description.

    • Link Contacts when an Evidence Item has a meaningful relationship to a person.

    The goal is to create a record that remains useful not only during the current examination, but also for future searching, reporting, review, and historical reference.

    Custom Field Options

    Control which Inquiry and Evidence custom fields appear in Relay and map Inquiry responses into Monolith case fields.

    Relay Custom Field Options control which custom fields are shown to requestors when they submit a request through Relay.

    Custom fields can be used to collect additional information from requestors during the intake process. These fields can apply to the overall inquiry or to evidence items included in the request.

    Inquiry custom fields can also be mapped to Monolith case custom fields. These mappings allow information submitted through Relay to carry forward when an Inquiry is used to create a new Monolith Case.

    When merging an Inquiry into an existing Case, Case-level metadata does not carry forward in the same way. Review important Inquiry Custom Field values before completing the merge and manually update the existing Case when needed.

    Custom Inquiry Fields

    Custom Inquiry Fields collect additional information about the overall Relay request.

    Examples may include:

    • Legal authority provided

    • Request priority

    • Internal department

    • Case subtype

    • Requested service type

    • Special handling instructions

    When enabled for Relay, these fields are shown to requestors as part of the request form.

    Custom Evidence Fields collect additional information about evidence items submitted with a Relay request.

    Examples may include:

    • Device condition

    • Collection location

    • Known passcode

    • Search authority notes

    When enabled for Relay, these fields are shown when requestors add evidence items to their request.

    Inquiry custom fields can be mapped to Monolith case custom fields.

    This is useful when information collected during the Relay request should become part of the Monolith Case record when the Inquiry is used to create a new Case.

    Merge Inquiry does not carry forward Case-level metadata in the same way as Create Case. If the request is being merged into an existing Case, review important Inquiry Custom Field values and update the Case manually when needed.

    For example, your Relay request form may include a field called Legal Authority Provided. If your Monolith cases also have a matching case custom field, the inquiry response can be mapped into that case field so the information remains available on the case after intake.

    To map a Relay inquiry field into a Monolith case custom field:

    1. Create the Custom Inquiry Field.

    2. Create the matching Custom Case Field.

    3. Edit the Custom Inquiry Field and map it to the Custom Case Field.

    4. Settings > Relay Settings > Custom Field Options

    To create a Custom Inquiry Field:

    1. Open Settings.

    2. Select Custom Fields.

    3. Open the Custom Inquiry Fields section.

    4. Click Create Field.

    The field description can help requestors understand what information they should provide.

    To create the matching Custom Case Field:

    1. Open Settings.

    2. Select Custom Fields.

    3. Open the Custom Case Fields section.

    4. Click Create Field.

    The Custom Case Field is where the mapped Inquiry response can be stored when the Relay Inquiry is used to create a new Monolith Case.

    After both fields have been created, edit the Custom Inquiry Field.

    To map the inquiry field:

    1. Open Settings.

    2. Select Custom Fields.

    3. Open the Custom Inquiry Fields section.

    4. Find the inquiry field you want to map.

    If the inquiry field should not map to a case field, leave the mapping set to None.

    Creating and mapping a custom field does not automatically make it visible to Relay requestors.

    To show the field on the Relay request form:

    1. Open Settings.

    2. Select Relay Settings.

    3. Select Custom Field Options.

    4. Find the custom field you want to show in Relay.

    After the field is enabled, requestors can complete it when submitting a Relay request.

    A lab may want requestors to confirm whether legal authority documents have been attached to the request.

    Example setup:

    Field
    Example Value

    Mapped Inquiry Custom Fields can populate corresponding Case Custom Fields when the Inquiry is used to create a new Case.

    When an Inquiry is merged into an existing Case, the merge should not be treated as a Case metadata update workflow. Review important Inquiry Custom Field values and manually update the existing Case when needed.

    • Create the Monolith case custom field before mapping the inquiry field.

    • Use clear field names that requestors will understand.

    • Add descriptions when a field needs additional context.

    • Mark fields as required only when the requestor must provide the information before submitting.

    Custom Field Options
    Case Drives
    Converted Date
  • Client

  • Organization

  • Email

  • Description

  • Referred By

  • Evidence Total

  • Custom Fields

  • Other Inquiry metadata available in your environment

  • Contacts
  • Custom Fields

  • Submitted date and time

  • Select the Inquiry Type.

  • Enter the person or source that Referred By, if applicable.

  • Enter a Description.

  • Complete any applicable Custom Fields.

  • Select Create Inquiry.

  • Request Name
  • Inquiry ID

  • Relay information, when applicable

  • Status

  • Type

  • Inquiry Date

  • Unique Identifier
  • IMEI

  • Description

  • Screenshots
  • Other files relevant to the request

  • Converted

  • Merged

  • Transferred

  • Selected Evidence
  • Selected Documents

  • Selected Contacts

  • Mapped Inquiry Custom Field values

  • Other supported request metadata

  • Case Lead or assignments
  • Case-level Custom Fields

  • Other existing Case metadata

  • Other information needed for reporting or future Case review

    Use Accepted when the work will proceed but is not yet ready for Case creation.

  • Create a new Case when the request represents new casework.

  • Merge the Inquiry when the work belongs to an existing Case.

  • Preserve useful information collected during intake by carrying it into the resulting Case.

  • Use Relay when your organization wants an out-of-the-box request portal and requestor experience.

  • Consider the Inquiries API when Monolith needs to connect with an existing request or intake system.

  • Existing Request System
            ↓
       Inquiries API
            ↓
          Inquiry
            ↓
       Review / Triage
            ↓
       Create or Merge Case

    Ways Inquiries Enter Monolith

    Relay

    Manual Entry

    Inquiries API

    Inquiries created manually or through the API remain Monolith Inquiries. They do not automatically create a corresponding request in Relay.

    Create an Inquiry Manually

    Inquiry Type

    Review an Inquiry

    Evidence

    Evidence Custom Fields

    Documents

    Contacts

    Custom Fields

    Inquiry Custom Fields

    Evidence Custom Fields

    Relay Custom Fields

    Inquiry Status

    New

    Contacted

    Accepted

    Declined

    Converted

    Merged

    Transferred

    Create a New Case From an Inquiry

    Merge an Inquiry Into an Existing Case

    Review Important Inquiry Information Before Merging

    Relay-Originated Inquiries

    Inquiries as an Integration Point

    Editing and Deleting Inquiries

    Review the Inquiry and its relationship to any Relay request before deleting it. Deleting the Inquiry in Monolith should not be treated as a method for removing or cleaning up the corresponding request in Relay.

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Relay
    Managing Relay Requests in Monolith
    Inquiries API
    Client,
    Case Types
    Evidence Items
    Contacts
    Custom Field Options
    Case Management
    Cases
    Evidence Items
    Clients

    Add an Evidence Item when you already know which Case it belongs to

    Select an Evidence Type.

  • Enter the available information about the item.

  • Complete any applicable Custom Fields.

  • Enter Intake Details now, or complete intake later.

  • Click Create Evidence.

  • Unique Identifier
  • Size

  • Priority

  • Description

  • Linked Contact

  • Custom Fields

  • Email Account
  • Cloud Account

  • Make individual items easier to reference outside the context of a single Case

    Location Received
  • Notes

  • Brand or Provider
  • Model Number

  • Unique Identifier

  • Assigned User

  • Priority

  • Status

  • Progress

  • Intake information

  • Current Location

  • Location Path

  • Linked Contact

  • Size

  • Custom Fields

  • Acquisition information

  • Parent or Child relationships

  • Photo information

  • Audit information

  • Use your organization's configured Evidence Number format when possible.

  • Keep Evidence Numbers globally identifiable when your operating procedures allow it.

  • Use Evidence Progress to represent the item's position in your workflow.

  • Use Status, Progress, and Assignment for their separate purposes.

  • Use chain of custody when location and custody history are important to the record.

  • Track where forensic acquisitions are stored by associating them with the appropriate Storage Item.

  • Use Child Items when something removed from or associated with Evidence needs its own independent tracking.

  • Case
      ↓
    Evidence Item
      ↓
    Intake / Chain of Custody
      ↓
    Acquisition
      ↓
    Analysis / Forensic Work
      ↓
    Reporting
    Pending Authority
    → Intake
    → Acquisition
    → Analysis
    → Complete
    Mobile Phone
    ├── Initial Logical Acquisition
    ├── Full File System Acquisition
    └── Supplemental Acquisition
    Evidence Item
      ↓
    Acquisition
      ↓
    Storage Item

    Evidence in the Monolith Workflow

    Global Evidence Items and Case Evidence

    Evidence Management > Evidence Items

    Case > Evidence

    Ways Evidence Can Enter Monolith

    Manual Entry

    Relay Requests

    Monolith Mobile

    Smart Paste

    Create an Evidence Item

    Capture Useful Evidence Information

    Linked Contacts

    Evidence Types

    Evidence Numbering

    Intake and Chain of Custody

    Chain of custody is available for every Evidence Item and is strongly recommended when your organization needs to maintain location and custody history.

    Status, Progress, and Assignment

    Status

    Progress

    Assigned User

    Understanding the Evidence Record

    Chain of Custody

    Acquisitions

    Storage Items

    Child Items

    Evidence Photos

    Audit Logs

    Notes

    If Evidence Is Created in the Wrong Case

    Deleting Evidence can remove an important part of the Case and its historical record. Confirm that deletion is appropriate before removing an Evidence Item.

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Managing Relay Requests in Monolith
    Monolith Mobile
    Evidence Management
    Contact
    Evidence Types
    Item Number Formats
    Item Locations
    Storage Items
    Audits
    Evidence Management
    Item Locations
    Storage Items
    Audits
    Requested extraction type
  • Evidence-specific handling instructions

  • Enable the Custom Inquiry Field for Relay.

  • When an Inquiry is used to create a new Monolith Case, the mapped Inquiry field value is carried into the selected Case Custom Field.

  • Enter the field name.

  • Select the editor type.

  • Configure any required options, such as selection options for a drop-down field.

  • Add a description if helpful.

  • Save the field.

  • Create the case field that should store the information from the Relay inquiry.

  • Save the field.

  • Click Edit.

  • Find the Case Field Mapping option.

  • Select the appropriate mapping option.

  • Choose the Custom Case Field that should receive the inquiry response.

  • Save the field.

  • Enable the field.

    Map inquiry fields to case custom fields when the information should remain part of the case record.

  • Review enabled Relay fields periodically to make sure the request form stays clear and relevant.

  • Inquiry Field Name

    Legal Authority Provided

    Editor Type

    Drop Down Menu

    Selection Options

    Custom Evidence Fields

    Mapping Inquiry Fields to Case Custom Fields

    Mapping helps prevent important Relay request information from being left only on the original Inquiry when creating a new Case. When merging into an existing Case, review important Inquiry values separately because the Merge workflow does not populate Case-level metadata in the same way.

    Recommended Setup Workflow

    When an Inquiry is merged into an existing Case, mapped Inquiry Custom Fields should not be assumed to populate or overwrite the existing Case Custom Fields. Review those values before completing the merge and update the Case manually when needed.

    Create the Custom Inquiry Field

    Create the Custom Case Field

    Map the Inquiry Field to the Case Field

    Enable the Field for Relay

    Only enable fields that requestors should see and complete in Relay. Enabled fields are available on the Relay request form.

    Example: Legal Authority Provided

    Best Practices

    Related Documentation

    Relay Overview
    Using Relay
    Managing Relay Requests in Monolith
    Relay Administration
    If the video does not render,
    If the video does not render, watch the Monolith Case Reports walkthrough on YouTube.
    Contacts
    Relay Overview
    Managing Relay Requests in Monolith
    Custom Field Options
    Inquiries API
    Monolith Mobile
    Managing Relay Requests in Monolith

    Yes, No

    Required

    Yes

    Description

    Have the proper authority documents been attached to this request?

    Case Field Mapping

    Custom Case Field

    User Management
    watch on YouTube here
    If the video does not render,

    Reports

    Create reusable Metrics Reports to analyze Cases, Evidence, Storage, QA, Acquisitions, Time Entries, and other operational data across Monolith.

    The Reports page provides organization-wide Metrics Reports for understanding work recorded across Monolith.

    Metrics Reports can help teams review workload, activity, data volume, workflow composition, quality assurance activity, time usage, and other operational information across multiple Cases and records.

    Reports are built from the information your organization records in Monolith. Consistent use of fields such as Case Types, Evidence Types, Progress, assignments, Evidence sizes, Acquisition sizes, QA information, and Time Entries provides more meaningful reporting results.

    View Reports

    The Reports page displays Metrics Reports that you have access to based on your Monolith permissions.

    The report list can include information such as:

    • Report Name

    • Report ID

    • Category

    • Created By

    • Created On

    Standard Monolith table controls can also be used to search, filter, choose visible columns, and export information from the report list.

    See and for more information about working with Monolith tables.

    Select New Report to create a Metrics Report.

    Each report requires:

    1. Report Name — a recognizable name for the report.

    2. Report Category — determines which area of Monolith will be analyzed.

    3. Report Parameters — determines which records should be included.

    Available report categories include:

    • Cases - Overview

    • Evidence - Overview

    • Storage - Overview

    • QA Entries - Overview

    The available parameters vary by Report Category.

    Metrics Reports can be narrowed to a specific portion of your organization's data before the report is created.

    Common parameters include a Time Interval and category-specific filters.

    Time Interval options include predefined periods and a Custom date range. Examples include:

    • All Time

    • Custom

    • Today

    • Yesterday

    Some Report Categories also allow you to select which date field should be used when applying the Time Interval.

    For example, a Cases - Overview report can use:

    • Case Open Date

    • Case Closed Date

    • Last Activity Date

    Other parameters depend on the type of report being created.

    A Cases report, for example, may be filtered by:

    • Organization

    • Case Lead

    • Case Status

    • Case Type

    An Evidence report may include:

    • Organization

    • Evidence Type

    • Evidence Provider

    • Case Lead

    Report parameters are preserved with the Metrics Report and can be edited later.

    After a report is created, Monolith displays several areas of information.

    Report Details identify the report itself, including information such as:

    • Report ID

    • Report Name

    • Created By

    • Report Category

    Report Parameters show the criteria currently being used to calculate the report.

    Select Edit to change supported parameters and recalculate the report using the updated criteria.

    This allows a Metrics Report to act as a reusable reporting configuration.

    For example, an organization could maintain a recurring report and update its reporting period as needed, or create separate named reports when it wants to preserve different configurations.

    The Metrics section provides headline values calculated from the matching records.

    The metrics shown depend on the Report Category.

    Composition sections show how the matching data is distributed across important attributes.

    Composition can be displayed as:

    • Charts

    • Text

    The Text view displays the underlying counts and percentages represented by the charts.

    Reports also provide a category-specific tab containing the records represented by the report.

    For example:

    • Cases reports include a Cases tab.

    • Evidence reports include an Evidence Items tab.

    • Storage reports include a Storage Items tab.

    • QA reports include a QA Entries tab.

    These views provide convenient access to supporting record-level information.

    Available columns can be customized for at-a-glance review, although the report's Excel output may contain additional metadata beyond the columns displayed in the Monolith interface.

    Select Save Report to create a point-in-time Microsoft Excel .xlsx output of the Metrics Report.

    The Metrics Report itself remains a reusable report configuration whose parameters can continue to be edited.

    A Saved Report preserves the reporting output generated at that point in time.

    Saved Excel reports generally include:

    • Report details

    • Report parameters

    • Metrics

    • Composition counts and percentages

    Saved Reports can be downloaded or deleted from the Saved Reports tab.

    Deleting the parent Metrics Report also removes access to the Saved Reports associated with it.

    Cases - Overview provides organization-wide visibility into Case activity.

    Available parameters can include:

    • Time Interval

    • Time Dimension

    • Organization

    • Case Lead

    Headline metrics can include:

    • Cases

    • Evidence Items

    • Organizations

    • Acquisition Total

    Case Composition can break the matching Cases down by:

    • Case Type

    • Case Status

    • Case Progress

    • Organization

    The Cases tab provides supporting Case records with information such as Case Number, Case Name, Client, Organization, dates, Case Lead, Status, Type, Progress, and other available fields.

    Use this report when you want to understand overall caseload, workflow distribution, Case composition, or the Evidence and Acquisition volume associated with a group of Cases.

    Evidence - Overview provides metrics about Evidence Items recorded in Monolith.

    Available parameters can include:

    • Time Interval

    • Organization

    • Evidence Type

    • Evidence Provider

    Headline metrics include:

    • Evidence Items

    • Evidence Capacity

    • Acquired Data

    Evidence Capacity represents the combined size recorded on the matching Evidence Items.

    Acquired Data represents the combined size of Acquisitions associated with those Evidence Items.

    Evidence Composition includes:

    • Evidence Types

    • Evidence Brands

    • Evidence Progress

    • Software Used

    The Evidence Items tab provides record-level information, while the Excel output can include additional Evidence metadata such as:

    • Evidence Number

    • Case Number

    • Case Name

    • Created and Intake dates

    Use this report when you want to understand the volume and types of Evidence your organization handles, how much Evidence capacity is being recorded, how much data is being acquired, where Evidence sits in the workflow, or which forensic software is being used.

    Storage - Overview provides metrics about Storage Items created during the selected reporting period.

    Available parameters can include:

    • Time Interval

    • Storage Type

    • Storage Size

    • Storage Brand

    Headline metrics include:

    • New Storage Items

    • Data on New Items

    Storage Composition includes:

    • Storage Types

    • Storage Brands

    • Storage Sizes

    The Storage Items tab and Saved Report provide supporting information about the matching media, including available Storage, Case, Client, location, capacity, and other metadata.

    Use this report when you want visibility into storage media being introduced into your environment, the capacity represented by those items, and the types or sizes of media your organization is using.

    QA Entries - Overview provides metrics about Quality Assurance activity recorded in Monolith.

    Available parameters can include:

    • Time Interval

    • Examiner

    • Reviewer

    • Issue Type

    Headline metrics can include:

    • QA Entries

    • Cases

    • QA Entries per Case

    • Evidence Items

    QA Entry Composition can include:

    • Examiners

    • QA Issue Types

    • QA Checklists

    • QA Checklist Groups

    The QA Entries tab provides supporting review information such as:

    • Examiner

    • Reviewer

    • Case Number

    • Case Name

    Use this report to understand QA volume, the review processes being used, and trends in the kinds of QA issues being documented.

    See and for information about configuring your organization's Quality Assurance workflow.

    Acquisitions - Overview provides metrics about forensic data acquisitions recorded in Monolith.

    Available parameters include:

    • Time Interval

    • Acquisition Status

    Headline metrics can include:

    • Total Acquisitions

    • Acquisition Total

    • Average Data per Month

    • Earliest Acquisition

    Acquisition Composition includes:

    • Acquisition Types

    • Acquisition Formats

    • Software

    • Acquired By

    The Acquisitions tab provides supporting information about individual acquisition records.

    Saved Reports can include additional fields such as:

    • Image Name

    • Evidence Number

    • Case Number

    • Case Name

    Use this report to understand acquisition throughput, data volume, collection methods, image formats, forensic software usage, and the distribution of acquisition work across users.

    Time Entries - Overview provides metrics about time recorded through Monolith.

    Available parameters can include:

    • Time Interval

    • Time Dimension

    • Invoiced status

    • Time Entry Category

    Headline metrics include:

    • Entries

    • Total Time

    • Total Categories

    • Total Users

    Time Entry Composition includes:

    • Time Entry Categories

    • Invoiced status

    • Time Recorded by User

    • Time Recorded by Client Organization

    The Time Entries tab provides supporting information such as Case, organization, category, user, entry date, duration, Task information, and other available Time Entry fields.

    Use this report to understand how time is being recorded across the organization, how work is distributed between users or activity categories, and how recorded time relates to clients or invoicing workflows.

    See and for more information about recording and categorizing time in Monolith.

    The Forensic Partner Reporting - FPR report supports organizations participating in the United States Secret Service Forensic Partner reporting workflow.

    This report is available when the Forensic Partner Reports integration has been configured.

    FPR reporting includes specialized parameters, metrics, reporting categories, supporting Case and Evidence information, and an Excel output structured for the Forensic Partner reporting workflow.

    Because FPR contains additional configuration and reporting requirements beyond the standard Monolith Metrics Reports, see for information about enabling and configuring Forensic Partner Reports.

    Use the Report Category that corresponds to the information you want to understand:

    Report Category
    Useful For

    Metrics Reports reflect the information recorded throughout Monolith.

    Consistent data entry makes Analytics substantially more useful.

    Depending on the reports your organization relies on, this may include consistently recording:

    • Case Types and Statuses

    • Case and Evidence Progress

    • Case Leads and other assignments

    • Evidence Types and manufacturers

    Organizations can use these reports to build recurring operational views and better understand how work moves through the lab or team over time.

    For reporting needs that require a different level of detail, Monolith also supports filtered table exports and programmatic access through the API.

    Access to Metrics Reports is controlled through Monolith user permissions.

    Permissions determine whether a user can perform supported actions such as viewing, creating, updating, or deleting Metrics Reports.

    Available report data is also subject to the information and records the user is permitted to access within Monolith.

    Template Variables

    Reference the Monolith variables available for Custom Report Templates, including Case, Evidence, Chain of Custody, Acquisition, Note, organization, and user data.

    Template Variables are the data fields available when building Custom Report Templates.

    Use these variables inside a Microsoft Word .docx template to populate information from Monolith when a Case Report is generated.

    This page is a reference for the supported variables and data objects available to report templates. For instructions on building templates, loops, tables, and conditional logic, see .

    Template data generally falls into two categories:

    • Single-value objects, such as Case, organization, user, or report information

    Relay Administration

    Configure your Relay tenant, manage requestor access, provide intake instructions, and control which custom fields appear in Relay.

    Relay administrators configure the request portal from within Monolith under Settings > Relay Settings.

    These settings control how requestors access your Relay tenant, how the portal is presented, who is allowed to submit requests, what guidance users see before submitting, and which supported custom fields are included in the request workflow.

    In Monolith, navigate to:

    Settings > Relay Settings

    Relay configuration is divided into four areas:

    • Basic Details

    watch on YouTube here.
    If the video does not render, watch the Custom Report Templates walkthrough on YouTube.

    Acquisitions - Overview

  • Time Entries - Overview

  • Forensic Partner Reporting - FPR, when configured

  • This Week
  • Last Week

  • This Month

  • Other supported reporting periods

  • Case Type
  • Case Status

  • Acquisition reports include an Acquisitions tab.

  • Time reports include a Time Entries tab.

  • Detailed supporting records and additional metadata
    Case Status
  • Case Type

  • Evidence Total
  • Average Close Rate

  • Case Lead
  • Case Type

  • Case Status

  • UUID
  • Type

  • Locations

  • Progress

  • Brand

  • Item Name

  • Model and Serial Number

  • Size

  • Received By and Received From

  • Office

  • Linked Contact

  • Client and Organization

  • Description

  • Other supported Evidence fields and Custom Field values

  • Storage Model
    Status
    QA Entries per Evidence Item
    Evidence Number
  • Issue Type

  • Resolution status

  • QA Item

  • QA Checklist

  • Details

  • Resolution

  • Notes

  • Latest Acquisition
    Format
  • Size

  • Method

  • Acquisition Date

  • Acquired By

  • Software and Version

  • Storage Number

  • Hash information

  • Linked Contact

  • Notes

  • Related Evidence information

  • Client and Organization

  • User
    Total Organizations

    QA Entries - Overview

    QA volume, Issue Types, checklists, and review activity

    Acquisitions - Overview

    Acquisition throughput, data volume, methods, formats, software, and work distribution

    Time Entries - Overview

    Recorded hours, work categories, users, organizations, and invoicing status

    Forensic Partner Reporting - FPR

    Specialized USSS Forensic Partner reporting

    Evidence sizes
  • Acquisition sizes, formats, methods, and software

  • Storage Item details

  • QA activity

  • Time Entries and Categories

  • Clients and Organizations

  • Evidence Items

  • Storage Items

  • QA Checklist Items

  • QA Issue Types

  • Time Entry Categories

  • Tasks

  • Integrations

  • Monolith API

  • Cases - Overview

    Caseload, Case Types, Statuses, Progress, organizations, and related Evidence or Acquisition volume

    Evidence - Overview

    Evidence volume, capacity, acquired data, Types, Brands, Progress, and software usage

    Storage - Overview

    Create a Metrics Report

    Report Parameters

    Work With a Metrics Report

    Report Details

    Report Parameters

    Metrics

    Composition

    Underlying Records

    Save a Report

    Use Saved Reports when you want to retain a specific reporting output before changing the parameters of a reusable Metrics Report.

    Cases - Overview

    Evidence - Overview

    Storage - Overview

    QA Entries - Overview

    Acquisitions - Overview

    Time Entries - Overview

    Forensic Partner Reporting - FPR

    Choosing a Report

    Getting Better Reporting Results

    Permissions

    Related Documentation

    Tables
    Query Filter
    QA Checklist Items
    QA Issue Types
    Time Entry Categories
    Tasks
    Integrations
    Analytics
    Tables
    Query Filter
    Cases

    New Storage Items, capacity, media Types, Brands, and Sizes

    Lists of records, such as Evidence Items, Acquisitions, Notes, or Chain of Custody entries

    Single values can usually be inserted directly into a template:

    Lists must generally be used inside a loop:

    Use the tables below to identify the variable name, data type, and information available to your template.

    Case Report Variables contain information entered specifically for the report being generated, such as the Report Summary, Analysis, and Report Name.

    These values come from the report workflow rather than directly from the underlying Case record.

    Variable Name
    Description

    {{ report.summary }}

    This is the report summary data that was entered into the summary tab of a Monolith case report.

    {{ report.analysis }}

    This is the analysis data that was entered into the analysis tab of a Monolith case report.

    {{ report.name }}

    Organization Variables reference information configured for your organization in Monolith.

    These values are useful for report headers, organization details, contact information, and other reusable organization-level content.

    Organization information is managed under Settings > Organization Info.

    Variable Name
    Description

    {{ org.name }}

    Name of your agency, company, or organization.

    {{ org.address }}

    Street address of organization.

    {{ org.city }}

    Current User Variables reference the Monolith user generating the report.

    These values can be used to include examiner or report-author information such as the user's name, email address, title, or assigned Office.

    Variable Name
    Description

    {{ user.first_name }}

    First Name of user. (Jane)

    {{ user.last_name }}

    Last name of user. (Doe)

    {{ user.full_name }}

    Case Variables contain information from the Case for which the report is being generated.

    These values include identifying information, dates, Status, Type, Progress, Case Lead information, Description, and supported Case Custom Fields.

    See Cases for information about the Case record and the metadata available throughout Monolith.

    Variable Name
    Type
    Description

    {{ case.case_id }}

    Number

    Integer based, unique id set by Monolith for the case.

    {{ case.uuid }}

    Evidence Variables contain information from the Evidence Items selected for the report.

    Because a Case can contain multiple Evidence Items, the evidence object is a list and its values must be referenced within a loop.

    For example:

    Evidence data can include identifying information, item metadata, Progress, Linked Contacts, Photos, Custom Fields, and Chain of Custody records.

    See Evidence Items for information about the Evidence record in Monolith.

    Variable Name
    Type
    Description

    {{ item.evidence_id }}

    Number

    Unique ID of evidence

    {{ item.uuid }}

    Chain of Custody records are available through the {{ item.coc }} list associated with each Evidence Item.

    Because Chain of Custody is nested beneath Evidence, templates first loop through the selected Evidence Items and then loop through the Chain of Custody records associated with each item.

    The example below demonstrates this nested relationship.

    Variable Name
    Type
    Description

    {{ record.type }}

    string

    Type of COC record: Intake, Release, Move, etc...

    {{ record.custody_to }}

    string

    Acquisition Variables contain information from the Acquisitions selected for the report.

    Because a Case can contain multiple Acquisitions, the acquisitions object is a list and must be referenced within a loop.

    Acquisition data can include the acquisition name, type, format, size, date, examiner, linked Evidence, forensic software, Storage Item, duration, Contacts, and supported Custom Fields.

    Variable Name
    Type
    Description

    {{ item.acquisition_id }}

    Number

    Unique ID of item.

    {{ item.uuid }}

    Notes Variables provide access to Notes selected for the report, including both Note metadata and rich-text content.

    Because notes is a list, Note values must be referenced within a loop.

    Note content can be rendered as either plain text or rich text. Use the r option when the generated Word report should preserve supported rich-text content, including pasted images.

    In order to render the note content as rich text data within the Word document, be sure to use the following syntax:

    Similar to the evidence data, the 'notes' template data is a list of notes, so you must place the note template data inside of a loop to access it and display note content within the template report.

    Variable Name
    Type
    Decription

    {{r note.content }}

    Rich Text or Plain Text

    This is the note content - use 'r' to output as rich text. Includes pasted images as well.

    {{ note.title }}

    String

    When building a Custom Report Template:

    • Copy variable names exactly as shown in this reference.

    • Use loops when working with Evidence, Acquisitions, Notes, and other lists of records.

    • Make sure every loop has a matching {% endfor %} statement.

    • Use the appropriate rich-text syntax when rendering Note content.

    • Test the template frequently as variables and logic are added.

    • Confirm that the underlying Monolith records contain the information you expect to appear in the report.

    For complete template-building guidance, see Custom Report Templates.

    For working examples and downloadable templates, see Template Examples.

    • Custom Report Templates

    • Template Examples

    • Monolith Case Reports

    • Cases

    Using This Reference

    Custom Report Templates
    {{ case.case_number }}
    {% for item in evidence %}
    {{ item.evidence_number }}
    {% endfor %}
    {% for item in evidence %}
    {{ item.evidence_id }}
    {% endfor %}
    Chain of Custody Example:
    
    // Loop through evidence items
    {% for item in evidence %}
    
        // Loop through evidence item COC records
        {% for record in item.coc %}
        
            // Output COC record details
            {{ record.type }}
            {{ record.custody_to }}
            {{ record.custody_from }}
            {{ record.timestamp }}
            {{ record.reason }}
            
        // End loop for COC records
        {% endfor %}
        
    // End loop for evidence items
    {% endfor %}
    Example:
    {% for item in acquisitions %}
    {{ item.acquisition_id }}
    {% endfor %}
    // Notes template example
    // use 'r' inside the template declaration to output the note content as rich text
    // remove the 'r' to output as plain text data
    
    {% for note in notes %}
    {{r note.content }}
    {% endfor %}

    Start with a small number of variables and generate a test report before building more complex loops, tables, or conditional logic.

    Case Report Variables

    Currently, the summary and analysis variables do not include any rich text formatting like bold, bullets, or underline. Pasted images are also not included in the template when generated.

    Organization Variables

    Current User Variables

    Case Variables

    Evidence Variables

    Evidence photos are stored in an array/list and must be referenced within for loop syntax.

    Chain of Custody Variables

    Acquisition Variables

    Notes Variables

    Notes data can be accessed using the "notes" variable

    Working With Template Variables

    Related Documentation

    User Management

  • Instructions

  • Custom Field Options

  • Each area controls a different part of the Relay experience.

    Use Basic Details to configure the identity and access information for your Relay tenant.

    Available settings include:

    • Tenant Logo — The logo displayed to requestors in Relay.

    • Tenant Name — The name of your organization as it appears in Relay.

    • Relay URL Slug — The unique identifier used to create your organization's Relay URL.

    • Tenant Email — The default email address for the Relay tenant. Relay notifications, such as new users and requests, are sent to this address.

    Your Relay URL provides the requestor-facing entry point to your organization's portal. The URL can be distributed to investigators, employees, attorneys, partner organizations, or other people who need to submit work to your team.

    The Relay URL Slug determines the unique portion of that address. Choose a recognizable identifier that is appropriate for long-term use.

    Use User Management to control who can access your Relay tenant.

    Administrators can:

    • Invite users directly

    • Review users who registered through your tenant URL

    • Approve or deny access

    • Manage existing Relay users

    • Assign appropriate Relay permissions

    • Assign Relay Admin access to Monolith users who also need to review or communicate through Relay

    Relay users do not consume Monolith licenses, allowing organizations to support a much larger population of requestors than their licensed Monolith user base.

    A Relay account may also have access to multiple Relay tenants when different forensic organizations have granted that user access.

    See User Management for more information.

    Use the Instructions tab to provide guidance that requestors see before beginning a new Relay request.

    Instructions can help communicate your organization's intake expectations before a request is submitted.

    For example, you may ask requestors to:

    • Provide a case number or matter name

    • Describe the requested forensic work

    • Include relevant supporting documentation

    • Provide detailed evidence information

    • Identify relevant contacts

    • Follow specific physical evidence delivery procedures

    Clear instructions can help reduce incomplete submissions and unnecessary follow-up during intake.

    Relay provides a standardized request workflow while allowing organizations to expose supported custom fields when additional information is needed.

    Use Custom Field Options to control which configured Inquiry and Evidence custom fields appear to Relay requestors.

    Custom Inquiry fields can also be mapped to Custom Case fields so information collected during request intake can carry forward when the Inquiry becomes a Monolith case.

    This is useful for collecting organization-specific information without maintaining a separate intake form.

    See Custom Field Options for setup instructions.

    Relay and Monolith currently use separate user accounts.

    A Monolith administrator can configure Relay from Settings > Relay Settings, but Monolith access alone does not automatically provide access to the Relay application.

    If a Monolith user needs to:

    • Review requests directly in Relay

    • Access All Requests

    • Communicate with requestors through Relay Comments

    • Use @mentions

    • Perform Relay administrative actions

    that user should also have a Relay account with the appropriate Relay permissions.

    Relay uses its own authentication system separate from Monolith.

    Organizations can use the standard Relay username and password workflow or configure Single Sign-On (SSO).

    Relay SSO is configured separately from Monolith SSO, even when both applications use the same identity provider.

    See Single Sign-On (SSO) for additional information.

    When configuring a new Relay tenant, a practical setup sequence is:

    1. Configure Basic Details and confirm the Relay tenant URL.

    2. Make sure the Monolith users who will administer or communicate through Relay also have Relay accounts with the appropriate permissions.

    3. Configure Request Instructions for your intake process.

    4. Review Custom Field Options and enable any additional information your team wants to collect.

    5. Invite a small group of test users.

    6. Submit a test request through Relay.

    7. Confirm that the request appears correctly under in Monolith.

    8. Review the complete request-to-case workflow before distributing the Relay URL broadly.

    Testing the workflow from both the requestor and forensic-team perspectives can help identify missing instructions, fields, or access requirements before wider adoption.

    • Relay Overview

    • Using Relay

    • Managing Relay Requests in Monolith

    • User Management

    Access Relay Settings

    Basic Details

    Users who register through your Relay URL do not automatically receive access to the tenant. Their access must still be approved through User Management.

    User Management

    Request Instructions

    Keep request instructions focused on what the requestor needs to know before submitting. This is a good place to explain required documentation, evidence drop-off procedures, intake expectations, or other organization-specific requirements.

    Custom Field Options

    Relay Administration and Monolith Users

    For teams actively using Relay, consider ensuring that the Monolith users responsible for request triage also have the appropriate Relay access. This allows them to move between Monolith's Inquiry workflow and Relay's request communication tools when needed.

    Relay Authentication

    Recommended Setup Order

    Related Documentation

    Cases

    Create and manage cases as the central workspace for evidence, acquisitions, tasks, documentation, people, quality assurance, reporting, and other forensic work in Monolith.

    A Case is the central Monolith record representing an investigation, matter, request for work, or other unit of forensic casework.

    Cases bring the information and activity associated with that work together in one place. Instead of maintaining separate spreadsheets, notes, evidence trackers, task systems, file repositories, and reports, Monolith connects those records back to the Case they belong to.

    A Case can bring together:

    • Evidence Items

    • Acquisitions

    • Storage Items

    • Clients and Contacts

    • Tasks

    • Notes

    • Files

    • Quality Assurance

    • Reports

    • Activity history

    • Assignments

    • Custom Fields

    • Status and Progress information

    This makes the Case the primary workspace for understanding what the work is, who is responsible for it, what has been collected, where each part of the workflow stands, and what has happened over time.

    Most Monolith workflows eventually center around a Case.

    A common workflow looks like:

    Not every organization follows the same process. Monolith allows teams to configure Case Types, Progress stages, , and other options around the way their lab or organization actually works.

    The Case provides the overall structure while individual Evidence Items, Tasks, Acquisitions, and other records can progress independently within it.

    There are two useful frames of reference when working with Cases.

    The main Cases page provides an organization-wide view of Case records available to you.

    Use this view to:

    • Search for Cases

    • Filter and sort Case information

    • Review work across the organization

    • Focus on Cases you are assigned to

    The My Cases view focuses on Cases where you are assigned in some way. The Cases visible in the broader view depend on your Monolith account access and permissions.

    Opening a Case takes you into the workspace for that specific investigation or matter.

    From there, you can work with its Evidence, Acquisitions, Storage Items, Tasks, Notes, Files, Contacts, Quality Assurance, Reports, and other related information without losing the Case context.

    Cases can enter Monolith through several workflows.

    Users can create a Case directly from Case Management > Cases.

    This is useful when your team already has the information needed to begin work and does not need a separate request or triage process.

    Requests submitted through Relay arrive in Monolith as Inquiries.

    After reviewing the request, your team can use the Inquiry to create a new Case. Supported request information can carry forward into the Case, including Evidence, Contacts, files, requestor information, and mapped Custom Fields.

    This reduces duplicate data entry between request intake and active casework.

    When a new request belongs to a Case that already exists, the Inquiry can be merged into that Case rather than creating a duplicate Case.

    Merge Inquiry can add selected Evidence Items, Contacts, and Documents while preserving the Case's existing metadata.

    Review the Inquiry for any request narrative, Custom Field values, or other Case-level information that should also be manually added to the existing Case.

    See for detailed Create Case and Merge Inquiry behavior.

    Organizations integrating Monolith with another system can also create and work with Cases through the Monolith API.

    See for available endpoints and implementation details.

    To create a Case:

    1. Navigate to Case Management > Cases.

    2. Select Create Case.

    3. Enter or review the Case Number.

    4. Enter a Case Name.

    Not every field is required. Capture the information that is useful to your workflow and reporting requirements.

    The Case Number provides the structured identifier used to reference the Case.

    Monolith can automatically generate Case Numbers using the format configured by your organization under Settings > .

    Using a consistent Case Number format is recommended because it provides a stable identifier that can be searched, reported on, and referenced across your organization.

    The Case Name provides a more human-readable description of the investigation or matter.

    For example, a Case Number may follow an organization's formal numbering convention while the Case Name identifies the project, investigation, incident, or matter in language that users can quickly recognize.

    A Case can be associated with a Client representing the person or organization requesting the work.

    A Client is optional during Case creation and can be updated later.

    When a Case originates from a Relay Inquiry, the requestor can carry forward as the Client during the create or merge workflow.

    See for additional information.

    Case Types classify the kinds of work your organization performs.

    The categories that make sense depend on the organization.

    A law enforcement laboratory might use Case Types related to crimes or investigative categories, while a corporate, consulting, or legal team might use categories such as internal investigations, data breaches, legal matters, or other service types.

    Consistent Case Types improve filtering, reporting, analytics, and historical understanding of the work your team performs.

    See for configuration guidance.

    Case Priority provides a quick indication of relative urgency.

    Available priorities are:

    • Urgent

    • High

    • Low

    • None

    Priority is separate from Status and Progress. It describes how urgently the Case should be treated rather than where it is in the workflow.

    Custom Fields allow your organization to capture additional Case information that is specific to your workflow.

    For example, an organization might track internal identifiers, legal information, referral details, matter attributes, or other metadata that is not part of the standard Case form.

    Capturing useful structured information makes that data available for filtering, reporting, templates, integrations, and future reference.

    Monolith separates several concepts that are often combined in simpler case tracking systems.

    Each answers a different operational question.

    Case Status describes the current state of the Case.

    Active and Closed are permanent Monolith statuses and control whether the Case is considered open or closed.

    Organizations can create additional Case Statuses to describe other states used in their workflow. These additional statuses provide useful classification without closing the Case.

    When a Case is changed to Closed, Monolith records the Case as closed and maintains the associated Case Close Date information.

    See for configuration guidance.

    Case Progress represents where the overall Case sits within your organization's workflow.

    Progress stages are configurable.

    For example, a forensic workflow might include stages such as:

    This is only an example. Organizations should configure Case Progress around the stages that are meaningful to their own process.

    Case Progress provides a quick visual pipeline across the top of the Case workspace.

    See for configuration guidance.

    The Case Overview also provides calculated progress information based on work associated with the Case.

    Total Progress considers completion across:

    • Tasks

    • Evidence Items

    • QA Reviews

    My Progress provides a similar view scoped to work associated with the current user.

    These metrics provide another perspective on Case completion alongside the configurable Case Progress pipeline.

    The pipeline answers:

    Where is the Case in our process?

    The calculated progress metrics help answer:

    How much of the work associated with the Case has been completed?

    A Case can have one Case Lead.

    The Case Lead identifies the primary person responsible for the Case. When a Case Lead is assigned, the Case is associated with that user's Office.

    User accounts and Office assignments are managed through .

    A Case does not require a Case Lead, although assigning one can provide clearer ownership and workload visibility.

    Additional users can be assigned to the Case.

    Assignments provide users with access to the Case based on their permissions and allow work within the Case to be distributed across the team.

    Users assigned to the Case can also be selected for other Case-related responsibilities, such as Evidence assignments.

    Groups allow multiple users to be associated with a Case more efficiently.

    This can be useful when a team, unit, or group of examiners routinely works on the same Cases.

    Together, Case Lead, User Assignments, and Group Assignments provide different ways to establish ownership and collaboration.

    The Case workspace brings the major parts of the Case together through a set of tabs.

    Depending on your Monolith configuration, available areas may include:

    • Overview

    • Evidence

    • Acquisitions

    • Storage Items

    Some features, including Analysis and eDiscovery, may not be enabled in every Monolith environment.

    The Overview tab acts as the Case command center.

    It brings together information such as:

    • Case Number and Name

    • Status

    • Progress

    • Priority

    Use the Overview to quickly understand the Case before moving into its more detailed workflows.

    The Evidence tab contains the Evidence Items associated with the Case.

    Evidence represents the devices, data sources, accounts, media, and other items connected to the forensic work.

    Individual Evidence Items can maintain their own metadata, assignment, Progress, Chain of Custody, location, Acquisitions, Photos, Notes, and other information while remaining associated with the overall Case.

    See Evidence Items for detailed guidance.

    The Acquisitions tab tracks forensic collections, images, extractions, exports, or other acquisition activity performed as part of the Case.

    An Acquisition can be associated with an Evidence Item when it originates from a specific source.

    Useful Acquisition information can include:

    • Acquisition Name

    • Evidence Item

    • Format

    • Type

    Associating an Acquisition with its source Evidence Item creates a stronger relationship between the source, collection activity, and resulting forensic data. It also improves how that information can be used later in reporting.

    The Storage Items tab contains storage specifically assigned to the Case.

    Assigned Storage Items are available for that Case until they are unassigned.

    Monolith also supports general Storage Items that can be used across Cases. Forensic Acquisitions can be associated with the appropriate Storage Item to record where the acquired data is being preserved.

    See Storage Items for additional guidance.

    The Tasks tab shows work associated with the Case.

    Tasks can be created for the Case generally or associated with a specific Evidence Item when additional context is useful. Tasks can include assignments, due dates, categories, priorities, subtasks, and other workflow information.

    Task Templates can be used to recreate repeatable workflows. For example, a team might create an iPhone Collection template containing the standard steps that should be completed each time that type of work is performed.

    This can help teams:

    • Standardize repeatable procedures

    • Assign work consistently

    • Break larger workflows into subtasks

    • Track completion across the Case

    Keeping Tasks connected to the Case helps users understand not only what needs to be done, but which investigation and Evidence Item the work relates to.

    The Notes tab provides a rich workspace for documenting Case-specific information directly within Monolith.

    Case Notes can be used for investigative notes, examination details, findings, summaries, procedural documentation, or other information that belongs to the overall Case.

    The Notes editor supports structured content such as:

    • Formatted text

    • Tables

    • Images and pasted screenshots

    • Links

    can also be used to standardize information your team records repeatedly. For example, a team may create templates for common examination procedures, intake documentation, findings, or other recurring note formats.

    Evidence Items can maintain their own Notes when information relates more specifically to an individual source.

    Keeping Notes inside Monolith preserves the context of the work and allows supported information to be incorporated into Case Reports.

    The Files tab provides a Case-level repository for documents and other files associated with the Case.

    This can include reports, supporting documents, exports, working files, and other Case documentation.

    Files stored in Monolith can also be shared with approved Relay users through when external file sharing is needed.

    Organizations that want to use Monolith for larger forensic images, long-term digital evidence, or high-volume file storage can also use Monolith's expanded digital evidence storage capabilities.

    See the for additional information about large-scale storage options.

    The Contacts tab contains the people associated with the Case.

    Contacts can represent anyone relevant to the investigation or matter.

    Examples include:

    • Custodians

    • Employees

    • Investigators

    • Attorneys

    Contacts can also be associated with individual Evidence Items or Acquisitions when that relationship is useful.

    Contacts can be added manually, imported by CSV, sourced through supported Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 integrations, or managed through the .

    See for additional guidance.

    The Quality Assurance tab supports review workflows where another team member needs to verify part of the Case or forensic work.

    A QA Review can use a configured checklist and be assigned to another Monolith user. The assigned reviewer receives the related work and can complete the review within the Case.

    This can support peer review, technical review, internal quality processes, and organizations with formal accreditation or review requirements.

    The Reports tab turns information collected throughout the Case into an editable Microsoft Word report.

    Reports can incorporate supported information from the Case, including Evidence, Acquisitions, Chain of Custody, Notes, Contacts, Tasks, analysis, and other Case data.

    Monolith provides a standard report builder, and organizations can also use customized Word templates to match their own reporting requirements.

    Because the report is generated as a .docx file, users can make final edits before delivering or archiving it.

    See for detailed reporting guidance.

    The Activity tab provides a historical view of recorded activity associated with the Case.

    Entries generally identify the time, user, and activity performed.

    This provides useful context when reviewing how a Case has changed over time.

    The Activity tab is not intended to represent every possible action performed anywhere in Monolith.

    Some Monolith environments may also include Analysis or eDiscovery.

    Analysis provides timeline-oriented analysis capabilities for tracking events and related investigative information.

    eDiscovery provides tools for tracking legal holds and related eDiscovery workflows.

    These features may not be enabled in every environment.

    When work is complete, changing the Case Status to Closed marks the Case as closed and records the Case Close Date.

    A closed Case remains part of the organization's historical record.

    Closing a Case does not necessarily prevent an authorized user from opening the Case or adding information later if additional work is required.

    Case information can be edited when information changes or needs to be corrected.

    Deleting a Case is also available to users with the appropriate permissions.

    A well-maintained Case record provides more than a place to store information about one investigation.

    Consistent Case data supports:

    • Faster searching and historical lookup

    • Better handoffs between examiners

    • Clearer ownership and assignments

    • Workload and backlog visibility

    The goal is to maintain a Case record that remains understandable and useful throughout the work and long after the Case has been completed.

    • Use a consistent Case Number format across the organization.

    • Enter a clear Case Name that users can quickly recognize.

    • Use Case Types that reflect the work your organization actually performs.

    • Capture useful structured metadata and Custom Fields when that information matters to your workflow.

    Item Labels

    Upload DYMO label templates and use Monolith variables to print labels for evidence, storage items, people, and related records.

    Monolith supports custom DYMO label templates for evidence items, storage items, and people records such as clients and contacts.

    Custom labels can include static text, barcodes, QR codes, and Monolith variables. When a label is printed, Monolith replaces each variable with the matching value from the item being printed.

    To add a label template:

    1. Open Settings.

    2. Select Item Labels.

    This is the name of your report instance.

    City location of your organization.

    {{ org.state }}

    State or province of your organization

    {{ org.zipcode }}

    Postal code of your organization

    {{ org.email }}

    Email set for your organization.

    {{ org.website }}

    Website URL set for your organization.

    First name and last name combined. (Jane Doe)

    {{ user.email }}

    User email address.

    {{ user.title }}

    User title set in Monolith.

    {{ user.office }}

    Office location that the user is assigned to.

    {{ user.user_id }}

    Integer based user id stored by Monolith.

    String

    String based, unique id set by Monolith for the case.

    {{ case.case_number }}

    String

    Case number for the case.

    {{ case.case_name }}

    String

    Case name/reference set for the case.

    {{ case.case_open_date }}

    Date

    Case open date in the format "YYYY-MM-DD".

    {{ case.case_closed_date }}

    Date

    Case closed date in the format "YYYY-MM-DD".

    {{ case.last_activity_date }}

    Date

    Case last activity date in the format "YYYY-MM-DD".

    {{ case.case_status }}

    String

    Current status of case.

    {{ case.case_type }}

    String

    Current case type.

    {{ case.case_progress }}

    String

    Current progress status of case.

    {{ case.description }}

    String

    Description of the current case.

    {{ case.case_lead }}

    {user_id, first_name, last_name, full_name, email, title}

    Properties related to the user assigned as a case lead.

    {{ case.custom_field_id }}

    {name, value}

    Case custom field value - replace 'id' with custom field id number.

    String

    Unique ID of evidence

    {{ item.evidence_number }}

    String

    Item evidence number

    {{ item.evidence_type }}

    String

    Type of evidence

    {{ item.provider }}

    String

    Service provider/manufacturer

    {{ item.item_name }}

    String

    Item name

    {{ item.capacity }}

    Number

    Size of item

    {{ item.capacity_unit }}

    String

    Size units: KB, MB, GB, TB

    {{ item.size }}

    Number

    Size of item

    {{ item.size_unit }}

    String

    Size units: KB, MB, GB, TB

    {{ item.description }}

    String

    Description of item

    {{ item.progress }}

    String

    Progress status of item

    {{ item.created_on }}

    Timestamp

    Creation Timestamp

    {{ item.linked_contact }}

    String

    Name of linked contact

    {{ item.evidence_photos }}

    [{name, image}]

    Array/list of evidence photos

    {{ item.custom_field_id }}

    {name, value}

    Custom field value - ID is a number that uniquely identifies a custom field.

    {{ item.coc }}

    Chain of Custody List

    List of chain of custody records for this evidence item.

    Person or location that received the item.

    {{ record.custody_from }}

    string

    Person or location that provided the item.

    {{ record.timestamp }}

    string

    UTC timestamp of COC event.

    {{ record.reason }}

    string

    Notes or reason provided for COC event.

    String

    Unique ID of item.

    {{ item.name }}

    String

    Name of item.

    {{ item.description }}

    String

    Description of item.

    {{ item.size }}

    Number

    Size of item in numbers.

    {{ item.size_unit }}

    String

    Units of item size: KB,MB,GB,TB.

    {{ item.format }}

    String

    Format of acquisition Ex. E01, DD, ZIP.

    {{ item.type }}

    String

    Type of acquisition: Ex. File System, Physical, Chip-off.

    {{ item.status }}

    String

    Active or Deleted.

    {{ item.acquired_on }}

    Date

    Date of acquistion.

    {{ item.created_on }}

    Date

    Date of record creation.

    {{ item.acquired_by }}

    {full_name, user_id, email, title}

    The user that acquired this data.

    {{ item.linked_contact }}

    {name, contact_id}

    The person that this acquisition is associated with.

    {{ item.evidence }}

    {evidence_id, uuid, evidence_number}

    Evidence linked to acquisition.

    {{ item.tool }}

    {name, version}

    Software uses to create acquisition.

    {{ item.storage }}

    {storage_id, uuid, storage_number}

    Storage item where acquisition is stored.

    {{ item.duration }}

    {hours, mins}

    Time spent creating acquisition.

    {{ item.custom_field_id }}

    {name, value}

    Custom Field Value

    This is the note title

    {{ note.uuid }}

    String

    This is the unique identifier assigned by Monolith to the note.

    {{ note.created_on }}

    ISO String

    Creation timestamp of note

    {{ note.updated_on }}

    ISO String

    Last Update time of note

    {{ note.created_by }}

    User Object

    User that created the note

    {{ note.linked_object }}

    Object Link {

    type: string,

    name: string,

    id: string

    }

    This is an object that is linked to the note such as a case, evidence item, or task.

    Evidence Items
    Case Management > Inquiries
    Custom Field Options
    Single Sign-On (SSO)
    Create a new Case
  • Open an existing Case

  • Select a Client, if applicable.

  • Select a Case Type.

  • Select the appropriate Case Status.

  • Select a Case Lead, if applicable.

  • Enter the Case Open Date.

  • Select a Case Priority.

  • Enter a Description.

  • Complete any applicable Custom Fields.

  • Select Create Case.

  • Analysis
  • eDiscovery

  • Tasks

  • Notes

  • Files

  • Contacts

  • Quality Assurance

  • Reports

  • Activity

  • Open and Close Dates
  • Last Activity

  • Case Lead

  • Office

  • Client

  • Case Type

  • Evidence and Acquisition counts

  • Task information

  • User and Group assignments

  • Custom Fields

  • Description

  • Progress metrics

  • Forensic Software and version
  • Size

  • Storage Item

  • Hash values and algorithms

  • Acquisition Date

  • Duration

  • Acquired By

  • Linked Contact

  • Notes

  • Custom Fields

  • Reduce the need to recreate the same task structure for every Case
    Other rich note content
    Suspects
  • Victims

  • Witnesses

  • Contractors

  • Device owners

  • Account holders

  • Other involved people

  • Progress tracking

  • Consistent evidence and acquisition relationships

  • More complete reporting

  • Quality assurance

  • Management reporting and analytics

  • API and integration workflows

  • Long-term institutional knowledge

  • Assign a Case Lead when clear ownership is important.

  • Use User and Group assignments to support collaboration.

  • Keep Case Status, Progress, Priority, and assignments focused on the different questions they are designed to answer.

  • Create Evidence Items for the individual sources involved in the Case.

  • Associate Acquisitions with Evidence when the source relationship is known.

  • Use Tasks, Notes, Contacts, QA, and Files within the Case so related work stays connected.

  • Keep information current so searches, reports, analytics, and future reviewers can rely on the Case record.

  • Close Cases when work has been completed rather than leaving completed work indefinitely active.

  • Storage Items

  • Contacts

  • Managing Relay Requests in Monolith

  • Cases API

  • Request or Case Creation
            ↓
    Case
            ↓
    Evidence
            ↓
    Acquisitions and Forensic Work
            ↓
    Documentation, Tasks, and QA
            ↓
    Reporting
    Pending
    → Processing
    → Preservation
    → Collection
    → Analysis
    → Reporting
    → Case Completed

    Cases in the Monolith Workflow

    Global Cases and the Case Workspace

    Case Management > Cases

    Inside a Case

    Video Walkthrough - Case Workspace

    Ways Cases Enter Monolith

    Create a Case Manually

    Create a Case From an Inquiry

    Merge an Inquiry Into an Existing Case

    Cases API

    Historical data migrations are typically coordinated during Monolith implementation rather than performed through the normal Case creation workflow.

    Create a Case

    Case Number and Case Name

    Clients

    Case Types

    Case Priority

    Custom Fields

    Status, Progress, and Assignment

    Case Status

    Case Progress

    Case Progress Metrics

    Case Lead

    User Assignments

    Group Assignments

    Understanding the Case Workspace

    Overview

    Evidence

    Acquisitions

    Storage Items

    Tasks

    Notes

    Files

    Contacts

    Quality Assurance

    Reports

    Activity

    Optional Analysis and eDiscovery Features

    Closing a Case

    Editing and Deleting Cases

    Deleting a Case can remove a significant part of your organization's historical forensic record. Monolith asks for confirmation before deletion. Review the Case and its associated information carefully before proceeding.

    Why Structured Case Information Matters

    Recommended Practices

    Related Documentation

    Custom Fields
    Inquiries
    Cases API
    Item Number Formats
    Clients
    Case Types
    Case Statuses
    Case Progress
    Team Management
    Editor Templates
    Case Drives
    Digital Evidence Storage product page
    Contacts API
    Contacts
    Case Reports
    Case Management
    Case Reports
    Inquiries
    Evidence Items
    The create a case form inside of Monolith

    Click Add Label.

  • Upload your Dymo label file.

  • Save the label template.

  • After a label has been added, it can be selected when printing supported item labels from Monolith.

    Monolith variables allow your DYMO labels to automatically populate with information from Monolith records.

    For example, an evidence label can include the evidence number, case number, evidence type, current location, linked contact, UUID, or other supported values.

    There are two supported variable formats:

    Syntax
    Example
    Notes

    Modern

    {{ evidence.evidence_number }}

    Recommended for all new labels.

    Legacy

    #evidence_number

    Variables are placeholders typed into text fields, barcode fields, or QR code fields in a DYMO label template. When the label prints, Monolith replaces each placeholder with the matching data value.

    A few things to know:

    • Variables are case-insensitive.

    • Variables only populate when they apply to the item being printed.

    • If the underlying field is empty, the variable prints as a blank value.

    • Special characters such as &, <, >, ", and ' are automatically escaped so they render correctly on the label.

    • QR codes and barcodes can be created by pointing the code field to a supported UUID or short UUID variable.

    Organization variables are available across label types and are pulled from your organization settings.

    Modern Variable
    Legacy Variable
    Description

    {{ organization.name }}

    #org_name

    Your organization's name.

    {{ organization.address }}

    #org_address

    Evidence variables are available when printing a label for an evidence item.

    Modern Variable
    Legacy Variable
    Description

    {{ evidence.evidence_number }}

    #evidence_number

    The evidence number or name.

    {{ evidence.case_number }}

    Storage variables are available when printing a label for a storage item.

    Modern Variable
    Legacy Variable
    Description

    {{ storage.storage_number }}

    #storage_number

    The storage item number.

    {{ storage.case_number }}

    Case variables are available when there is a case context for the label, such as when the item being printed is associated with a case.

    Case variables use the modern syntax only.

    Modern Variable
    Description

    {{ case.case_number }}

    The case number.

    {{ case.case_name }}

    The case name.

    {{ case.type }}

    Client variables are available when a client is associated with the label.

    Client variables use the modern syntax only.

    Modern Variable
    Description

    {{ client.name }}

    The client name.

    {{ client.address }}

    The client address.

    {{ client.city }}

    People variables are available when printing a label for a contact or association, such as a client, custodian, suspect, victim, or other related person.

    Modern Variable
    Legacy Variable
    Description

    {{ people.name }}

    #association_name

    The client or contact name.

    {{ people.address }}

    If your organization has defined custom fields, those values can also be used on labels.

    Replace <field_id> with the numeric ID of the custom field.

    Context
    Modern Variable
    Legacy Variable

    Evidence

    {{ evidence.custom_field_<field_id> }}

    #custom_field_<field_id>

    Storage

    {{ storage.custom_field_<field_id> }}

    Use a uuid variable for QR codes or a short_uuid variable for barcodes.

    When scanned in Monolith, the code can help find and navigate to the matching item.

    Common examples:

    Label Type
    QR Code Variable
    Barcode Variable

    Evidence

    {{ evidence.uuid }}

    {{ evidence.short_uuid }}

    Storage

    {{ storage.uuid }}

    You can combine static text and variables in the same label field.

    Examples:

    If a variable does not have a value for the item being printed, Monolith prints a blank value.

    For example, if an evidence item does not have a serial number, {{ evidence.serial_number }} will print as blank.

    Design labels so they still look correct when optional values are missing.

    Only variables that match the item being printed will populate.

    For example:

    • When printing an evidence label, use {{ evidence.* }} variables.

    • When printing a storage label, use {{ storage.* }} variables.

    • When printing a people label, use {{ people.* }} variables.

    • Organization variables can be used across label types.

    • Case and client variables populate when the printed item has the required case or client context.

    Adding Labels

    Case: {{ evidence.case_number }}
    Evidence: {{ evidence.evidence_number }}
    S/N: {{ evidence.serial_number }}

    Working With Variables

    Modern variables are recommended for new label templates. Legacy variables are still supported for compatibility with older labels.

    How Variables Work

    Organization Variables

    Evidence Variables

    The legacy variable #evidence_device_name still resolves, but it has been replaced by #evidence_item_name and {{ evidence.item_name }}. Do not use #evidence_device_name on new label templates.

    Storage Variables

    Case Variables

    Client Variables

    People Variables

    Custom Field Variables

    The legacy #custom_field_<field_id> format is shared and resolves against the evidence or storage item being printed. For new labels, use the context-specific modern format whenever possible.

    Tips for Using Label Variables

    Use QR codes and barcodes for scanning

    Combine text and variables

    Design for blank values

    Use variables that match the item being printed

    Dymo Label Printers

    Configure DYMO label printing for Monolith, build reusable label templates, print dynamic Evidence, Storage, and People labels, and troubleshoot printer connectivity.

    Monolith supports DYMO label printers for creating physical labels using information already stored in Monolith.

    Labels can range from a simple Evidence Number sticker to larger Evidence intake labels containing Case information, device details, Storage information, QR codes, barcodes, Custom Fields, or other organization-specific information.

    Common uses include:

    • Labeling physical Evidence Items

    • Labeling evidence bags or containers

    • Labeling Storage Items and forensic media

    • Creating QR code or barcode labels for scanning

    • Printing address or shipping labels for Clients and Contacts

    • Creating other reusable labels using Monolith data

    Once configured, users can select a label, choose an available DYMO printer, and print directly from the relevant record in Monolith.

    The label workflow uses both DYMO Connect and Monolith.

    DYMO Connect is used to design the physical layout of the label. Monolith provides variables that can be placed within that design and replaced with actual record information when the label is printed.

    A typical workflow looks like:

    This allows a single label template to be reused across many records without manually typing identifying information onto each label.

    The first step in configuring a DYMO printer with Monolith is to install the latest compatible version of DYMO Connect for Desktop on the computer used for printing.

    After installation:

    1. Connect and power on the DYMO printer.

    2. Open DYMO Connect for Desktop.

    3. Confirm that the printer appears as connected or available.

    4. Print a test label directly from DYMO Connect.

    Monolith uses the DYMO web service to detect and communicate with printers available to the computer.

    The service runs locally in the background and may appear in the Windows system tray or macOS menu bar. Its exact name may vary depending on the installed DYMO software version and operating system.

    This local service allows Monolith to send a label directly to a selected DYMO printer without requiring the user to work through the normal operating system print dialog each time.

    Label layouts are created using DYMO Connect.

    Use DYMO Connect to select the physical label size and design the layout. You can add standard text, images, barcodes, QR codes, and other elements supported by DYMO.

    Where information should come dynamically from Monolith, enter a supported Monolith variable instead of fixed text.

    For example:

    A larger Evidence label might contain multiple variables:

    When the label is printed from an Evidence Item, Monolith replaces those variables with information from that specific record.

    Design the DYMO template for the same physical label size that will be loaded in the printer.

    Label dimensions are stored as part of the DYMO template. Printing a template designed for a different label size may cause content to print incorrectly, span multiple physical labels, or use the available space poorly.

    If your organization regularly uses several label sizes, you may want separate templates for each size.

    Use descriptive template names so users can easily identify the correct label when printing.

    Examples might include:

    • Evidence Label - Small

    • Evidence Intake Label

    • Evidence Barcode

    • Evidence QR Code

    Monolith variables tell the label which record information to insert when it is printed.

    The complete list of currently supported variables is available under:

    Settings > Item Labels

    Variables are grouped by the type of information they represent.

    Available groups include:

    • Organization Variables

    • Evidence Variables

    • Storage Variables

    • People Variables

    Use the variables displayed in your Monolith environment when creating new labels.

    Organization variables can populate information about your organization.

    Examples include:

    Evidence variables populate information from an Evidence Item.

    Examples include:

    Additional Evidence variables are available directly from Settings > Item Labels.

    Storage variables populate information from a Storage Item.

    Examples include:

    People variables populate information from a Client or Contact.

    Examples include:

    People variables make it possible to use DYMO labels outside of traditional Evidence workflows.

    For example, a team returning Evidence or other material to a Client can create a larger shipping or address label using the Client or Contact information already stored in Monolith.

    Custom Fields can also be incorporated into supported labels.

    Custom Evidence variables use the Custom Field ID, for example:

    The Custom Field variables available in your environment are displayed under Settings > Item Labels.

    This allows an organization to include workflow-specific information on a label without requiring that information to be part of Monolith's standard fields.

    See Item Labels for the complete variable reference and configuration guidance.

    Older Monolith labels may use the previous #variable syntax.

    These legacy variables remain supported so existing label templates can continue to function.

    For new labels, use the current double-curly-brace syntax:

    This syntax is preferred for new templates and is consistent with the variable style used by Monolith report templates.

    When the label design is complete, save it from DYMO Connect as a .dymo label file.

    The saved file contains the label layout, formatting, objects, dimensions, and Monolith variables used by the template.

    Before uploading it to Monolith, confirm that:

    • The correct label size is selected.

    • Dynamic fields use supported Monolith variables.

    • Text fits within the label layout.

    • Barcode or QR code objects use the appropriate variable.

    Navigate to:

    Settings > Item Labels

    Select Add Label.

    Choose the .dymo file created in DYMO Connect.

    After the file is uploaded, it appears under Your Labels and becomes available when users print from supported records.

    Existing label templates can also be downloaded from this page when they need to be reviewed or modified in DYMO Connect.

    Labels can be deleted when they are no longer required.

    Labels can be printed from supported records throughout Monolith.

    Common locations include:

    • Evidence Items

    • Storage Items

    • Clients

    • Contacts

    Open the appropriate record and select Print Label.

    Monolith displays the label templates available in the environment. Select the desired template.

    The Print Label window then displays DYMO printers currently available through the local DYMO service.

    1. Select the label template.

    2. Select the appropriate DYMO printer.

    3. Select Print Label.

    Monolith replaces the supported variables in the selected template with information from the current record and sends the completed label to the selected printer.

    Evidence labeling is one of the most common uses for DYMO printing in Monolith.

    After entering an Evidence Item into Monolith, a user can immediately print a physical label containing identifying information such as:

    • Evidence Number

    • Case Number

    • Case Name

    • Evidence Type

    The label can then be placed directly on the Evidence Item or on an appropriate evidence bag, container, or other physical packaging.

    This reduces the need to rewrite information that has already been entered into Monolith and creates a consistent connection between the physical item and its Monolith record.

    See for additional Evidence guidance.

    DYMO labels can also be printed for Storage Items.

    This is useful when preparing external drives, media, or other storage assets for use within the lab.

    A Storage label might include:

    • Storage Number

    • Make

    • Model

    • Serial Number

    Labeling Storage Items can help connect the physical asset to its corresponding Monolith record and support storage, inventory, and audit workflows.

    See for additional information.

    Labels can also use information from Monolith Clients and Contacts.

    In addition to identification labels, this makes it possible to create address or shipping labels using information such as:

    For example, a forensic team returning material to a Client could print a DYMO shipping label using address information already stored on the Client or Contact record.

    See and for additional information.

    DYMO Connect can create QR code objects whose value comes from a Monolith variable.

    For Evidence Items, use:

    The Evidence UUID provides a globally unique value that can be encoded into a QR code.

    When the value is scanned in Monolith, Monolith can identify and navigate to the corresponding Evidence Item.

    Storage Items provide the equivalent:

    Use the UUID when a QR code is preferred or when a globally unique item identifier is needed.

    For shorter traditional barcode labels, Monolith provides a short UUID.

    For Evidence Items:

    For Storage Items:

    The shorter value helps keep traditional barcodes compact while still allowing Monolith to identify the associated record when scanned.

    A typical barcode workflow looks like:

    To create a scannable label:

    1. Open the label in DYMO Connect.

    2. Add a QR Code or Barcode object.

    3. Configure the object's data or value.

    4. Enter the appropriate Monolith variable, such as {{ evidence.uuid }} or {{ evidence.short_uuid }}

    Monolith replaces the variable with the item's identifier before the label is sent to DYMO for printing.

    QR codes and barcodes can connect a physical item back to its record in Monolith.

    For example:

    This can make it faster to locate Evidence or Storage records during day-to-day handling.

    Barcode scanning is also available in supported Evidence audit workflows, allowing physical items to be scanned during inventory or audit activities.

    See the barcode scanning and documentation for additional guidance.

    If the printer works in DYMO Connect but does not appear in Monolith, complete the following steps in order.

    Open DYMO Connect and confirm that:

    • The correct printer appears in the application.

    • The printer is shown as connected or available.

    • A test label prints successfully.

    If the printer does not appear or cannot print, check its power, USB or network connection, and DYMO configuration before continuing.

    Find the DYMO service icon in the Windows system tray or macOS menu bar.

    Then:

    1. Open the service menu.

    2. Select Stop Service, Quit, or the closest available option.

    3. Wait a few seconds.

    4. Restart or reopen the service.

    If there is no separate start option, fully quit and reopen DYMO Connect for Desktop.

    Power cycle the DYMO printer:

    1. Turn off or disconnect the printer.

    2. Wait several seconds.

    3. Reconnect or power the printer back on.

    4. Confirm that it reappears in DYMO Connect.

    Fully close and reopen Monolith, then try printing again.

    If you are using Monolith in a web browser, refresh the page after restarting the DYMO web service.

    If the printer still does not appear, restart the computer. This restarts DYMO Connect, the local web service, and the printer connection together.

    After restarting:

    1. Open DYMO Connect.

    2. Confirm that the printer is connected.

    3. Confirm that the DYMO web service is running.

    4. Open Monolith.

    When Monolith cannot find the printer:

    1. Confirm that the printer appears in DYMO Connect.

    2. Print a test label directly from DYMO Connect.

    3. Restart the DYMO web service.

    4. Power cycle the printer.

    If direct printing works in DYMO Connect but Monolith still cannot detect the printer, the issue commonly points to the DYMO web service connection rather than the physical printer.

    If a label prints but the content is misaligned, split across multiple labels, or otherwise formatted incorrectly, confirm that the physical label loaded in the printer matches the dimensions used when the template was created in DYMO Connect.

    If dynamic Monolith data does not appear correctly:

    1. Open or download the template in DYMO Connect.

    2. Confirm that the Monolith variable has not been modified or broken apart by the label editor.

    3. Compare the variable with the current syntax shown under Settings > Item Labels.

    4. Save the corrected template.

    For new templates, use the current {{ ... }} syntax rather than legacy # variables.

    After installing DYMO Connect for Desktop on macOS, confirm that DYMO.WebAPI.Mac.Host is running.

    The service normally appears as a small DYMO icon in the menu bar at the top of the screen.

    If it is not running:

    1. Open the Applications folder.

    2. Find DYMO.WebAPI.Mac.Host.

    3. Launch the application.

    4. Confirm that the DYMO icon appears in the menu bar.

    Once the service is running and the printer is connected, the DYMO printer should appear as an available printing option in Monolith.

    If restarting the DYMO web service does not resolve the issue, a complete uninstall and reinstall may be needed.

    A full uninstall should remove the application, supporting files, printer configuration, and DYMO certificates before the software is reinstalled.

    1. Open System Settings or System Preferences.

    2. Select Printers & Scanners.

    3. Select the DYMO printer.

    4. Remove the printer.

    Delete all DYMO applications from the Applications folder.

    Then review the following locations and remove the listed files or folders if they are present:

    • /Library/Extensions/DYMOUsbPrinterClassDriver.kext

    • /Library/Frameworks/DYMO

    • /Library/LaunchAgents/com.DYMO.dls.webservice.plist

    Only remove files that clearly belong to DYMO.

    1. Open Finder.

    2. Go to Applications > Utilities.

    3. Open Keychain Access.

    4. Search for DYMO.

    After removing the printer, application files, supporting files, and certificates:

    1. Restart the computer.

    2. .

    3. Reinstall DYMO Connect.

    4. Reconnect the printer.

    • Confirm the printer works in DYMO Connect before troubleshooting Monolith.

    • Design labels using the actual physical label size you plan to print.

    • Use the current {{ ... }} Monolith variable syntax for new templates.

    • Give label templates descriptive names that make their intended use obvious.

    If Monolith still cannot detect the printer, contact and include:

    • Your operating system

    • Your DYMO printer model

    • Your installed DYMO software version

    • Whether you are using the Monolith web or desktop application

    Case File System How-to Video. If the video does not render, watch on YouTube here
    If the video does not render, watch on YouTube here

    Still supported for older labels. Avoid using this format for new labels when a modern variable is available.

    Your organization's address.

    {{ organization.city }}

    #org_city

    Your organization's city.

    {{ organization.state }}

    #org_state

    Your organization's state.

    {{ organization.postal }}

    #org_postal

    Your organization's postal code.

    {{ organization.phone }}

    #org_phone

    Your organization's phone number.

    {{ organization.website }}

    #org_website

    Your organization's website URL.

    #evidence_case_number or #case_number

    The case number for this evidence item.

    {{ evidence.case_name }}

    #evidence_case_name, #evidence_case_ref, or #case_reference

    The case name or reference for this evidence item.

    {{ evidence.location }}

    #evidence_location or #location_name

    The current location of the evidence item.

    {{ evidence.type }}

    #evidence_type

    The evidence type.

    {{ evidence.brand }}

    #evidence_brand

    The manufacturer or service provider.

    {{ evidence.model_number }}

    #evidence_model_number

    The evidence model number.

    {{ evidence.item_name }}

    #evidence_item_name

    The evidence item or device name.

    {{ evidence.serial_number }}

    #evidence_serial_number

    The serial number or account name.

    {{ evidence.size }}

    #evidence_size

    The evidence size in selected units.

    {{ evidence.description }}

    #evidence_description

    The description or notes.

    {{ evidence.organization }}

    #evidence_organization

    The organization name of the client this evidence was collected for, pulled from the client associated with the case.

    {{ evidence.parent }}

    #evidence_parent

    The parent evidence name, if applicable.

    {{ evidence.progress }}

    #evidence_progress

    The current evidence progress.

    {{ evidence.intake_timestamp }}

    #evidence_intake_timestamp

    The evidence intake timestamp.

    {{ evidence.received_by }}

    #evidence_received_by

    The person who received this item at intake.

    {{ evidence.received_from }}

    #evidence_received_from

    The person who provided this item at intake.

    {{ evidence.acquired }}

    #evidence_acquired

    Whether data has been collected from this item.

    {{ evidence.acq_count }}

    #evidence_acq_count

    The number of acquisitions for this item.

    {{ evidence.photographed }}

    #evidence_photographed

    Whether this item has been photographed.

    {{ evidence.photo_count }}

    #evidence_photo_count

    The number of photos for this item.

    {{ evidence.has_child }}

    #evidence_has_child

    Whether this item has child evidence.

    {{ evidence.child_count }}

    #evidence_child_count

    The number of child evidence items.

    {{ evidence.kind }}

    #evidence_kind

    Whether this item is a parent or child evidence item.

    {{ evidence.linked_contact }}

    #evidence_linked_contact

    The linked contact, such as a custodian, suspect, victim, or other association.

    {{ evidence.uuid }}

    #evidence_uuid

    The UUID for this evidence item. Use this value to generate a QR code for scanning in Monolith.

    {{ evidence.short_uuid }}

    #evidence_short_uuid

    The short UUID for this evidence item. Use this value to generate a barcode for scanning in Monolith.

    #storage_case_number

    The case number, if the item is assigned to a case.

    {{ storage.case_name }}

    #storage_case_name

    The case name, if the item is assigned to a case.

    {{ storage.type }}

    #storage_type

    The storage item type.

    {{ storage.make }}

    #storage_make

    The storage item manufacturer.

    {{ storage.model_name }}

    #storage_model_name

    The storage item model name.

    {{ storage.model_number }}

    #storage_model_number

    The storage item model number.

    {{ storage.serial_number }}

    #storage_serial_number

    The storage item serial number.

    {{ storage.size }}

    #storage_size

    The storage item size in selected units.

    {{ storage.description }}

    #storage_description

    The description or notes.

    {{ storage.date_created }}

    #storage_date_created

    The storage item creation date.

    {{ storage.location }}

    #storage_location or #location_name

    The item's current location, if applicable.

    {{ storage.uuid }}

    #storage_uuid

    The UUID for this storage item. Use this value to generate a QR code for scanning in Monolith.

    {{ storage.short_uuid }}

    #storage_short_uuid

    The short UUID for this storage item. Use this value to generate a barcode for scanning in Monolith.

    The case type.

    {{ case.status }}

    The case status.

    {{ case.description }}

    The case synopsis or description.

    {{ case.uuid }}

    The case UUID.

    The client city.

    {{ client.state }}

    The client state or province.

    {{ client.postal }}

    The client postal code.

    {{ client.organization }}

    The client organization, if applicable.

    {{ client.phone }}

    The client office phone number.

    {{ client.mobile }}

    The client mobile phone number.

    {{ client.email }}

    The client email address.

    {{ client.type }}

    The client or contact type.

    {{ client.notes }}

    The client notes or description.

    {{ client.uuid }}

    The client UUID.

    #association_address

    The client or contact address.

    {{ people.city }}

    #association_city

    The client or contact city.

    {{ people.state }}

    #association_state

    The client or contact state or province.

    {{ people.postal }}

    #association_postal

    The client or contact postal code.

    {{ people.organization }}

    #association_org

    The client or contact organization, if applicable.

    {{ people.phone }}

    #association_phone

    The client or contact phone number.

    {{ people.mobile }}

    #association_mobile

    The client or contact mobile phone number.

    {{ people.email }}

    #association_email

    The client or contact email address.

    {{ people.type }}

    #association_type

    The client or contact type.

    {{ people.notes }}

    #association_notes

    The client or contact notes or description.

    #custom_field_<field_id>

    Case

    {{ case.custom_field_<field_id> }}

    Not available

    Client

    {{ client.custom_field_<field_id> }}

    Not available

    {{ storage.short_uuid }}

    Confirm that the DYMO web service is running.

  • Open or refresh Monolith.

  • Storage Label
  • Shipping Label

  • Custom Evidence Variables
  • Custom Storage Variables

  • The template has a descriptive name that users will recognize later.

    Manufacturer or provider
  • Model

  • Serial Number or account identifier

  • Current location

  • Description

  • Intake information

  • Custom Fields

  • QR code or barcode

  • Size
  • Current location

  • Associated Case information

  • QR code or barcode

  • .
  • Position and size the object on the label.

  • Save the .dymo file.

  • Upload the updated template under Settings > Item Labels.

  • Print the label from the corresponding Evidence or Storage Item.

  • Try printing the label again.
    Fully close and reopen Monolith.
  • Restart the computer.

  • Try printing from Monolith again.

  • Upload the updated .dymo file to Monolith.

  • Test the label again.

  • Refresh or reopen Monolith.

  • Try printing again.

  • Repeat this process for each DYMO printer shown.

    /Library/LaunchDaemons/com.DYMO.pnpd.plist
  • The DYMO folder within /Library/Printers

  • Delete DYMO certificate items that are found.

  • Search for localhost.

  • Review any matching certificate.

  • If its properties show that it was issued by DYMO, delete it.

  • Confirm that the printer appears in DYMO Connect.
  • Print a test label.

  • Confirm that DYMO.WebAPI.Mac.Host is running.

  • Open Monolith and try printing again.

  • Use Evidence labels to connect physical Evidence with its Monolith record.

  • Use Storage labels to support media and asset identification.

  • Consider QR codes or barcodes when physical items need to be quickly located or scanned in Monolith.

  • Use Custom Field variables when organization-specific information needs to appear on a label.

  • Test a new template before deploying it broadly.

  • Confirm the correct printer and physical label size before printing.

  • Keep DYMO Connect and its local web service installed and running on computers used for label printing.

  • Whether the printer appears in DYMO Connect

  • Whether a test label prints successfully from DYMO Connect

  • Whether the DYMO web service is running

  • Any error messages or screenshots

  • Install DYMO Connect
            ↓
    Design Label in DYMO Connect
            ↓
    Add Monolith Variables
            ↓
    Save the .dymo Label File
            ↓
    Settings > Item Labels
            ↓
    Upload the Label to Monolith
            ↓
    Open Evidence, Storage, Client, or Contact Record
            ↓
    Select Print Label
            ↓
    Choose Label and DYMO Printer
            ↓
    Monolith Populates the Variables
            ↓
    Print
    {{ evidence.evidence_number }}
    {{ evidence.evidence_number }}
    
    Case: {{ evidence.case_number }}
    {{ evidence.case_name }}
    
    {{ evidence.brand }} {{ evidence.model_number }}
    {{ evidence.serial_number }}
    {{ organization.name }}
    {{ organization.address }}
    {{ organization.city }}
    {{ organization.state }}
    {{ organization.postal }}
    {{ organization.phone }}
    {{ organization.website }}
    {{ evidence.evidence_number }}
    {{ evidence.case_number }}
    {{ evidence.case_name }}
    {{ evidence.location }}
    {{ evidence.type }}
    {{ evidence.brand }}
    {{ evidence.model_number }}
    {{ evidence.serial_number }}
    {{ evidence.item_name }}
    {{ evidence.size }}
    {{ evidence.description }}
    {{ evidence.organization }}
    {{ evidence.progress }}
    {{ evidence.intake_timestamp }}
    {{ evidence.received_by }}
    {{ evidence.received_from }}
    {{ evidence.linked_contact }}
    {{ storage.storage_number }}
    {{ storage.case_number }}
    {{ storage.case_name }}
    {{ storage.type }}
    {{ storage.make }}
    {{ storage.model_name }}
    {{ storage.model_number }}
    {{ storage.serial_number }}
    {{ storage.size }}
    {{ storage.description }}
    {{ storage.date_created }}
    {{ storage.location }}
    {{ people.name }}
    {{ people.organization }}
    {{ people.address }}
    {{ people.city }}
    {{ people.state }}
    {{ people.postal }}
    {{ people.phone }}
    {{ people.mobile }}
    {{ people.email }}
    {{ people.type }}
    {{ evidence.custom_field_38 }}
    {{ evidence.evidence_number }}
    {{ people.name }}
    {{ people.organization }}
    {{ people.address }}
    {{ people.city }}
    {{ people.state }}
    {{ people.postal }}
    {{ evidence.uuid }}
    {{ storage.uuid }}
    {{ evidence.short_uuid }}
    {{ storage.short_uuid }}
    DYMO Barcode Object
            ↓
    {{ evidence.short_uuid }}
            ↓
    Print Evidence Label
            ↓
    Barcode Contains Evidence Identifier
            ↓
    Scan Barcode in Monolith
            ↓
    Evidence Item Located
    Physical Evidence
            ↓
    DYMO Label
            ↓
    QR Code / Barcode
            ↓
    Scan
            ↓
    Monolith Evidence Record

    How DYMO Label Printing Works

    Install DYMO Software

    If the printer cannot print directly from DYMO Connect, resolve that connection first. Monolith cannot communicate with a printer that is not recognized by the DYMO software.

    DYMO Web Service

    DYMO Connect and its local web service must be installed and running on the computer used to print labels from Monolith.

    Design a Label in DYMO Connect

    DYMO Connect controls the physical design, formatting, and dimensions of the label. Monolith provides the data that fills the variables when the label is printed.

    Choose the Correct Label Size

    Add Monolith Variables

    Organization Variables

    Evidence Variables

    Storage Variables

    People Variables

    Custom Field Variables

    Legacy Label Variables

    Save the DYMO Template

    Upload the Label to Monolith

    Print a Label

    The printer is selected at print time. This makes it possible to use different DYMO printers or label sizes without permanently assigning one printer to a template.

    Label Evidence Items

    Label Storage Items

    Client and Contact Labels

    QR Codes

    Barcodes

    Create a QR Code or Barcode in DYMO Connect

    Barcode Scanning in Monolith

    Printer Not Detected in Monolith

    1. Confirm the Printer Works in DYMO Connect

    2. Restart the DYMO Web Service

    The service may appear as DYMO Connect Web Service, DYMO Web Service, DYMO.WebAPI.Mac.Host, or a similar name depending on your operating system and DYMO software version.

    3. Restart the Printer

    4. Restart Monolith

    5. Restart the Computer

    Recommended Troubleshooting Order

    Label Prints Incorrectly

    macOS Setup

    macOS Troubleshooting

    The exact folders and files may vary depending on your macOS and DYMO software versions. Administrator access may be required to remove some files.

    Remove the DYMO Printer

    Delete DYMO Applications and Supporting Files

    Delete DYMO Certificates From Keychain

    Reinstall DYMO Connect

    Recommended Practices

    Contact Support

    Related Documentation

    Download DYMO Connect for Desktop for Windows
    Download DYMO Connect for Desktop for macOS
    Evidence Items
    Storage Items
    Clients
    Contacts
    Audits
    Download the latest compatible DYMO Connect software
    support@monolithforensics.com
    Item Labels
    Evidence Items
    Storage Items
    Clients
    If the video does not render, you can
    How To Video on Notes Version History
    If the video does not render, you can
    If the video does not render, you can
    If the video does not render,
    Contacts
    Audits
    watch directly on YouTube here
    watch the walkthrough on YouTube here
    If the video does not render,
    watch directly on YouTube here
    watch directly on YouTube here
    If the video does not render,
    watch on YouTube here
    you can watch o nYouTube here
    If the video above does not render,
    watch directly on YouTube here
    If the video does not render, you can
    watch on YouTube here
    If the video does not render, you can
    watch on YouTube here